2018 Explorer

User Manual: Pdf 2018-explorer

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 571

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

2018 EXPLORER Owner’s Manual

owner.ford.com

ford.ca

May 2018
Fourth Printing
Owner’s Manual
Explorer
Litho in U.S.A.

JL2J 19A321 AC

The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of
continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications, design or equipment at any time
without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a
retrieval system or translated into any language in any form by any means without our written permission.
Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201711 20180425091459

California Proposition 65

WARNING: Operating, servicing and
maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals
including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State
of California to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure,
avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine
except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your
hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For
more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and
related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash your hands after handling.

Table of Contents
Introduction

Supplementary Restraints
System

About This Manual ..........................................7
Symbols Glossary ............................................7
Data Recording .................................................9
Perchlorate ........................................................11
Ford Credit .........................................................11
Replacement Parts Recommendation
............................................................................12
Special Notices ...............................................12
Mobile Communications Equipment
............................................................................13
Export Unique Options ................................14

Principle of Operation .................................44
Driver and Passenger Airbags ..................45
Front Passenger Sensing System ...........46
Side Airbags ....................................................48
Passenger Knee Airbag ...............................49
Safety Canopy™ ...........................................49
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ......50
Airbag Disposal ...............................................51

Keys and Remote Controls

Instrument Panel Overview .......................16

Principle of Operation ..................................52
General Information on Radio
Frequencies .................................................52
Remote Control .............................................53
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................58

Child Safety

MyKey™

General Information ......................................18
Child Seats ........................................................19
Installing Child Restraints ..........................20
Booster Seats .................................................29
Child Restraint Positioning .........................31
Child Safety Locks .........................................33

Principle of Operation .................................59
Creating a MyKey ..........................................60
Clearing All MyKeys .......................................61
Checking MyKey System Status ...............61
Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems ........................................................62
MyKey Troubleshooting ..............................62

Environment
Protecting the Environment .......................15

At a Glance

Seatbelts

Doors and Locks

Principle of Operation .................................35
Fastening the Seatbelts .............................36
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .....................39
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ............................................................40
Seatbelt Reminder .......................................40
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance ...............................................42
Seatbelt Extension .......................................42

Locking and Unlocking ...............................64
Keyless Entry ...................................................67

Liftgate
Manual Liftgate .............................................69
Power Liftgate ................................................70

Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ........................74
Anti-Theft Alarm ...........................................75

Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .........................43

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Table of Contents
Sun Visors ........................................................95
Moonroof .........................................................95

Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................76
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column ..........................................................76
Audio Control ..................................................78
Voice Control ...................................................78
Cruise Control .................................................79
Information Display Control ......................79
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................79

General Information ...................................105
Information Messages ................................119

Pedals

Climate Control

Adjusting the Pedals ...................................80

Manual Climate Control ............................133
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD .................134
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony AM/FM/CD .........................136
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.........................................................................138
Rear Passenger Climate Controls .........140
Heated Windows and Mirrors ..................141
Cabin Air Filter ...............................................142
Remote Start .................................................142

Instrument Cluster
Gauges ...............................................................97
Warning Lamps and Indicators .............100
Audible Warnings and Indicators ..........103

Information Displays

Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................81
Autowipers .......................................................81
Windshield Washers ....................................82
Rear Window Wiper and Washers ..........82

Lighting
General Information .....................................83
Lighting Control .............................................83
Autolamps .......................................................84
Instrument Lighting Dimmer ....................84
Headlamp Exit Delay ...................................85
Daytime Running Lamps ...........................85
Automatic High Beam Control ................86
Front Fog Lamps ...........................................87
Direction Indicators .......................................87
Interior Lamps ................................................87
Ambient Lighting ..........................................89

Sitting in the Correct Position .................144
Head Restraints ...........................................144
Manual Seats ................................................147
Power Seats ..................................................148
Memory Function ........................................150
Rear Seats .......................................................151
Heated Seats ................................................158
Climate Controlled Seats .........................159

Windows and Mirrors

Universal Garage Door Opener

Seats

Power Windows ..............................................91
Global Opening ..............................................92
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................92
Interior Mirror ..................................................95

Universal Garage Door Opener ...............161

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Table of Contents

Auxiliary Power Points ...............................165

Parking Brake .................................................197
Hill Start Assist .............................................197

Storage Compartments

Traction Control

Center Console .............................................167
Overhead Console ......................................168

Principle of Operation ...............................199
Using Traction Control ..............................199

Starting and Stopping the
Engine

Stability Control

Auxiliary Power Points

Principle of Operation ..............................200
Using Stability Control ..............................201

General Information ...................................169
Ignition Switch ..............................................169
Keyless Starting ...........................................169
Starting a Gasoline Engine .......................170
Engine Block Heater ....................................173

Terrain Control
Using Terrain Control ................................202
Using Hill Descent Control ......................203

Fuel and Refueling

Parking Aids

Safety Precautions ......................................175
Fuel Quality - Gasoline ..............................175
Fuel Quality - E85 ........................................176
Fuel Filler Funnel Location ........................177
Running Out of Fuel ....................................177
Refueling .........................................................179
Fuel Consumption ........................................181

Principle of Operation ...............................205
Rear Parking Aid ..........................................205
Front Parking Aid ........................................206
Side Sensing System .................................207
Active Park Assist .......................................209
Rear View Camera .......................................215
180 Degree Camera ....................................218

Engine Emission Control

Cruise Control

Emission Law ................................................183
Catalytic Converter .....................................184

Principle of Operation ...............................220
Using Cruise Control ..................................220
Using Adaptive Cruise Control ................221

Transmission
Driving Aids

Automatic Transmission ...........................187

Driver Alert .....................................................227
Lane Keeping System ...............................228
Blind Spot Information System .............232
Cross Traffic Alert .......................................234
Steering ...........................................................237
Pre-Collision Assist ....................................238

Four-Wheel Drive
Principle of Operation .................................191
Using Four-Wheel Drive .............................191

Brakes
General Information ...................................196
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.........................................................................197

Load Carrying
Rear Under Floor Storage .........................241

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only)
..........................................................................271
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
..........................................................................271

Cargo Nets ......................................................241
Luggage Covers ...........................................242
Roof Racks and Load Carriers ................242
Load Limit ......................................................243

Fuses

Towing

Fuse Specification Chart ..........................273
Changing a Fuse ..........................................282

Towing a Trailer ...........................................249
Trailer Sway Control ..................................250
Recommended Towing Weights ..........250
Essential Towing Checks .........................252
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................254
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ ..........255

Maintenance
General Information ..................................284
Opening and Closing the Hood .............284
Under Hood Overview - 2.3L EcoBoost™
........................................................................285
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Duratec
........................................................................286
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................287
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L EcoBoost™
........................................................................288
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L
Ecoboost™ ...............................................289
Engine Oil Check .........................................289
Oil Change Indicator Reset .....................290
Engine Coolant Check ...............................291
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....................................295
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™ .........295
Brake Fluid Check .......................................297
Power Steering Fluid Check ...................298
Washer Fluid Check ...................................298
Changing the 12V Battery ........................298
Checking the Wiper Blades ....................300
Changing the Wiper Blades ...................300
Adjusting the Headlamps ........................301
Removing a Headlamp ............................303
Changing a Bulb .........................................303
Bulb Specification Chart .........................306
Changing the Engine Air Filter ...............308

Driving Hints
Breaking-In ....................................................257
Economical Driving .....................................257
Driving Through Water ..............................258
Floor Mats .....................................................258

Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ................................260
Hazard Flashers ...........................................261
Fuel Shutoff ...................................................261
Jump Starting the Vehicle .......................262
Post-Crash Alert System .........................264
Transporting the Vehicle .........................264

Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need .............266
In California (U.S. Only) ............................267
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ....................268
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only) ......................269
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................269
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
..........................................................................271

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Table of Contents
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec .......................................................354
Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™ ...............................................358

Vehicle Care
General Information ..................................309
Cleaning Products .....................................309
Cleaning the Exterior ................................309
Waxing ..............................................................311
Cleaning the Engine .....................................311
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
..........................................................................311
Cleaning the Interior ...................................312
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................312
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................313
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ..............314
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................314
Vehicle Storage ............................................314

General Information ..................................364
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium AM/
FM/CD ........................................................365
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/FM/
CD .................................................................367
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC ...........................................................368
Digital Radio ..................................................372
Satellite Radio ..............................................375
USB Port .........................................................377

Wheels and Tires

SYNC™

General Information ....................................317
Tire Care ..........................................................319
Using Summer Tires ..................................332
Using Snow Chains ....................................332
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ..........333
Changing a Road Wheel ...........................337
Technical Specifications ...........................341

General Information ..................................378
Using Voice Recognition ..........................380
Using SYNC™ With Your Phone ...........382
SYNC™ Applications and Services ......394
Using SYNC™ With Your Media Player
.......................................................................399
SYNC™ Troubleshooting ........................408

Capacities and Specifications

SYNC™ 3

Audio System

General Information ...................................416
Home Screen ...............................................429
Using Voice Recognition ...........................431
Entertainment ..............................................437
Climate ...........................................................448
Phone ...............................................................451
Navigation .....................................................456
Apps ................................................................464
Settings ..........................................................467
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting .....................481

Engine Specifications - 2.3L EcoBoost™
........................................................................343
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Duratec
........................................................................343
Engine Specifications - 3.5L Ecoboost™
........................................................................344
Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L EcoBoost™ .....345
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec ............346
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Ecoboost™ ......347
Vehicle Identification Number ..............348
Vehicle Certification Label ......................349
Transmission Code Designation ...........349
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™ ..............................................350

Accessories
Accessories ...................................................495

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Table of Contents
Ford Protect
Ford Protect ..................................................497

Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ......499
Normal Scheduled Maintenance .........502
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance ............................................505
Scheduled Maintenance Record ..........507

Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ..............518
End User License Agreement ................520
Type Approvals ...........................................546

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Ford. We
recommend that you take some time to
get to know your vehicle by reading this
manual. The more that you know about
your vehicle, the greater the safety and
pleasure you will get from driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E154903

Right-hand side.

Left-hand side.

SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may
see on your vehicle.
Air conditioning system

Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the
vehicle you have purchased.

E162384

E231157

Air conditioning system lubricant
type
Anti-lock braking system

Note: Some of the illustrations in this
manual may show features as used in
different models, so may appear different
to you on your vehicle.

Avoid smoking, flames or sparks

Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.

Battery

Note: Pass on this manual when selling
your vehicle. It is an integral part of your
vehicle.

Battery acid

This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.

Brake fluid - non petroleum
based
Brake system

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
Brake system

Flammable
E231160

E270480

Cabin air filter

Front airbag
E67017

Check fuel cap

Front fog lamps

Child safety door lock or unlock

Fuel pump reset

Child seat lower anchor

Fuse compartment

Child seat tether anchor

Hazard flashers

Cruise control

Heated rear window

Do not open when hot

Windshield defrosting system

Engine air filter

Interior luggage compartment
release

Engine coolant

Jack

Engine coolant temperature

Keep out of reach of children

E71340

E161353

Lighting control

Engine oil

Low tire pressure warning

Explosive gas

Maintain correct fluid level

Fan warning

Note operating instructions

Fasten seatbelt
E71880

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
Horn control

Shield the eyes

E270945
E167012

Panic alarm

Stability control
E138639

Hill descent control

Parking aid
E139213

E163957

Trail control

Parking brake
E271982

Windshield wiping system

Power steering fluid
E270969

Windshield wash and wipe

Power windows front/rear

Power window lockout

DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording

Requires registered technician

Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing
diagnostic information about your vehicle.
This potentially includes information about
the performance or status of various
systems and modules in the vehicle, such
as engine, throttle, steering or brake
systems. In order to properly diagnose and
service your vehicle, Ford Motor Company
(Ford of Canada in Canada), and service
and repair facilities may access or share
among them vehicle diagnostic
information received through a direct
connection to your vehicle when
diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford
of Canada, in Canada) may, where
permitted by law, use vehicle diagnostic
information for vehicle improvement or
with other information we may have about
you, (for example, your contact
information), to offer you products or
services that may interest you. Data may
be provided to our service providers such

E231159

Safety alert

See Owner's Manual

See Service Manual
E231158

Service engine soon

Passenger airbag activated
E270849

Passenger airbag deactivated
E270850

Side airbag

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
this data will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed.
The event data recorder is designed to
record data related to vehicle dynamics
and safety systems for a short period
of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

as part suppliers that may help diagnose
malfunctions, and who are similarly
obligated to protect data. We retain this
data only as long as necessary to perform
these functions or to comply with law. We
may provide information where required
in response to official requests to law
enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with
lawful authority or court order, and such
information may be used in legal
proceedings. For U.S. only (if equipped), if
you choose to use connected apps and
services, such as SYNC Vehicle Health
Report or MyFord Mobile App, you consent
that certain diagnostic information may
also be accessed electronically by Ford
Motor Company and Ford authorized
service facilities, and that the diagnostic
information may be used to provide
services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you
products and services that may interest
you, where permitted by law. For Canada
only, for more information, please review
the Ford of Canada privacy policy at
www.ford.ca, including our U.S. data
storage and use of service providers in
other jurisdictions who may be subject to
legal requirements in Canada, the United
States and other countries applicable to
them, for example, lawful requirements to
disclose personal information to
governmental authorities in those
countries. See SYNC™ (page 378).

The event data recorder in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or
the brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling;
and
• Where the driver was positioning
the steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is
recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
is recorded by the event data recorder
under normal driving conditions and no
personal data or information (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) is
recorded (see limitations regarding 911
Assist and Traffic, directions and
Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data
with the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.

Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event
data recorder. The main purpose of an
event data recorder is to record, in
certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an airbag
deployment or hitting a road obstacle;

To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event
data recorder is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that
have such special equipment, can read
10

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the
service. For more information, see
Traffic, Directions and Information,
Terms and Conditions. See SYNC™
(page 378).

the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the event data recorder.
Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities or other
third parties acting with lawful
authority. Other parties may seek to
access the information independently
of Ford Motor Company and Ford of
Canada.

PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such
as airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners
and remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling
may apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.

Note: Including to the extent that any
law pertaining to Event Data Recorders
applies to SYNC or its features, please
note the following: Once 911 Assist (if
equipped) is enabled (set ON), 911 Assist
may, through any paired and connected
cell phone, disclose to emergency
services that the vehicle has been in a
crash involving the deployment of an
airbag or, in certain vehicles, the
activation of the fuel pump shut-off.
Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist
may also be capable of being used to
electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other
details about the vehicle or crash or
personal information about the
occupants to assist 911 operators to
provide the most appropriate emergency
services. If you do not want to disclose
this information, do not activate the 911
Assist feature. See SYNC™ (page 378).

For more information visit:
Web Address

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

FORD CREDIT
US Only
Ford Credit offers a full range of financing
and lease plans to help you acquire your
vehicle. If you have financed or leased your
vehicle through Ford Credit, thank you for
your business.
We offer a number of convenient ways for
you to contact us, and to manage your
account.
Call 1-800-727-7000.

Additionally, when you connect to
Traffic, Directions and Information (if
equipped, U.S. only), the service uses
GPS technology and advanced vehicle
sensors to collect the vehicle’s current
location, travel direction, and speed
(“vehicle travel information”), only to
help provide you with the directions,
traffic reports, or business searches
that you request. If you do not want

For more information about Ford Credit
and access to Account Manager, go to
www.ford.com/finance.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
Warranty on Replacement Parts

REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION

Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Ford Warranty. The Ford
Warranty may not cover damage caused
to your vehicle as a result of failed
non-Ford parts. For additional information,
refer to the terms and conditions of the
Ford Warranty.

We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
whenever your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.

SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs

For a detailed description of what is
covered and what is not covered by your
vehicle’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
see the Warranty Manual that is provided
to you along with your Owner’s Manual.

One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that
conform to the specifications detailed in
this Owner’s Manual. Genuine Ford and
Motorcraft parts meet or exceed these
specifications.

Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.

Collision Repairs

WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the
specific warnings and instructions could
result in personal injury.

We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen.
Genuine Ford replacement collision parts
meet our stringent requirements for fit,
finish, structural integrity, corrosion
protection and dent resistance. During
vehicle development we validate that
these parts deliver the intended level of
protection as a whole system. A great way
to know for sure you are getting this level
of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.

WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected
by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH
or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can
occur.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector

Using Your Vehicle With a
Snowplow
Do not use this vehicle for
snowplowing.

WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain
access to vehicle data and impair the
performance of safety related systems.
Only allow repair facilities that follow our
service and repair instructions to connect
their equipment to the data link connector.

Your vehicle does not have a snowplowing
package.

Using Your Vehicle as an
Ambulance
Do not use this vehicle as an
ambulance.
Your vehicle does not have the Ford
Ambulance Preparation Package.

Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in
conjunction with a diagnostic scan tool for
vehicle diagnostics, repairs and
reprogramming services. Installing an
aftermarket device that uses the DLC
during normal driving for purposes such as
remote insurance company monitoring,
transmission of vehicle data to other
devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to
vehicle systems. We do not recommend
or endorse the use of aftermarket plug-in
devices unless approved by Ford. The
vehicle Warranty will not cover damage
caused by an aftermarket plug-in device.

MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks
and Utility Type Vehicles
WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.

Using mobile communications equipment
is becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in
emergency situations. Safety must be
paramount when using mobile

Before you drive your vehicle, please read
this Owner’s Guide carefully. Your vehicle
is not a passenger car. As with other
vehicles of this type, failure to operate this
vehicle correctly may result in loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury or death.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Introduction
communications equipment to avoid
negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but
is not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.

EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your
vehicle may be equipped with features and
options that are different from the features
and options that are described in this
Owner’s Manual. A market unique
supplement may be supplied that
complements this book. By referring to the
market unique supplement, if provided,
you can properly identify those features,
recommendations and specifications that
are unique to your vehicle. This Owner’s
Manual is written primarily for the U.S. and
Canadian Markets. Features or equipment
listed as standard may be different on units
built for export. Refer to this Owner’s
Manual for all other required
information and warnings.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Environment
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and
the authorized disposal of waste, cleaning
and lubrication materials are significant
steps toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor
Company's sustainability progress and
initiatives visit:
Web Address

www.sustainability.ford.com

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

At a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW

E192491

Air vents.

Direction indicators. See
Direction Indicators (page 87).
High beam. See Lighting
Control (page 83).

Information display controls. See
Information Display Control
(page 79).

Instrument cluster. See Warning
Lamps and Indicators (page
100).

Wiper lever. See Wipers and
Washers (page 81).

180 degree camera. See 180
Degree Camera (page 218).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking aid switch. See Parking
Aids (page 205).

Information and entertainment
display.

Hazard warning flasher switch.
See Hazard Flashers (page 261).

Audio unit. See Audio System
(page 364).

Climate controls. See Climate
Control (page 133).

Heated rear window switch. See
Heated Windows and Mirrors
(page 141).

At a Glance
M

Ignition switch. See Ignition
Switch (page 169). See Keyless
Starting (page 169).

Voice control. See Voice
Control (page 78). Audio
control. See Audio Control
(page 78).

Horn.

Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 76).

Cruise control buttons. See
Using Cruise Control (page
220).

Power liftgate release button.
See Power Liftgate (page 70).

Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 83).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
GENERAL INFORMATION

Technician (CPST) to make sure that you
properly install the child restraint in your
vehicle and that you consult your
pediatrician to make sure you have a child
restraint appropriate for your child. To
locate a child restraint fitting station and
CPST, contact NHTSA toll free at
1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at
1-800-333-0371 or go to www.tc.gc.ca to
find a Child Car Seat Clinic in your area.
Failure to properly restrain children in child
restraints made especially for their height,
age and weight, may result in an increased
risk of serious injury or death to your child.

See the following sections for directions
on how to properly use safety restraints
for children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and
weight. Child safety restraints must be
bought separately from your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions and
guidelines may result in an increased risk
of serious injury or death to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety

WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat
related injuries, including brain damage.
Small children are particularly at risk.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Child

Child size, height, weight, or age

Infants or
toddlers

Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally age four or younger).

Use a child safety seat
(sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible
seat, or toddler seat).

Small children

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in.
(1.45 m) tall, are greater than age four
and less than age 12, and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer).

Use a belt-positioning
booster seat.

Children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a belt-positioning booster
seat (generally children who are at least
4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than
Larger children
80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by child restraint manufacturer).

•

You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a
height of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg). Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of
children in your vehicle.
When possible, always properly
restrain children 12 years of age and
under in a rear seating position of your
vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly
restrained in the rear seating positions
than in a front seating position. See
Front Passenger Sensing System
(page 46).

Recommended restraint
type

Use a vehicle seatbelt
having the lap belt snug
and low across the hips,
shoulder belt centered
across the shoulder and
chest, and seatback
upright.

CHILD SEATS

E142594

Use a child safety seat (sometimes called
an infant carrier, convertible seat, or
toddler seat) for Infants, toddlers and
children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less
(generally four-years-old or younger).
19

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
•

INSTALLING CHILD
RESTRAINTS
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts

•
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

•

WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are
unable to properly secure all children in a
rear seating position, properly secure the
largest child on the front seat. If you must
use a forward facing child restraint on the
front seat, move the seat as far back as
possible. Failure to follow these
instructions could result in personal injury
or death.

•

Keep the buckle release button
pointing up and away from the safety
seat, with the tongue between the child
restraint and the release button, to
prevent accidental unbuckling.
Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
For second-row seating positions,
adjust the recliner slightly to improve
child restraint fit. If needed, remove the
head restraints.
For third-row seating positions, stow
the head restraints to improve child
restraint fit. See Head Restraints
(page 144).
Put the seatbelt in the automatic
locking mode. See Step 5. This vehicle
does not require the use of a locking
clip.

Perform the following steps when
installing the child restraint with
combination lap and shoulder belts:

WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle
assemblies and LATCH lower anchors,
rendering those features potentially
unusable. To avoid risk of injury, make sure
occupants only use seating positions
where they are able to be properly
restrained.

Note: Although the child restraint
illustrated is a forward facing child restraint,
the steps are the same for installing a rear
facing child restraint.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.

When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Standard Seatbelts

E142530

3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according
to the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing
is not twisted.

E142528

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E142529

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, pull
down on the shoulder belt and then
grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt
together behind the belt tongue.

E142531

4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
for that seating position until you hear
a snap and feel the latch engage. Make
sure the tongue is latched securely by
pulling on it.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle provides extra help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

E142875

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder
portion of the belt and pull downward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E142534

10.

Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and
back to make sure the seat is securely
held in place. To check this, grab the
seat at the belt path and attempt to
move it side to side and forward and
back. There should be no more than
1 in (2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.

We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety
Technician to make certain the child
restraint is properly installed. In Canada,
check with Transport Canada for referral
to a Child Car Seat Clinic.

E142533

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Inflatable Seatbelts

E142530

E142528

Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder
belt.

E146523

E146522

2. After positioning the child safety seat
in the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
7.

Try to pull the belt out of the retractor
to make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should
not be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the
belt and repeat Steps 5 and 6.

E146524

5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.

E146525

8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining
slack that exists once you add the extra
weight of the child to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean
toward the buckle will additionally help
to remove remaining slack from the
belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).

Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove
slack. The belt clicks as it retracts to
indicate it is in the automatic locking
mode.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety

10.

The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seat backrest and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.

LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted
attachments that connect to the two lower
anchors at the LATCH equipped seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
attachment method eliminates the need
to use seatbelts to attach the child
restraint. However, you can still use the
seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, you must
also attach the top tether strap to the
proper top tether anchor if a top tether
strap has been provided with your child
restraint.

Using Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH)

Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.

WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong
enough to hold two child safety restraint
attachments and may break, causing
serious injury or death.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the
child restraint only to the anchors shown.

Second-Row Bucket Seats and
Third-Row Passenger Side

Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center
Seating Use)

WARNING: The standardized
spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in
(280 mm) center to center. Do not use
LATCH lower anchors for the center
seating position unless the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit and
specify using anchors spaced at least as
far apart as those in this vehicle.

E190825

Second-Row Bench Seats and
Third-Row Passenger Side

The lower anchors at the center of the
second row bench seat are spaced 20.5 in
(52 cm) apart. The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (28 cm)
center to center. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at
the center seating position. You can only
use LATCH compatible child restraints
(with attachments on belt webbing) at
this seating position provided that the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions
permit use with the anchor spacing stated.
Do not attach a child restraint to any lower
anchor if an adjacent child restraint is
attached to that anchor.

E190826

Each time you use the safety seat, check
that the seat is properly attached to the
lower anchors and tether anchor, if
applicable. Tug the child restraint from side
to side and forward and back where it is
secured to your vehicle. The seat should
move less than 1 in (2.5 cm) when you do
this for a proper installation.

E144054

The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seat backrest below the symbols as
shown. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions to properly
install a child restraint with LATCH
attachments.

If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.

Follow the instructions on attaching child
safety seats with tether straps. See Using
Tether Straps later in this chapter.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety
Seats

Second-Row Bench Seats and
Third-Row Passenger Side

When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.

Using Tether Straps

E190828

Perform the following steps to install a
child safety seat with tether anchors:

Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap
which extends from the back of
the child safety seat and hooks to an
anchoring point called the top tether
anchor. Tether straps are available as an
accessory for many older safety seats.

Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.

Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether
strap if the tether strap on your safety seat
does not reach the appropriate top tether
anchor in your vehicle.
Once you install the child safety seat using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of
the LATCH system, or both, you can attach
the top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle
are in the following positions (shown from
top view):
Second -Row Bucket Seats and
Third-Row Passenger Side

E190829

E190827

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Placement of the Tether Strap
• Second row outboard seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the seat backrest, under the head
restraint and between the head
restraint posts. If needed, remove the
head restraint to improve the fit of the
child safety seat or tether strap.
• Second row center seat positions:
Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the top of the head restraint. If
needed, remove the head restraint to
improve the fit of the child safety seat
or tether strap. See Head Restraints
(page 144).
• Third row seat position: Route the child
safety seat tether strap over the seat
backrest, under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. If
needed, fold the head restraint down
to improve the fit of the child safety
seat or tether strap. See Head
Restraints (page 144).

E190833

4. Tighten the child safety seat tether
strap according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend
its use.

1. Route the tether strap.
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position.
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown. The tether hook may be
twisted ½ turn to improve installation.
If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly,
the child safety seat may not be
retained properly in the event of a
crash.

Second-Row Bucket Seats (40/40)

E190830

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
Second-Row Bench Seats (60/40)

E190831

Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.

Third-Row Seats

Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four (4) and less
than age twelve (12), and between 40 lb
(18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to
100 lb (45 kg) if recommended by your
child restraint manufacturer). Many state
and provincial laws require that children
use approved booster seats until they
reach age eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m)
tall, or 80 lb (36 kg).

E190832

Note: The cargo tie downs at the rear edge
of the floor are not tether anchors.

Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions
when seated without a booster seat:

BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head
(as measured at the tops of the ears)
above the top of the seat. In this case,
move the backless booster to another
seating position with a higher seat backrest
or head restraint and lap and shoulder
belts, or consider using a high back booster
seat.
E142595

•

•
•
•
•

Can the child sit all the way back
against their vehicle seat backrest with
knees bent comfortably at the edge of
the seat cushion?
Can the child sit without slouching?
Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
Can the child stay seated like this for
the whole trip?

E70710

•

Always use booster seats in conjunction
with your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.

If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.

Types of Booster Seats

Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the
lap belt low and snug across the hips,
never up across the stomach, and lets you
adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest
and rest snugly near the center of the
shoulder. The following drawings compare
the ideal fit (center) to a shoulder belt
uncomfortably close to the neck and a
shoulder belt that could slip off the
shoulder. The drawings also show how the
lap belt should be low and snug across the
child's hips.

E68924

•

High back booster seats

Backless booster seats

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety

E142596

E142597

If the booster seat slides on the vehicle
seat upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet
liner under the booster seat may improve
this condition. Do not introduce any item
thicker than this under the booster seat.
Check with the booster seat
manufacturer's instructions.

CHILD RESTRAINT
POSITIONING

WARNING: Always carefully follow
the instructions and warnings provided by
the manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint

WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is
improperly installed or utilized, is
inappropriate for your child's height, age,
or weight or does not properly fit the child
may increase the risk of serious injury or
death.

WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are
not in use. They could become projectiles
in a sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child
to put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.

WARNING: Do not allow a
passenger to hold a child on their lap when
your vehicle is moving. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.

WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.

WARNING: Do not use pillows,
books or towels to boost your child's
height. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety

Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X

Restraint
Type

Combined
Weight of
Child and
Child
Restraint

LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)

LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
Only)

Rear facing
Up to 65 lb
child
(29.5 kg)
restraint

Seatbelt
and Top
Tether
Anchor

Seatbelt
and LATCH
(Lower
Anchors
and Top
Tether
Anchor)

Rear facing
Over 65 lb
child
(29.5 kg)
restraint
Forward
facing
child
restraint

Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Forward
facing
child
restraint

Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)

Seatbelt
Only

Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
144).

CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Child Safety

E112197

The childproof locks are located on the
rear edge of each rear door and must be
set separately for each door.

Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and
clockwise to unlock.

Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and
counterclockwise to unlock.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelts
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt
assembly made up of one buckle and one
tongue designed to be used as a pair. Use
the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder
only. Never wear the shoulder belt under
the arm. Never use a single seatbelt for
more than one person.

WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always
be properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger
hold a child on his or her lap while the
vehicle is moving. The passenger cannot
protect the child from injury in a crash.

WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when
an airbag supplemental restraint system
is provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk
of injury or death.

WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may
be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine.
The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a
small child. Check seat covers and buckles
before you place a child anywhere near
them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have
lap and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants
of the vehicle should always properly wear
their seatbelts, even when an airbag
supplemental restraint system is provided.

WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seatbelts. Make sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.

The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic
locking mode, (except driver seatbelt
and rear inflatable seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the front
outboard passenger seating position.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.

E71880

•

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelt warning light and chime.

Seatbelts

E67017

•

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.

The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes, and in rollovers. The seatbelt
pretensioners at the front seating positions
are designed to tighten the seatbelts firmly
against the occupant’s body when
activated. This helps increase the
effectiveness of the seatbelts. In frontal
crashes, the seatbelt pretensioners can be
activated alone or, if the crash is of
sufficient severity, together with the front
airbags.

E142588

2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the
buckle.

Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy

FASTENING THE SEATBELTS

WARNING: Always ride and drive
with your seatback upright and properly
fasten your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of
the seatbelt snugly and low across the
hips. Position the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt across your chest. Pregnant
women must follow this practice. See the
following figure.

Standard belts shown, inflatable belts
similar
The front outboard and rear safety
restraints in the vehicle are combination
lap and shoulder belts.

E142587

Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the
direction the tongue is coming from)
until you hear a snap and feel it latch.
Make sure you securely fasten the
tongue in the buckle.

E142590

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelts
small length of webbing back toward the
stowed position. For rear seatbelts, recline
the rear seat backrest or push the seat
backrest cushion away from the seatbelt.
Feed a small length of webbing back
toward the stowed position.

Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low
across the hips below the belly and worn
as tight as comfort allows. Position the
shoulder belt to cross the middle of the
shoulder and the center of the chest.

Automatic Locking Mode

Seatbelt Locking Modes

In this mode, the shoulder belt
automatically pre-locks. The belt still
retracts to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. The automatic locking mode
is not available on the driver seatbelt.

WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

When to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode
Use this mode when you install a child
safety seat, except a booster, in the
passenger front or rear seating positions.
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in a rear seating position whenever
possible. See Child Safety (page 18).

All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard
passenger and rear seatbelts have both
the vehicle sensitive locking mode and the
automatic locking mode.

How to Use the Automatic Locking
Mode

Vehicle Sensitive Mode

Non-Inflatable Seatbelts

This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length
adjustment to your movements and
locking in response to vehicle movement.
For example, if the driver brakes suddenly
or turns a corner sharply, or the vehicle
receives an impact of about 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the combination
seatbelts lock to help reduce forward
movement of the driver and passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If
the seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower
the height adjuster to allow the seatbelt
to retract. If the retractor does not unlock,
pull the seatbelt out slowly then feed a

E142591

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.

Seatbelts
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear
a clicking sound. This indicates the
seatbelt is now in the automatic
locking mode.

WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.

Rear Outermost Inflatable Seatbelts
(Second Row Only–If Equipped)

The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outermost seating positions.
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child
safety car seats and belt positioning booster
seats when you properly install them. This
is because they are designed to fill with a
cooled gas at a lower pressure and at a
slower rate than traditional airbags. After
inflation, the shoulder portion of the
seatbelt remains cool to the touch.

E146363

Buckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and
pull upward until you pull the entire
belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.

The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder
seatbelt webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
• Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.

How to Disengage the Automatic
Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and
shoulder belt and allow it to retract
completely to disengage the automatic
locking mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.

How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?

WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelts
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes,
side impact crashes and rollovers. The fact
that the rear inflatable seatbelt did not
inflate in a crash does not mean that
something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the forces were not of the
type sufficient to cause activation.

The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.

SEATBELT HEIGHT
ADJUSTMENT
E146364

WARNING: Position the seatbelt
height adjuster so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure to
adjust the seatbelt properly could reduce
the effectiveness of the seatbelt and
increase the risk of injury in a crash.

During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.

E146365

The fully inflated seatbelt's increased
diameter more effectively holds the
occupant in the appropriate seating
position, and spreads crash forces over
more area of the body than regular
seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure on
the chest and helps control head and neck
motion for passengers.

E146191

To adjust the shoulder belt height, squeeze
the button and slide the height adjuster up
or down. Release the button and pull down
on the height adjuster to make sure it is
locked in place.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelts
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
E71880
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is
turned on.

SEATBELT WARNING LAMP
AND INDICATOR CHIME

Conditions of operation
If

Then

The driver seatbelt is not buckled before The seatbelt warning light illuminates and
the ignition switch is turned to the on posithe warning chime sounds for a few
tion...
seconds.
The driver seatbelt is buckled while the
indicator light is illuminated and the
warning chime is sounding...

The seatbelt warning light and warning
chime turn off.

The driver seatbelt is buckled before the
ignition switch is turned to the on position...

The seatbelt warning light and indicator
chime remain off.
The system uses information from the
front passenger sensing system to
determine if a front seat passenger is
present and therefore potentially in need
of a warning. To avoid the system turning
on the Belt-Minder feature for objects you
place on the front passenger seat, only the
front seat passengers receive warnings as
determined by the front passenger sensing
system.

SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the seatbelt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the seatbelt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a seatbelt is
unbuckled.

If the Belt-Minder warnings expire
(warnings for about five minutes) for one
passenger (driver or front passenger), the
other passenger can still cause the
Belt-Minder feature to turn on.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelts

Then

You and the front seat passenger buckle
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.
your seatbelts before you switch the ignition on or less than 1–2 minutes elapse after
you switch the ignition on...
You or the front seat passenger do not
buckle your seatbelts before your vehicle
reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1–2
minutes elapse after you switch the ignition
on...

The seatbelt for the driver or front
passenger is unbuckled for about 1 minute
while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph
(9.7 km/h) and more than 1–2 minutes
elapse after you switch the ignition on...

The Belt-Minder feature activates, the
seatbelt warning light illuminates and a
warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every
25 seconds, repeating for about 5 minutes
or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your seatbelts.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger
seatbelts are unbuckled.

Deactivating and Activating the
Belt-Minder Feature

WARNING: While the system allows
you to switch it off, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving a crash. We
recommend you leave the system
switched on. To reduce the risk of injury,
do not switch the system on or off while
driving your vehicle.

Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the seatbelt warning light
turns off (about 1 minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the
procedure within 20 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are
switching off, buckle then unbuckle the
seatbelt four times at a moderate
speed, ending in the unbuckled state.
After Step 3, the seatbelt warning light
turns on.

Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1–4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seatbelts
4. While the seatbelt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the seatbelt.
After Step 4, the seatbelt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.

SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.

CHILD RESTRAINT AND
SEATBELT MAINTENANCE

WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by Ford Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position.
The use of an extension intended for
another vehicle, model year or seating
position may not offer you the full
protection of your vehicle’s seatbelt
restraint system.

Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
restraint systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped),
shoulder belt height adjusters (if
equipped), shoulder belt guide on seatback
(if equipped), rear inflatable seatbelts (if
equipped), child restraint LATCH and
tether anchors, and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after a crash. Read
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions for additional inspection and
maintenance information specific to the
child restraint.

WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions
to change the fit of the belt across the
torso, over the lap or to make the seatbelt
buckle easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Ford Motor Company dealers. Only Ford
seatbelt extensions made by the original
equipment seatbelts manufacturer should
be used with Ford seatbelts. Ask your
authorized dealer if your extension is
compatible with your Ford vehicle restraint
system.

We recommend that all seatbelt
assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a
crash be replaced. However, if the crash
was minor and an authorized dealer finds
that the belts do not show damage and
continue to operate properly, they do not
need to be replaced. Seatbelt assemblies
not in use during a crash should also be
inspected and replaced if either damage
or improper operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning
the Interior (page 312).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Personal Safety System™
How Does the Personal Safety
System Work?

This system provides an improved overall
level of frontal crash protection to front
seat occupants and is designed to help
further reduce the risk of airbag-related
injuries. The system analyzes different
occupant conditions and crash severity
before activating the appropriate safety
devices to help better protect occupants
in a variety of frontal crash situations.

The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a
crash, the restraints control module may
deploy the seatbelt pretensioners, one or
both stages of the dual-stage airbags
based on crash severity and occupant
conditions.

Your vehicle's Personal Safety System
consists of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors (first row only) and seatbelt
usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicator
lamp.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning light and
tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags,
crash sensors, seatbelt pretensioners,
front seatbelt usage sensors, driver
seat position sensor, front passenger
sensing system and indicator lights.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.

WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from
a deploying airbag is the greatest close to
the trim covering the airbag module.

WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To
reduce the risk of injury, do not touch them
after inflation.

WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.

The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and
right front passenger from certain upper
body injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly;
there is a risk of injury from a deploying
airbag.

WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly
upon activation. After airbag deployment,
it is normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder
(to lubricate the bag) or sodium
compounds (for example, baking soda)
that result from the combustion process
that inflates the airbag. Small amounts of
sodium hydroxide may be present which
may irritate the skin and eyes, but none of
the residue is toxic.

WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
While the system is designed to help
reduce serious injuries, contact with a
deploying airbag may also cause abrasions
or swelling. Temporary hearing loss is also
a possibility as a result of the noise
associated with a deploying airbag.
Because airbags must inflate rapidly and
with considerable force, there is the risk of
death or serious injuries such as fractures,
facial and eye injuries or internal injuries,
particularly to occupants who are not
properly restrained or are otherwise out of
position at the time of airbag deployment.
Thus, it is extremely important that
occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.

E151127

The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
The driver and passenger front airbag
system consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.

Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.

DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).

WARNING: Do not place your arms
on the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment

WARNING: Keep the areas in front
of the airbags free from obstruction. Do
not affix anything to or over the airbag
covers. Objects could become projectiles
during airbag deployment or in a sudden
stop. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA)
recommends a minimum distance of at
least 10 in (25 cm) between an occupant's
chest and the driver airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from
the airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seatback, and
centered on the seat cushion, with their
feet comfortably extended on the floor.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance
of injury in a crash event. For example, if
an occupant slouches, lies down, turns
sideways, sits forward, leans forward or
sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.

FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain
children 12 and under in a rear seating
position. Failure to follow this could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.

Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure
a child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an
active airbag. If you must use a
forward-facing child restraint in the front
seat, move the seat upon which the child
restraint is installed all the way back.

WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat
may affect the performance of the front
passenger sensing system. This could
seriously increase the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are
part of the front passenger seat and
seatbelt to detect the presence of a
properly-seated occupant and determine
if the front passenger frontal airbag should
be enabled (may inflate) or not.

E142846

Children must always be properly
restrained. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained
in the rear seating positions than in the
front seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions may increase the risk of
injury in a crash.

E181984

The front passenger sensing system uses
a passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either on
(enabled) or off (disabled).
46

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The indicators are in the center stack of
the instrument panel.

The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the
system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the front passenger
seat.

Note: The indicators illuminate briefly when
you first switch the ignition on to confirm
they are functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag when the
front passenger seat is unoccupied, or a
rear facing infant seat, a forward-facing
child restraint, or a booster seat is
detected. Even with this technology,
parents are strongly encouraged to
always properly restrain children in the rear
seat.
•

•

When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the airbag
on indicator illuminates and remains
illuminated.

If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the
person to place the seat backrest in
the full upright position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to
detect that person and enables the
passenger frontal airbag.
• If the airbag off indicator remains lit
even after this, advise the person to
ride in the rear seat.

When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the
front passenger frontal airbag, the
airbag off indicator illuminates and
stays lit to remind you that the front
passenger frontal airbag is disabled.
If you have installed the child restraint
and the airbag on indicator illuminates,
switch the vehicle off, remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall
the restraint according to the child
restraint manufacturer's instructions.

Occupant

Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator

Passenger Airbag

Empty

OFF: Lit

Disabled

ON: Unlit
Child

OFF: Lit

Adult

OFF: Unlit

Disabled

ON: Unlit

ON: Lit

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Enabled

Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their
seats and put on seatbelts, it is very
important that they continue to sit
properly. A properly seated occupant sits
upright, leaning against the seat backrest,
and centered on the seat cushion, with
their feet comfortably extended on the
floor. Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies
down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans
forward or sideways, or puts one or both
feet up, the chance of injury during a crash
greatly increases.

WARNING: Do not use accessory
seat covers. The use of accessory seat
covers may prevent the deployment of the
side airbags and increase the risk of injury
in an accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The side airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the side of the
seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the airbag, its
fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing
an airbag as you could be seriously injured
or killed. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
E67017
properly. See Crash Sensors
and Airbag Indicator (page 50).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to
an authorized dealer.

WARNING: If the side airbag has
deployed, the airbag will not function
again. The side airbag system (including
the seat) must be inspected and serviced
by an authorized dealer. If the airbag is not
replaced, the unrepaired area will increase
the risk of injury in a crash.

If it is necessary to modify an advanced
front airbag system to accommodate a
person with disabilities, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center. See
Getting the Services You Need (page
266).

The side airbags are located on the
outboard side of the seatbacks of the front
seats. In certain sideways crashes, the
airbag on the side affected by the crash
will be inflated. The airbag was designed
to inflate between the door panel and
occupant to further enhance the protection
provided occupants in side impact crashes.

SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
PASSENGER KNEE AIRBAG
The knee airbag is located under the
instrument panel. During a crash, the
restraints control module may activate the
passenger knee airbag based on crash
severity and occupant conditions. Under
certain crash and occupant conditions, the
passenger knee airbag may deploy but the
passenger front airbag may not activate.
As with front and side airbags, it is
important to be properly seated and
restrained to reduce the risk of death or
serious injury.

E152533

The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted
to your vehicle.
• Side airbags located inside the driver
and front passenger seatbacks.
• Front passenger sensing system.

SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a
crash.

E67017

•

Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page
50).

WARNING: Do not lean your head
on the door. The curtain airbag could injure
you as it deploys from the headliner.

Note: The passenger sensing system will
deactivate the passenger seat-mounted
side airbag if it detects an empty passenger
seat.

WARNING: Do not attempt to
service, repair, or modify the
supplementary restraint system or
associated components. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.

The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed
by a group of automotive safety experts
known as the Side Airbag Technical
Working Group. These recommended
testing procedures help reduce the risk of
injuries related to the deployment of side
airbags.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
The system consists of the following:
• Safety canopy curtain airbags above
the trim panels over the front and rear
side windows identified by a label or
wording on the headliner or roof-pillar
trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment

WARNING: To reduce risk of injury,
do not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary
restraint system component has deployed,
it will not function again. Have the system
and associated components inspected as
soon as possible. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
E67017
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 50).

The Safety Canopy will deploy during
significant side crashes or when a certain
likelihood of a rollover event is detected
by the rollover sensor. The Safety Canopy
is mounted to the roof side-rail sheet
metal, behind the headliner, above each
row of seats. In certain sideways crashes
or rollover events, the Safety Canopy will
be activated, regardless of which seats are
occupied. The Safety Canopy is designed
to inflate between the side window area
and occupants to further enhance
protection provided in side impact crashes
and rollover events.

Always properly restrain children 12 years
old and under in the rear seats. The Safety
Canopy will not interfere with children
restrained using a properly installed child
or booster seat because it is designed to
inflate downward from the headliner above
the doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a
group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working
Group. These recommended testing
procedures help reduce the risk of injuries
related to the deployment of side airbags
(including the Safety Canopy).

CRASH SENSORS AND
AIRBAG INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of your vehicle
(including hood, bumper system, frame,
front end body structure, tow hooks and
hood pins) may affect the performance of
the airbag system, increasing the risk of
injury. Do not modify or add equipment to
the front end of your vehicle.

E75004

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Supplementary Restraints System
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide
information to the restraints control
module. The restraints control module
deploys (activates) the front seatbelt
pretensioners, rear inflatable seatbelts,
driver airbag, passenger airbag, seat
mounted side airbags, passenger knee
airbag and the Safety Canopy. Based on
the type of crash, the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.

The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners
or front airbags did not activate for both
front seat occupants in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the restraints
control module determined the accident
conditions (crash severity, belt usage)
were not appropriate to activate these
safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The design of the seatbelt
pretensioners is to activate in frontal,
near-frontal and side crashes and in
rollovers.
• The design of the side airbags is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes.
Side airbags may activate in other
types of crashes if the vehicle
experiences sufficient sideways motion
or deformation.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based
on crash severity and occupant
conditions.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes
or rollover events. The Safety Canopy
may activate in other types of crashes
if the vehicle experiences sufficient
sideways motion or deformation, or a
certain likelihood of rollover.

The restraints control module also
monitors the readiness of the above safety
devices plus the crash and occupant
sensors. The readiness of the safety
system is indicated by a warning indicator
light in the instrument cluster or by a
backup tone if the warning light is not
working. Routine maintenance of the
airbag is not required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:

E67017

•
•

The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after you
switch the ignition on.

The readiness light either flashes or
stays lit.
A series of five beeps will be heard. The
tone pattern will repeat periodically
until the problem, the light or both are
repaired.

If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.

AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.

The seatbelt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to
deploy a safety device.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
•
•

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The remote control allows you to:
• Remotely lock or unlock the vehicle
doors.
• Unlock the doors without actively using
a key or remote control (intelligent
access only).
• Remotely open the power liftgate (if
equipped).
• Remotely start or stop the engine and
user pre-set features (if equipped).
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft system.
• Activate the panic alarm.

Structures around the vehicle.
Other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle.

The radio frequency used by your remote
control can also be used by other radio
transmitters, for example amateur radios,
medical equipment, wireless headphones,
wireless remote controls, cell phones,
battery chargers and alarm systems. If the
frequencies are jammed, you will not be
able to use your remote control. You can
lock and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.

GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES

Note: The remote control contains sensitive
electrical components. Exposure to moisture
or impact may cause permanent damage.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
license-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) This device
must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause
undesired operation.

Intelligent Access (If Equipped)
The system uses a radio frequency signal
to communicate with your vehicle and
authorize your vehicle to unlock when one
of the following conditions are met:
• You activate the front exterior door
handle switch.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.

Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term IC before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

If excessive radio frequency interference
is present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to
mechanically unlock your door. You can
use the mechanical key blade in your
intelligent access key to open the driver
door in this situation. See Remote
Control (page 53).

The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range.
One of the following could cause a
decrease in operating range:
• Weather conditions.
• Nearby radio towers.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL

Intelligent Access Key

Integrated Keyhead Transmitter (If

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.

Equipped)

Use the key blade to start your vehicle and
unlock or lock the driver door from outside
your vehicle. The integrated keyhead
transmitter functions as a programmed
ignition key that operates all the locks and
starts your vehicle, as well as a remote
control.

E253517

E191532

Your remote control operates the power
locks and the remote start system. The
key must be in your vehicle to use the push
button start.

Press the button to release the key blade.
Press and hold the button to fold the key
blade back in when not in use.

Removable Key Blade
Your remote control also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.

E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery
is low. See Information Messages (page
119).
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.
Press the button to release the key blade
before beginning the procedure.

E254065

Press the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E191533

Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
gently push the clip.
2. Press the clip down to release the
battery cover.
E151795

Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.

Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.

E151799

3. Carefully remove the cover.

Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. Your
remote control should operate normally.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Keys and Remote Controls

E151800

Note: Do not touch the battery contacts or
the printed circuit board with the
screwdriver.
4. Insert the screwdriver as shown to
release the battery.

E254065

E151801

5. Remove the battery.
6. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
7. Reinstall the battery cover.
Intelligent Access Key
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Push the release button and pull the
key blade out.

Keys and Remote Controls

E218402

3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
5. Reinstall the battery housing cover
onto the transmitter and install the key
blade.

E218401

2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can use the remote control to recall
memory positions.
If programmed to a pre-set position, the
remote control recalls memory positions
when you unlock your vehicle. If you have
the easy entry and exit feature enabled
and the ignition is off, the seat moves to
the easy entry position. The seat moves
to the driver memory position when you
switch the ignition on.
Linking a Preset Position to Your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key
See Memory Function (page 150).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Car Finder

Many states and provinces have
restrictions for the use of remote start.
Check your local and state or provincial
laws for specific requirements regarding
remote start systems.

Press the button twice within
three seconds. The horn sounds
E138623
and the direction indicators
flash. We recommend you use this method
to locate your vehicle, rather than using
the panic alarm.

The system does not work if:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You disable the feature.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
• The service engine soon light is on.

Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.

E138624

Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to

turn it off.

Remote Control Feedback (If
Equipped)

Remote Start (If Equipped)

An LED on the remote control provides
status feedback of remote start or stop
commands.

WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes,
do not use remote start if your vehicle is
parked indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
The remote start button is on the
remote control.
E138625

This feature allows you to start your
vehicle from the outside. Your remote
control has an extended operating range.
If your vehicle has automatic climate
control, you can configure it to operate
when you remote start your vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 133). A manual
climate control system runs at the setting
it was set to when you switched your
vehicle off.

LED

Status

Solid green

Remote start
successful

Solid red

Remote stop
successful

Blinking red

Request failed or
status not received

Blinking green

Status incomplete

Remote Starting Your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Keys and Remote Controls
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting

E138625

Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps
turn off.

You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running
vehicle.

E138626

To remote start your vehicle:
1.

Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice.
The exterior lamps flash twice.

You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.

The horn sounds if the system fails to start,
unless quiet start is on. Quiet start runs
the blower fan at a slower speed to reduce
noise. You can switch it on or off in the
information display.

REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 74).

Note: If you have remote started your
vehicle with an integrated keyhead
transmitter, you must switch on the ignition
before driving your vehicle. With an
intelligent access transmitter, you must
press the brake pedal before driving your
vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn
on automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 with the vehicle still
running to extend the run time for another
remote start period. If you have the
duration set to 15 minutes, the duration
extends by another 15 minutes. For
example, if the vehicle has run from the
first remote start for five minutes, the
vehicle continues to run now for a total of
30 minutes. You can extend the remote
start up to a maximum of 35 minutes.
58

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

MyKey™
Standard Settings

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Not every vehicle includes the features
listed below. If your vehicle has this
equipment, then you cannot change the
following settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™.
MyKey mutes the audio system until
drivers, and in some instances,
passengers, fasten their seatbelts.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems
or parking aids turn on automatically
when you use the MyKey system. For
example, Blind Spot Information
System (BLIS), cross traffic alert, lane
departure warning or forward collision
warning. Note: MyKey drivers may be
able to turn the lane departure warning
feature off, but this feature turns back
on automatically with every new key
cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in
some markets. For example, MyKey
may prevent manual navigation
destination input while the vehicle is in
any gear other than park (P) or when
the vehicle reaches a certain rate of
speed.
• Satellite radio adult content
restrictions, if this feature is available
in your market.

MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can only program up to
two keys with the restrictions. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a
MyKey and an admin key are present when
you start your vehicle, the system recognizes
the admin key only.

Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward
with an admin key.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing
choices to switch them on or off, or to select
a more specific setting.

•

Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the
accelerator pedal.

•

WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.

•

Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and
a tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display
when MyKey drivers attempt to exceed
the limited volume. MyKey also
disables the automatic volume control.
Note: If your vehicle includes an
AM/FM radio or a very basic audio
system, then the radio may not limit.
Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and
active for MyKey drivers. For example,
E911 or emergency assistance and the
do not disturb features stay on even if
a MyKey driver uses the feature's
control to switch it off. When you
select, you will not be able to turn off
Advance Trac or traction control (if
your vehicle has this feature).

CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey.
1.

Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin
programming your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 105).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

MyKey™
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close driver door and restart
your vehicle with the programmed key
or transmitter.
Note: Make sure you label the programmed
MyKey so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.

CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to
their original admin key status at once. To
clear all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use
the information display.
1.

Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to begin clearing
your MyKey programming. See
Information Displays (page 105).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You
cannot remove the MyKey restrictions
individually.

You can also program the optional MyKey
settings.

Programming or Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to program or
change your optional MyKey settings.
1.

Switch the ignition on using the key or
the transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the
information display and then scroll
through the menus to change the
settings of your MyKey. See
Information Displays (page 105).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish programming
your MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off,
open and close the driver door and
restart your vehicle with the
programmed key or transmitter.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. If you
switch the engine off, you must use an
admin key to change or clear your optional
MyKey settings.

CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).

MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

MyKey™
Number of MyKeys

USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS

Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to detect how many MyKeys you
have for your vehicle and determine when
all MyKeys have been deleted.

MyKey is not compatible with non
Ford-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for
a Ford-approved remote start system.

Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this
feature to determine how many admin
keys you have for your vehicle, and detect
if an additional MyKey has been
programmed.

MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Condition

I cannot create a MyKey.

Potential causes

· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you
place the transmitter into the backup slot.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
74).
· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle is the only admin key. There always
has to be at least one admin key.
· SecuriLock passive anti-theft system is
disabled or in unlimited mode.

I cannot program the configurable settings. · The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· There are no MyKeys programmed to the
vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 60).
I cannot clear the MyKeys.

· The key or transmitter used to start the
vehicle does not have admin privileges.
· No MyKeys are created. See Creating a
MyKey (page 60).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

MyKey™
Condition

Potential causes

I lost the only admin key.

· Purchase a new key or transmitter from
your authorized dealer.

I lost a key.

· Program a spare key or transmitter. You
may need to see your authorized dealer.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
74).

MyKey distances do not accumulate.

· The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.
· An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys
and created new MyKeys.
· The key system has been reset.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Doors and Locks
you press the unlock button once. All door
mode unlocks all doors when you press
the unlock button once. The unlocking
mode applies to the remote control,
keyless entry keypad and intelligent
access.

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control
or the remote control to lock and unlock
your vehicle.

Power Door Locks

Locking the Doors

The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138623

Press the button to lock all
doors. The direction indicators
will flash.

Press the button again within three
seconds to confirm that all the doors are
closed. The doors will lock again, the horn
will sound and the direction indicators will
flash if all the doors and the liftgate are
closed.
Note: If any door or the liftgate is open, or
if the hood is open on vehicles with an
anti-theft alarm or remote start, the horn
sounds twice and the direction indicators
do not flash.

E138628

Unlock.

Lock.

Remote Control

Locking and Unlocking the Doors
with the Key Blade

You can use the remote control at any
time.

Locking with the Key

Unlocking the Doors

Turn the top of the key toward the front of
your vehicle.

Press the button to unlock the
driver door.

Unlocking with the Key

E138629

Turn the top of the key toward the rear of
your vehicle.

Press the button again within
three seconds to unlock all doors. The
direction indicators will flash.

Note: If the child safety locks are on and
you pull the interior handle, you will only
turn off the emergency locking, not the child
safety lock. You can only open the doors
using the external door handle.

Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Doors and Locks
Activating Intelligent Access (If

Locking Using Intelligent Access

Equipped)

You can unlock and lock the vehicle
without taking the keys out of your pocket
or purse when your intelligent access key
is within 3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle.
Intelligent access uses a sensor on the
back of the door handle for unlocking and
a separate sensor on the face of each door
handle for locking.

E248556

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle
to confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.

The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the
key is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.

Opening the Liftgate
Press the exterior liftgate release button
on the top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
See Manual Liftgate (page 69).

Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 53).

Smart Unlocks for Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter (If Equipped)

Unlocking Using Intelligent Access

This helps to prevent you from locking
yourself out of your vehicle if the key is still
in the ignition.
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle with the power door lock
control, all the doors will lock then unlock
and the horn will sound twice if the key is
still in the ignition.

E248555

With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock
sensor on the back of the door handle for
a brief period and then pull on the door
handle to unlock, being careful to not
touch the lock sensor at the same time or
pulling the door handle too quickly. The
intelligent access system requires a brief
delay to authenticate your intelligent
access key fob.

You can still lock your vehicle with the key
in the ignition by either:
• Using the keyless entry keypad with the
driver door closed.
• Pressing the lock button on the remote
control even if the doors are not closed.
If both front doors are closed, you can lock
your vehicle by any method, regardless of
whether the key is in the ignition or not.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Doors and Locks
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent
Access Keys (If Equipped)

Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

This helps to prevent you from locking your
key inside the passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, transmission in park
(P) and the ignition off, the system will
search for an intelligent access key in the
passenger compartment after you close
the last door. If the system finds a key, all
of the doors will immediately unlock and
the horn sounds twice, indicating that a
key is inside.

Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the
accessory position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or
to accessory.

You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To override smart unlock, lock your vehicle
after you have closed all doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front
of the door handle with another
intelligent access key in your hand.

Note: The doors do not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 105).

When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).

Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when you unlock the
doors with the remote control.

Autolock (If Equipped)

The lamps turn off if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock
button.
• 25 seconds have elapsed.

Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Doors and Locks
The lamps do not turn off if:
• You switch them on with the lighting
control.
• Any door is open.

Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior
lamps illuminate when all doors are closed
and you switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off if all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You lock your vehicle from the outside.

Battery Saver

E138637

If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.

You can use the keypad to do the
following:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase user codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.

Battery Saver for Intelligent Access
Keys (If Equipped)

You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set five-digit entry code. The code
is on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also program up to five of
your own five-digit personal entry codes.

If you leave the ignition switched on and
the engine is not running, the battery saver
will turn the ignition off when it detects a
certain amount of battery drain, or after
45 minutes have elapsed.

Programming a Personal Entry Code

KEYLESS ENTRY (If Equipped)

1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal five-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save
personal code 1.

SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad
The keypad is near the driver window. It
illuminates when touched.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Enter your entry code again more
slowly.

The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Doors and Locks
To program additional personal entry
codes, repeat steps 1 through 3, then for
step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2.
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3.
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4.
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Hints:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.

Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 on the keypad within
five seconds.

Locking All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 on the keypad
simultaneously with the driver door closed.
You do not need to enter a code first.
Unlocking All Doors

Unlocking Only the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set or your personal
five-digit code. You must press each
number within five seconds of each other.
The interior lamps illuminate.

Erasing a Personal Code

Note: All doors unlock if the two-stage
unlocking feature is turned off. See Locking
and Unlocking (page 64).

1. Enter the factory-set five-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds.
You must do this within five seconds
of completing step 2.
All personal codes erase and only the
factory-set five-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode
if you enter the wrong code seven times.
This mode turns off the keypad for one
minute and the keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after any
of the following occur:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• You press the unlock button on the
remote control.
• You switch your vehicle on.
• You unlock the vehicle using intelligent
access.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Liftgate
Opening the Liftgate

MANUAL LIFTGATE (If Equipped)

Manually
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seatbelts. Make sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.
E138632

WARNING: Make sure to close and
latch the liftgate to prevent drawing
exhaust fumes into your vehicle. This will
also prevent passengers and cargo from
falling out. If you must drive with the
liftgate open, keep the vents or windows
open so outside air comes into your vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.

Press the button located in the top of the
liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the
liftgate, and then pull on the outside
handle.
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138630

Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Closing the Liftgate

Note: Do not hang anything, for example a
bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.
Note: Do not leave the liftgate open while
driving. This could damage the liftgate and
its components.

E155976

A handle is located inside the liftgate to
help with closing.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Liftgate
•

POWER LIFTGATE (If Equipped)

•
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped
with seats and seatbelts. Make sure
everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
properly using a seatbelt. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious
personal injury or death.

•

The ignition is on and the transmission
is not in park (P).
The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
The liftgate is not fully closed and your
vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph
(5 km/h).

If the liftgate starts to close after it has
fully opened, this indicates there may be
excessive weight on the liftgate or a
possible strut failure. A repetitive tone
sounds and the liftgate closes under
control. Remove any excessive weight
from the liftgate. If the liftgate continues
to close after opening, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

WARNING: Make sure that you fully
close the liftgate to prevent exhaust fumes
from entering your vehicle. If you are
unable to fully close the liftgate, open the
air vents or the windows to allow fresh air
to enter your vehicle. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death.

Opening and Closing the Liftgate
WARNING: Make sure all persons
are clear of the power liftgate area before
using the power liftgate control.
Note: Make sure the area behind your
vehicle is free from obstruction and that
there is enough room for you to operate the
liftgate. Objects too close to your vehicle,
for example a wall, garage door or another
vehicle may come into contact with the
moving liftgate. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

WARNING: Keep keys out of reach
of children. Do not allow children to
operate or play near an open or moving
power liftgate. You should supervise the
operation of the power liftgate at all times.
Note: Make sure that you close the liftgate
before operating or moving your vehicle,
especially in an enclosure, like a garage or
a parking structure. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

Note: Be careful when opening or closing
the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed
area to avoid damaging the liftgate.

Note: Do not hang anything, for example
a bike rack, from the glass or liftgate. This
could damage the liftgate and its
components.

Note: Do not leave the liftgate open when
you are driving. This could damage the
liftgate and its components.

The liftgate only operates with the
transmission in park (P).

From the Instrument Panel

If there is a problem with the open or close
request, a tone sounds for one of the
following reasons:

E138633

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

With the transmission in park
(P), press the button on the
instrument panel.

Liftgate
With the Remote Control
Press the button twice within
three seconds.
E138630

With the Outside Control Button
Opening the Liftgate
1.

Unlock the liftgate with the remote
control or power door unlock control.
If an intelligent access key is within 3 ft
(1 m) of the liftgate, the liftgate unlocks
when you press the liftgate release
button.

E138636

Press and release the liftgate button.

Stopping the Liftgate Movement
Note: Do not apply sudden excessive force
to the liftgate while it is in motion. This
could damage the power liftgate and its
components.
You can stop the liftgate movement by
doing any of the following:
• Pressing the liftgate control button.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
remote control twice.
• Pressing the liftgate button on the
instrument panel.
• Moving your foot under and away from
the center rear bumper in a single-kick
motion.*

E138632

2. Press the control button located in the
top of the liftgate pull-cup handle.
Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.

*This method only works for vehicles with
the hands-free liftgate feature.

Setting the Liftgate Open Height
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Stop the liftgate movement by pressing
the control button on the liftgate when
it reaches the desired height.
Note: Once the liftgate has stopped
moving, you can also manually move it to
the desired height.

Closing the Liftgate

WARNING: Keep clear of the liftgate
when using the rear switch.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Liftgate
3. Press and hold the liftgate control
button on the liftgate until you hear a
tone, indicating programming is
complete.
Note: You can only use the liftgate control
button to program the height.

When Opening

Note: You cannot program the height if the
liftgate position is too low.

Hands-Free Feature (If Equipped)

The system stops when it detects an
obstacle and a tone sounds. Once you
remove the obstacle, you can continue to
operate the liftgate.

Make sure you have a passive key within
3 ft (1 m) of the liftgate.

The new open liftgate height is recalled
when the power liftgate is opened. To
change the programmed height, repeat the
above procedure. Once you open the
power liftgate, you can manually move it
to a different height.

Stand behind your vehicle, and face the
liftgate.
2. Move your foot, in a single-kick motion,
without pausing, under and away from
the rear bumper detection area.
3. The liftgate opens or closes.

Note: The system recalls the new
programmed height until you reprogram it,
even if you disconnect the battery.

Vehicles Without a Trailer Hitch

When operating the power liftgate after
you have programmed a lower height than
fully open, you can fully open the liftgate
by manually pushing it upward to the
maximum open position.

Obstacle Detection
When Closing
The system stops when it detects an
obstacle. A tone sounds and the system
reverses to open. Once you remove the
obstacle, you can power close the liftgate.

E253664

The detection area is in the center of the
rear bumper.

Note: Entering your vehicle while the
liftgate is closing can cause your vehicle to
bounce and activate obstacle detection. To
prevent this, let the power liftgate close
completely before you enter your vehicle.
Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door ajar message or
warning indicator. Failure to do this could
result in unintentionally leaving the liftgate
open while driving.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Liftgate
Vehicles With a Trailer Hitch

E253799

The detection area is on the left-hand side
and right-hand side of the hitch, between
the exhaust and the hitch.
Avoid the following actions when using the
hands-free opening feature:
•
•
•

Making physical contact with the
bumper.
Holding your foot under the bumper.
Sweeping your foot from side to side,
or kicking at an odd angle.

Note: Allow the power system to open the
liftgate. Manually pushing or pulling the
liftgate may activate the system’s obstacle
detection feature and stop the power
operation or reverse its direction, replicate
a strut failure, or damage mechanical
components.
Note: Splashing water may cause the
hands-free liftgate to open. Keep the
passive key away from the rear bumper
detection area when you wash your vehicle.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Security
Replacement Keys

PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM

Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with
two integrated keyhead transmitters or two
intelligent access keys.

Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.

The integrated keyhead transmitter
functions as a programmed ignition key
that operates all the locks and starts the
vehicle, as well as a remote control.

Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
the engine. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting the
engine. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart the engine if a
problem occurs.

The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent
access with push button start system, as
well as a remote control.
If your programmed transmitters or
standard SecuriLock coded keys
(integrated keyhead transmitters only) are
lost or stolen and you do not have an extra
coded key, you will need to have your
vehicle towed to an authorized dealer. You
need to erase the key codes from your
vehicle and program new coded keys.

Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in the vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle.

SecuriLock®

Store an extra programmed key away from
the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.

The system is an engine immobilization
system. It is designed to help prevent the
engine from being started unless a coded
key programmed to your vehicle is used.
Using the wrong key may prevent the
engine from starting. A message may
appear in the information display.

Programming a Spare Integrated
Keyhead Transmitter
Note: You can program a maximum of eight
coded keys to your vehicle. All eight can be
integrated keyhead transmitters.

If you are unable to start the engine with a
correctly coded key, a malfunction has
happened and a message may appear in
the information display.

You can program your own integrated
keyhead transmitter or standard
SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle. This
procedure will program both the engine
immobilizer keycode and the remote entry
portion of the remote control to your
vehicle

Automatic Arming
The vehicle arms immediately after you
switch the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming

Only use integrated keyhead transmitters
or standard SecuriLock keys.

Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms the vehicle.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Security
You must have two previously
programmed coded keys and the new
unprogrammed key readily accessible. See
your authorized dealer to have the spare
key programmed if two previously
programmed coded keys are not available.

Programming a Spare Intelligent
Access Key
See your authorized dealer to have
additional keys programmed to your
vehicle.

Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
1.
2.

3.
4.

8.
9.

ANTI-THEFT ALARM (If Equipped)

Insert the first previously programmed
coded key into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
first coded key from the ignition.
After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off,
insert the second previously coded key
into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least three
seconds, but no more than 10 seconds.
Switch the ignition off and remove the
second previously programmed coded
key from the ignition.
After three seconds but within 10
seconds of switching the ignition off
and removing the previously
programmed coded key, insert the new
unprogrammed key into the ignition.
Switch the ignition from off to on. Keep
the ignition on for at least six seconds.
Remove the newly programmed coded
key from the ignition.

The system will warn you of an
unauthorized entry to your vehicle. It will
be triggered if any door, the luggage
compartment or the hood is opened
without using the key, remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm
problem with your vehicle.

Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is
not a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock
your vehicle to arm the alarm.

Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
•

•

If the key has been successfully
programmed it will start the engine and
operate the remote entry system (if the
new key is an integrated keyhead
transmitter).

•

Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control
or keyless entry keypad.
Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle
on within 12 seconds.

Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.

If programming was not successful, wait
10 seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 8.
If you are still unsuccessful, take your
vehicle to your authorized dealer.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Steering Wheel
ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
MANUAL ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 144).
E259855

3. Lock the steering column.

ADJUSTING THE STEERING
WHEEL - VEHICLES WITH:
POWER ADJUSTABLE
STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the
steering wheel when your vehicle is
moving.
E259854

Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 144).

1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Steering Wheel
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next
time you tilt or telescope the steering
column, it stops just short of the end of the
column position.

Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the steering
column position with the memory
function. See Memory Function (page
150).
E261582

Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.

Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature

To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of
the control.

The column moves up when you switch
the ignition off. Switch the ignition on to
return the system to its previous settings.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 105).

End of Travel Position

Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.

The steering column sets a stopping
position just short of the end of the column
position to prevent damage to the steering
column. A new stopping position sets if
the steering column encounters an object
when tilting or telescoping.

Note: Depending on your vehicle, the
column may move up and in.

To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1.

Confirm there is nothing obstructing
the motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control
again.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Steering Wheel
Type Two

AUDIO CONTROL
Type One

E213209

E273149

Seek up or next.

Volume up or down.

Mute.

Seek down or previous.

Volume up.

Seek up or next.

Volume down.

Seek down or previous.

Seek and Media

Media.

Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up
or down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
Press the media button repeatedly to:
• Scroll through available audio modes.

E273150

Answer call.

Mute.

End call.

VOICE CONTROL
The controls are on the steering wheel.
Press and release to activate
voice recognition.
E142599

Press and release to enter phone
mode or answer a phone call.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Steering Wheel
Press and release to end a phone
call.

INFORMATION DISPLAY
CONTROL

E265040

CRUISE CONTROL
Type One

E203207

See Information Displays (page 105).

HEATED STEERING WHEEL (If

E200995

See Using Cruise Control (page 220).

Equipped)

Type Two
Switch the heated steering wheel on and
off using the touchscreen.
Touch the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.

E200996

Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.

See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 221).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Pedals
ADJUSTING THE PEDALS (If
Equipped)

WARNING: Never use the controls
while your feet are on the accelerator and
brake pedals and the vehicle is moving.
You can find the control on the left side of
the steering column. Press and hold the
appropriate side of the control to move the
pedals.

E162916

A. Farther
B. Closer
You can save and recall the pedal positions
with the memory feature. See Memory
Function (page 150).
Note: Adjust the pedals only when your
vehicle is in P (Park).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wipers and Washers
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.

Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.

Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.

The feature uses a rain sensor that is in the
area around the interior mirror. The rain
sensor monitors the amount of moisture
on the windshield and turns on the wipers.
It adjusts the wiper speed by the amount
of moisture that the sensor detects on the
windshield. You can switch this feature on
and off in the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105).

E252764

•
•

Rotate away from you for a long wipe
interval.
Rotate toward you for a short wipe
interval.

E208222

Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers. When you
select low sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a large amount
of water on the windshield. When you
select high sensitivity, the wipers operate
when the sensor detects a small amount
of water on the windshield.

Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.

Speed Dependent Wipers (If Equipped)
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.

Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects
hit the windshield.

AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before
you switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wipers and Washers
A wipe occurs a few seconds after washing
to clear any remaining washer fluid. You
can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.

In these conditions, you can do the
following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on
the windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.

Front Camera Washer (If Equipped)
Operating the windshield washer also
operates the front camera washer.

Autowipers Settings

REAR WINDOW WIPER AND
WASHERS

Autowipers default to on and remain on
until you switch them off in the information
display. When you switch off autowipers,
the wipers operate in intermittent mode.

Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.

WINDSHIELD WASHERS

Rear Window Wiper Blade

Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
Note: Do not operate the washers when
the washer reservoir is empty. This may
cause the washer pump to overheat.

E208225

Rotate the control to switch on the rear
wiper.

Rear Window Washer
Rotate and hold the control to the top or
bottom position to switch on the rear
window washer. When you release the
lever, wiping continues for a short period
of time.

E208224

•
•

•

A brief press causes a single wipe
without washer fluid.
A brief press and hold causes the
wipers to swipe three times with
washer fluid.
A long press and hold turns on the
wipers and washer fluid for up to 10
seconds.

Rear Camera Washer
Operating the rear washer also turns on
the rear camera washer.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
GENERAL INFORMATION

LIGHTING CONTROL

Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes
in air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is
a possibility that condensation can occur
when the temperature is cold. When
normal condensation occurs, a fine mist
can form on the interior of the lens. The
fine mist eventually clears and exits
through the vents during normal operation.

E142449

Lamps off.

Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and
rear lamps.

Headlamps.

Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.

Headlamp High Beam

Examples of unacceptable condensation
are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
E167827

Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever forward again or pull the
lever toward you to switch the high beams
off.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam

The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust
the period of time that the headlamps
remain on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.

E163268

Slightly pull the lever toward you and
release it to flash the headlamps.

The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.

AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the headlamps on in low visibility
conditions, for example daytime fog.

Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.

INSTRUMENT LIGHTING
DIMMER

E142451

When the lighting control is in the
autolamps position, the headlamps turn
on in low light situations, or when the
wipers turn on.
E231828

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
Press repeatedly or press and hold until
you reach the desired level.

DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)

HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
WARNING: The daytime running
lamps system does not activate the rear
lamps and may not provide adequate
lighting during low visibility driving
conditions. Make sure you switch the
headlamps on, as appropriate, during all
low visibility conditions. Failure to do so
may result in a crash.

Set the delay time to keep the headlamps
on for up to three minutes after switching
off the ignition.
Follow the steps below to change the
delay time:
Note: Complete steps 1 through 6 within 10
seconds.
1. Switch the ignition off.
2. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control.
3. Switch the lighting control to the off
position.
4. Switch the ignition on.
5. Switch the ignition off.
6. Select the autolamp position on the
lighting control. The headlamps and
parking lamps turn on.
7. Switch the lighting control to the off
position when reaching the required
delay time. The headlamps and parking
lamps turn off.

Type One - Conventional (NonConfigurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.

Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or
off using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105).

Set the headlamp exit delay to one of the
following settings:
• Off.
• 10 seconds.
• 20 seconds.
• 120 seconds.

The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions,
or releasing the parking brake for
vehicles with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.

Note: Adjust the time delay using the
display controls in the information display.
See Information Displays (page 105).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.

A camera sensor, centrally mounted
behind the windshield of your vehicle,
continuously monitors conditions to turn
the high beams on and off.

If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in
all switch positions.

Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your
vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).

AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. You may need
to override the system if it does not turn
the high beams on or off.

The high beams turn off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
• The system detects severe rain, snow
or fog.
• The camera is blocked.

The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s
headlamps or tail lamps, or street lighting
ahead, the system turns off high beams
before they can distract other road users.
Low beams remain on.

Switching the System On and Off

Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.

Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
105).

Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.

E142451

Switch the lighting control to the
autolamps position. See Autolamps
(page 84).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
Overriding the System

DIRECTION INDICATORS

When you switch on the high beams,
pushing or pulling the stalk provides a
temporary override to low beam.

Automatic High Beam Indicator (If
Equipped)

The indicator lamp illuminates
to confirm when the system is
ready to assist.

FRONT FOG LAMPS (If Equipped)

E163272

Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Note: Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times.

INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on when:
• Any door is opened.
• You adjust the instrument panel
dimmer until the courtesy lamps turn
on.
• You press a remote control button and
the ignition is off.

E232249

Press to switch the fog lamps on or off.
You can switch the fog lamps on when the
lighting control is in any position except
automatic high beam or off.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
Dome Lamp

Map Lamps (If Equipped)

Without Fog Lamps

Front Row Map Lamps

E163273

E208462

With Fog Lamps

Second Row Dome and Map Lamps

E199026

Second Row Dome and Courtesy
Lamps
E208463

Press the button to switch the lamps on
or off.

E208464

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
Battery Saver

Third Row Cargo Lamp

If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
The parking lamps do not turn off if you
switch them on.

AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Adjust the ambient lighting using the
touchscreen.

E169470

Press the button to switch the lamps on
or off.

The ambient lighting controls are in the
SYNC Settings menu.

E273192

Switching Ambient Lighting On

Changing the Color

Touch a color once.

Touch any color once to change the
lighting to that color.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Lighting
Adjusting the Intensity
Drag the colors up or down to increase or
decrease the intensity.

Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the active color once or drag the
active color all the way down to zero
intensity.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Resetting One-Touch Up

POWER WINDOWS

Start the engine.
1.

WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.

2.
3.

WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify they are free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are
not in the proximity of the window
openings.

4.
5.
6.

Lift and hold the window switch until
the you fully close the door window.
Continue to hold the switch for a few
seconds after you close the window.
Release the window switch.
Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window.
Release the window switch.
Lift and hold the window switch until
you fully close the window.
Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and
one-touch up features.

Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature

WARNING: When you override the
bounce-back feature the window will not
reverse if it detects an obstacle. Take care
when closing the windows to avoid
personal injury or damage to your vehicle.

E146043

Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.

Pull up the window switch and hold within
a few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.

Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.

One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.

One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Remote Control Front Windows

Window Lock

You can open the windows for a short time
after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your
vehicle, press and hold the remote control
unlock button to open the windows.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.

Moonroof (If Equipped)
You can vent the moonroof after you
unlock your vehicle with the remote
control. After you unlock your vehicle, press
and hold the remote control unlock button
to vent the moonroof. Release the button
once movement starts. Press the lock or
unlock button to stop movement.

E144072

Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.

Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for
several minutes after you switch the
ignition off or until you open either front
door.

EXTERIOR MIRRORS

GLOBAL OPENING (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

Power Exterior Mirrors

You can use the remote control to open
the windows and vent the moonroof with
the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display, or see an
authorized dealer. See General
Information (page 105).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Windows and Mirrors
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See
General Information (page 105).

E144073

Left-hand mirror.

Adjustment control.

E170431

Right-hand mirror.

You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
located on the door. The control lights and
the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.

To adjust your mirrors, switch your vehicle
on (with the ignition in accessory mode or
the engine running) and then:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust.
The control lights.
2. Use the adjustment control to adjust
the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror control again. The
control light turns off.

Note: If you use the power-folding control
to fold the mirrors on demand and the auto
fold feature is switched on, you must use
the control again to unfold them.
Loose Mirror

Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors

If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to
reset them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.

Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning it to its
original position.

Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), turn off the
vehicle, open and close the driver's side
door and lock the vehicle. The exterior
mirrors automatically unfold and return to
their driving position after you unlock the
vehicle and open and close the driver's side
door.

To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud
noise as you reset the power-folding
mirrors. This sound is normal. Repeat this
process as needed each time the mirrors
are manually folded.
93

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Windows and Mirrors (page
141).

Memory Mirrors

(If Equipped)

You can save and recall the mirror
positions through the memory function.
See Memory Function (page 150).

Auto-dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically
dims when the interior auto-dimming
mirror turns on.

Direction Indicator Mirrors (If Equipped)

While the vehicle is running, the
forward-facing portion of the appropriate
mirror housing blinks when you switch on
the direction indicator.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (If
Equipped)
E138665

The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the
main mirror when it is at a distance. The
image becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image
transitions from the main mirror and begins
to appear in the blind spot mirror as the
vehicle approaches (B). The vehicle
transitions to your peripheral field of view
as it leaves the blind spot mirror (C).

WARNING: Objects in the mirror are
closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated
convex mirror built into the upper outboard
corner of the exterior mirrors. They can
assist you by increasing visibility along the
side of your vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror.
If no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane
is at a safe distance, signal that you are
going to change lanes. Glance over your
shoulder to verify traffic is clear, and
carefully change lanes.

Blind Spot Information System (If
Equipped)

See Blind Spot Information System
(page 232).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Windows and Mirrors
INTERIOR MIRROR

SUN VISORS

Manual Dimming Mirror
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
Pull the tab below the mirror toward you
to reduce the effect of bright light from
behind.
E138666

Automatic Dimming Mirror (If Equipped)

Rotate the sun visor toward the side
window and extend it rearward for extra
shade.

WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving. This could
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

The mirror dims to reduce the effect of
bright light from behind. It returns to
normal when the bright light from behind
is no longer present or if you shift into
reverse (R).
Do not block the sensors on the front and
back of the mirror.
Note: A rear center passenger or raised rear
center head restraint could prevent light
from reaching the sensor.

E162197

Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.

MOONROOF (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not let children play
with the moonroof or leave them
unattended in the vehicle. They may
seriously hurt themselves.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Windows and Mirrors
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press and release
the control again to fully open the
moonroof.

WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, you should verify that it is free
of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity
of the roof opening.

Pull and release the SLIDE control to close
the moonroof.

The moonroof controls are located on the
overhead console and have a one-touch
open and close feature. To stop it during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.

Bounce-Back
The moonroof stops automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there
is an obstacle in the way.
Pull and hold the SLIDE control within two
seconds of a bounce-back event to
override this function. While bounce-back
is active, the closing force increases for
each of the next three times that you close
the moonroof.

Opening and Closing the
Sunscreen

Venting the Moonroof
Press and release the TILT control to vent
the moonroof. Pull and hold the TILT
control to close the moonroof.
E193983

Press and release the control to open the
sunscreen.
Note: The sunscreen stops at the first panel
for the dual panel moonroof. Press and
release again to continue to open the
sunscreen past the second panel.
Pull and release the control to close the
sunscreen. The moonroof, if open,
automatically closes prior to closing the
sunscreen.

Opening and Closing the Moonroof
Press and release the SLIDE control to
open the moonroof. The sunscreen, if
closed, automatically opens prior to
opening the moonroof. The moonroof
stops short of the fully opened position.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
GAUGES
Type 1

E193714

Tachometer.

Speedometer.

Information display. See
Information Displays (page
105).

Fuel gauge.

Engine coolant temperature
gauge.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Type 2

E193715

Left information display. See
Information Displays (page
105).

Speedometer.

Right information display. See
Information Displays (page
105).

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Type 3

E203205

Tachometer.

Compass

Information display. See
Information Displays (page
105).

Displays the vehicle's heading direction.
Trip Computer

Speedometer.

See General Information (page 105).

Fuel gauge.

Vehicle Settings and Personalization

Engine coolant temperature
gauge.

See General Information (page 105).

Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated
distance your vehicle has traveled.

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge

WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS

Shows the temperature of the engine
coolant. At normal operating temperature,
the needle remains in the center section.
If the needle enters the red section, the
engine is overheating. Stop the engine,
switch the ignition off and determine the
cause once the engine has cooled down.

The following warning lamps and
indicators alert you to a vehicle condition
that may become serious. Some lamps
illuminate when you start your vehicle to
make sure they work. If any lamps remain
on after starting your vehicle, refer to the
respective system warning lamp for further
information.

Note: Do not restart the engine until the
cause of the overheating has been resolved.

Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and function the
same as a warning lamp, but do not display
when you start your vehicle.

WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.

Adaptive Cruise Control (If Equipped)
The speed control system
indicator light changes color to
indicate what mode the system
is in. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control
(page 221).
E144524

On (white light): Illuminates when you
switch on the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when the speed control
system is turned off.

Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.

Engaged (green light): Illuminates when
you engage the adaptive cruise control
system. Turns off when you disengage the
speed control system.

The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump
symbol indicates on which side of your
vehicle the fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or on a slope.

Anti-Lock Braking System

Low Fuel Reminder

If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning
lamp is also illuminated. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty
reaches 75 mi (120 km) to empty for
MyKey, and at 50 mi (80 km), 25 mi
(40 km), 10 mi (20 km) and 0 mi (0 km)
for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.

100

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Cruise Control (If Equipped)

Automatic High Beam Control (If
Equipped)

It illuminates when you switch
this feature on.

It illuminates when this feature
is on. See Automatic High
Beam Control (page 86).

E71340

Direction Indicator

Battery

Illuminates when you switch on
the left or right direction
indicator or the hazard warning
flasher. If the indicators stay on or flash
faster, check for a burned out bulb. See
Changing a Bulb (page 303).

If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch
off all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked
by an authorized dealer immediately.

Door Ajar

Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)

Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.

It illuminates when you switch
this feature off or in conjunction
E151262
with a message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 232).

Engine Coolant Temperature

Brake System

E144522

Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high.
Stop the vehicle as soon as
possible, switch off the engine and let cool.
See Engine Coolant Check (page 291).

It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake with the
ignition on.

If it illuminates when you are driving, check
that the parking brake is not engaged. If
the parking brake is not engaged, this
indicates low brake fluid level or a brake
system malfunction. Have the system
checked immediately by an authorized
dealer.

Engine Oil
If it illuminates with the engine
running or when you are driving,
this indicates a malfunction.
Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off. Check the
engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check
(page 289).

WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking
performance may occur. It may take you
longer to stop your vehicle. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Driving extended distances with the
parking brake engaged can cause brake
failure and the risk of personal injury.

Note: Do not resume your journey if it
illuminates despite the level being correct.
Have the system checked by an authorized
dealer immediately.

101

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Liftgate Ajar

Fasten Safety Belt
It illuminates and a chime
sounds to remind you to fasten
E71880
your safety belt. See Seatbelt
Reminder (page 40).

Lights when the liftgate is not
completely closed.
E162453

Low Fuel Level

Front Airbag

It illuminates when the fuel level
is low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as

If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
E67017
flash or remains on, it indicates
a malfunction. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.

possible.

Low Tire Pressure Warning
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp
remains on with the engine
running or when driving, check your tire
pressure as soon as possible.

Front Fog Lamps (If Equipped)
Lights when you switch the front
fog lamps on.

It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.

Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
A red beam of lights illuminates
on the windshield in certain
E156133
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It also illuminates momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure
the display works.

Low Washer Fluid
It illuminates when the
windshield washer fluid is low.

High Beam

E132353

It illuminates when you switch
the high beam headlamps on. It
flashes when you use the
headlamp flasher.

Parking Lamps

Hood Ajar

Powertrain Fault

E159324

It illuminates when you switch
the parking lamps on.

Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.

Illuminates when the system
detects a powertrain or an 4WD
fault. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Lane Keeping Aid (If Equipped)
Lights when the lane keeping
system is activated.
E144813

102

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Service Engine Soon

Transmission Tow/Haul (If Equipped)

If it illuminates when the engine
is running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.

Illuminates when you activate
the tow/haul feature. If the light
E161509
flashes steadily, have the system
serviced immediately. Damage to the
transmission could occur. See Automatic
Transmission (page 187).

If it flashes, engine misfire may be
occurring. Increased exhaust gas
temperatures could damage the catalytic
converter or other vehicle components.
Drive in a moderate fashion (avoid heavy
acceleration and deceleration) and have
your vehicle immediately serviced.

AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Key in Ignition Warning Chime (If
Equipped)

It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb
and to indicate whether your vehicle is
ready for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) testing.

Sounds when you open the driver's door
and you have left the key in the ignition.

Engine On Warning Chime
A warning chime will sound when any door
is opened if the vehicle exceeds a relatively
low speed.

Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Catalytic Converter (page 184).

Keyless Warning Alert

(If Equipped)

Sounds the horn twice when you exit the
vehicle and the keyless vehicle is in RUN,
indicating the vehicle is still on.

Stability Control

Headlamps On Warning Chime

It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated
E138639
or does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the
system switches off. Have the system
checked by an authorized dealer
immediately. See Using Stability
Control (page 201).

Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.

Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking
brake on and drive your vehicle. If the
warning chime remains on after you have
released the parking brake, have the
system checked by your authorized dealer
immediately.

Stability Control Off
It illuminates when you switch
the system off. It goes out when
E130458
you switch the system back on
or when you switch the ignition off. See
Using Stability Control (page 201).

103

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Instrument Cluster
Automatic Transmission Warning
Chime
Sounds when you have not moved the
transmission selector lever to position P.
A message will be shown in the display.

104

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 1)

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display
controls on the steering wheel.
Corresponding information appears in the
information display.
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A
E204495
check in the box indicates the
feature is enabled, and unchecked
indicates the feature is disabled.

E193720

•

•
•
•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
submenu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
submenu.
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.

105

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2

Digital Speedo
Distance to E
Trip Odometer
Trip Timer
Fuel Used
Average Fuel
All Values
*

Total Odometer (located in the lower right of the display)
*

This also displays in other menus.

•
•

Digital Speedo - Shows a digital display
of your vehicle speed.
Distance to E — Shows the
approximate distance your vehicle can
travel before running out of fuel.
Trip Odometer — Registers the
distance of individual journeys.
Trip Timer — The timer stops when you
turn your vehicle off and restarts when
you restart your vehicle.

•
•
•

Fuel Used — Shows the amount of fuel
used for a given trip.
Average Fuel — Shows the average fuel
economy for a given trip.
All Values — Shows the Distance to E,
Trip Odometer, Trip Timer and Average
Fuel.

Note: Press and hold OK on the current
screen to reset the respective trip, distance,
time and fuel information.

Fuel Economy
Information

Distance to Empty
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average MPG
Fuel History
All Values

106

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
•

•

•
•
•

Distance to Empty - Shows the
approximate distance your vehicle can
travel before running out of fuel.
Instantaneous Fuel Economy - Shows
a visual graph of your instantaneous
fuel economy along with your Avg MPG
since the function was last reset.
Average MPG — Shows the average
fuel economy since last reset.
Fuel History - Shows a bar chart of your
fuel history.
All Values — Shows all fuel economy
values (DTE, Inst Fuel Econ, Avg Fuel).

Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.
Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.

Driver Assist
Traction Ctrl
Blindspot
Cross Traffic
Cruise Control

Adaptive or Normal

Driver Alert
Hill Start Assist
Intellig. 4WD
Lane Keeping

Pre-Collision

Mode

Alert, Aid or Alert + Aid

Intensity

High, Normal or Low

Alert Sensitivity

High, Normal or Low

Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor
Trailer Sway
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.

107

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays

Settings
Vehicle

Alarm

All Sensors
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit

Auto Engine Off
Chimes

Information

DTE calcula- Normal or Towing
tion
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting

Auto Highbeam
Hdlamp Delay

Off or XX Seconds

Daytime Lights
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Remote Unlock

All Doors or Driver's Door

Switches inhibit
Power
Mirror

Autofold

Oil Life
Reset

Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to Reset

Power Liftgate

Enable Switch or Disable Switch

Remote
Start

Climate Control

Seats or Seats and Automatic or Off
Wheel
Duration

5, 10 or 15 minutes

System
Windows

Auto or Last Settings

Remote Open

108

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Wipers

Courtesy Wipe
Rain sensing

MyKey

MyKey
Status

MyKey Qty
MyKey Odo
Admin Key Qty

Create
MyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKey

911 Assist

Always On or User Selectable

Do Not
Disturb

On or Off

Traction
Ctrl

Always On or User Selectable

Max Speed

Choose desired speed or off

Volume Limiter

Display

Clear
MyKeys

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys

Distance

Miles & Gallons, L/100 km or km/L

Temperature

Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C)

Tire Pressure

psi, kPa or bar

Language

Choose your applicable setting

Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a
MyKey is set.

109

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Information Display Controls
(Type 2)

•
•

•

Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.
Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

Main Menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
•
•
•
•
•

Display Mode.
Trip 1 & 2.
Fuel Economy.
Driver Assist.
Settings.

Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
Display Mode
Use the up or down arrow buttons to
choose between the following display
options.

E193721

•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.

Display Mode
Display Mode

Option 1

Option 2

Option 3

Option 4

XXX mi (km) to
empty

Round tachometer

Vertical tachometer

110

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Display Mode
Tire pressure on demand screen
Digital speedometer - XXX MPH - Press OK for km/h
Intelligent 4WD - 4WD Gauge with Terrain Management System
*

Vehicles with Intelligent 4WD only. You can choose to have only the fuel gauge show in
this mode. Refer to Display > Gauge Display found in the table under the Settings section
later in this chapter.
XXX mi (km) to empty

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Shows approximate fuel level before the
fuel tank reaches empty. The value is
dynamic and can change (raise or lower)
depending on driving style.

Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator is in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop your vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and
let the engine cool.

Fuel gauge
Switch the ignition on. The fuel gauge
indicates approximately how much fuel is
in the fuel tank. The arrow next to the fuel
pump symbol shows the fuel filler door
side of your vehicle. When the fuel level
becomes low, the level indicator changes
to amber. When the fuel level becomes
critically low, the level indicator changes
to red.

Intelligent 4WD (if equipped)
Displays power distribution between the
front and rear wheels. More power to either
the front or rear wheels displays by more
area filled in. Intelligent 4WD also displays
the currently selected terrain management
mode.
Trip 1 & 2

Note: The fuel gauge level may vary slightly
when your vehicle is moving or when driving
on a slope.

You can access the menu using the
information display control.

Note: When a MyKey is in use, low fuel
warnings display earlier.

Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.

Bar or Round tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute. Driving with your tachometer
pointer continuously at the top of the scale
may damage the engine. During SelectShift
Automatic™ transmission (SST) use, the
currently selected gear appears in the
display.

111

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2
All Values
•

•
•
•

Note: You can reset your trip information
by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.

All Values — shows all trip values (Trip
Timer, Trip Odometer and Average
Fuel).
Trip Odometer — Shows your
accumulated trip distance.
Average Fuel — Shows your average
fuel economy for a given trip.
Trip Timer— The timer stops when you
turn your vehicle off and restarts when
you restart your vehicle.

Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.

Fuel Economy
Inst Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
•

•

Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.

Inst Fuel Economy - shows a visual
graph of your instantaneous fuel
economy, average fuel economy and
distance to empty.
Fuel History - shows a bar chart of your
fuel history from the past 30 min,
average fuel economy and distance to
empty.

Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
Cross Traffic Alert
Cruise Control

Adaptive or Normal

Driver Alert
Hill Start Assist

112

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Driver Assist
Lane Keeping Sys

Pre-Collision

Mode

Alert Only, Aid Only or
Both

Intensity

High, Normal or Low

Alert Sensitivity

High, Normal or Low

Rear Park Aid
Trailer Sway
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.

Settings
Vehicle

Alarm

All Sensors Active
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit

Auto Engine Off
DTE Calcula- Normal or Towing
tion
Easy Entry/Exit
Lighting

Auto Highbeam

On or Off

Autolamp Delay

Off or XX Seconds

Daytime Lights
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Remote Unlock
Switch Inhibit

Mirrors

Autofold

113

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

All Doors or Driver's Door

Information Displays
Settings
Oil Life
Reset

XXX% - Hold OK to Reset

Power Liftgate

Enable Switch or Disable Switch

Remote
Start

Climate Control

Auto or Last Settings

Seats or Seats and
Wheel
Duration

Auto or Off
5, 10 or 15 minutes

System
Windows

Remote Open

Wipers

Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing

MyKey

MyKeys Qty
MyKey Odometer
Admin Key Qty

Create
MyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKey

911 Assist

Always On or User Selectable

Do Not
Disturb
Traction
Control
Max Speed

Choose desired speed or off

Speed
Minder
Volume Limiter

Display Setup

Clear
MyKeys

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys

Distance

Miles & Gallons, L/100km or Km/L

Temperature

°Fahrenheit or °Celsius

114

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Gauge
Display

Fuel Gauge or Fuel + Tach

Tire Pressure

psi, kPa or bar

Language

Choose your applicable setting

Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a
MyKey is set.

•

Information Display Controls
(Type 3)

•
•

Press the up and down arrow buttons
to scroll through and highlight the
options within a menu.
Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
Press the left arrow button to exit a
menu.

Main Menu
From the main menu bar on the left side
of the information display, you can choose
from the following categories:
•
•
•
•

Trip 1 & 2.
Fuel Economy.
Driver Assist.
Settings.

Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back
to the main menu.
Trip 1 & 2
You can access the menu using the
information display control.
Note: Some options may appear slightly
different or not at all if the items are
optional.

E203206

•

Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.

115

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays

Trip 1 & 2
All Values
•

•
•
•

Note: You can reset your trip information
by pressing and holding the OK button on
the left hand steering wheel controls.

Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to
choose the desired fuel economy display.

Fuel Economy
Instant Fuel Economy - Hold OK to Reset
Fuel History
•

•

Note: You can reset your average fuel
economy by pressing and holding the OK
button on the left hand steering wheel
controls.

Driver Assist
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

Driver Assist
Traction Control
Intelligent 4WD

Intelligent 4WD with Terrain Management System

Blindspot
Cross Traffic
Cruise Control

Adaptive or Normal

Driver Alert

116

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Driver Assist
Hill Start Assist
Lane Keeping Sys

Pre-Collision

Mode

Alert, Aid or Alert + Aid

Intensity

High, Normal or Low

Alert Sensitivity

High, Normal or Low

Rear Park Aid
Tire Pressure
Trailer Sway
Note: Some items are optional and may
not appear.

Settings
In this mode, you can configure different
driver setting choices.

Settings
Vehicle

Alarm

All Sensors
Perimeter Sensing
Ask on Exit

DTE Calcula- Normal or Towing
tion
Chimes

Information

Easy Entry/Exit
Auto Engine Off
Lighting

Auto Highbeam
Autolamp Delay

Off or XX Seconds

Daytime Lights
Locks

Autolock
Autounlock
Relock
Remote Unlock

117

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

All Doors or Driver's Door

Information Displays
Settings
Switch Inhibit
Mirror

Autofold

Oil Life

XXX% - Hold OK to Reset

Power Liftgate

Enable Switch or Disable Switch

Remote
Start

Climate Control

Auto or Last Settings

Front Seats &
Wheel
Duration

Auto or Off
5, 10 or 15 minutes

System
Windows

Remote Open

Wipers

Courtesy Wipe
Rain Sensing

MyKey

Mykey
Status

MyKeys Qty
MyKey Odometer
Admin Key Qty

Create
MyKey

Hold OK to Create MyKey

911 Assist

Always On or User Selectable

Do Not
Disturb

On or Off

Traction
Control

Always On or User Selectable

Max Speed

Choose desired speed or off

Speed
Minder
Volume Limiter

Display

Clear
MyKeys

Hold OK to Clear All MyKeys

Distance
Unit

Miles & Gallons, L/100 km or km/L

118

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Settings
Temperature Unit

°Fahrenheit or °Celsius

Tire Pressure

psi, kPa or bar

Language

Choose your applicable setting

Speedo in km/h
Note: Some MyKey items only appear if a
MyKey is set.

INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may display abbreviated
or shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E203207

Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the
information display. Other messages
delete automatically after a short time.
You need to confirm certain messages
before you can access the menus.

4WD
Message

Action

4WD Temporarily
Disabled

The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself
due to the system overheating.

4WD Off

The four wheel drive system has automatically disabled itself
due to the system overheating or you are using the spare tire.

4WD Restored

The four wheel drive system resumes normal function and
clears this message after driving a short distance with the
road tire re-installed or after the system cools.

119

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

4WD Malfunction
Service Required

The four wheel drive system is not operating properly and the
powertrain fault indicator illuminates. See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 100). If the warning stays illuminated
or continues to illuminate, contact an authorized dealer as
soon as possible.

Change 4WD Power
Transfer Unit Lube

Displayed when the transfer case fluid requires service.

4WD Power Transfer
Unit Lube Set to New

Displayed when the transfer case fluid has been changed and
reset to new.

Adaptive Cruise Control
Message

Action

Adaptive Cruise
Malfunction

A radar malfunction is preventing the adaptive cruise from
engaging. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 221).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available

Conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function
properly. See Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 221).

Adaptive Cruise Not
Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

The radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to
bad weather or ice/mud/water in front of radar. Driver can
typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 221).

AdvanceTrac™
Message

Action

Service AdvanceTrac

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

AdvanceTrac Off On

The driver has disabled or enabled the traction control.

Alarm
Message

Action

Vehicle Alarm To Stop
Alarm, Start Vehicle

Unauthorized entry triggered the alarm. See Anti-Theft
Alarm (page 75).

120

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Automatic Engine Shutdown
Message

Action

Engine Shuts Off In XX
Seconds

The engine is preparing to shutdown.

Engine Shut Off For Fuel
Economy

The engine has shutdown to help increase fuel economy.

Engine Shuts Off in XX
Seconds Press OK to
Override

The engine is preparing to shutdown. You can press OK on
the left steering wheel button to override the shutdown.

Automatic High Beam Control
Message

Action

Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen

The front camera sensor has reduced visibility. Clean the
windshield.

Front Camera Malfunc- The system requires service due to a malfunction. Contact an
tion Service Required
authorized dealer.
Front Camera Temporarily Not Available

The front camera sensor has malfunctioned. Wait a short
period of time for the sensor to cool down.

121

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
Message

Action

Check Charging System The charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on
or continues to come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Low Battery Features
Temporarily Turned Off

The battery management system detects an extended low
voltage condition. Your vehicle will disable various features
to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the electrical
loads as soon as possible to improve the system voltage.
Once the system voltage recovers, the disabled features will
operate as normal.

Turn Power Off to Save
Battery

The battery management system determines that the battery
is at a low state of charge. Switch the ignition off as soon as
possible to protect the battery. This message clears once you
start the vehicle and the battery state of charge has recovered.
Turning off unnecessary electrical loads allows faster battery
state-of-charge recovery.

Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
Message

Action

Blindspot System Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Blindspot Not Available The system sensors are blocked. Contact an authorized dealer
Sensor Blocked See
as soon as possible. See Blind Spot Information System
Manual
(page 232).
Vehicle Coming From X

The system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 232).

Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked

The blind spot information system and cross traffic alert
system sensors are blocked. See Blind Spot Information
System (page 232).

Cross Traffic System
Fault

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

122

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Brake System
Message

Action

Brake Fluid Level LOW

The brake fluid level is low. Check the brake system immediately. See Brake Fluid Check (page 297).

Check Brake System

The brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe
place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Park Brake Engaged

The parking brake is set, the engine is running and you drive
your vehicle more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays
on after you release the parking brake, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Doors and Locks
Message

Action

Driver Door Ajar

The driver door is not completely closed.

Passenger Door Ajar

The passenger door is not completely closed.

Rear Left Door Ajar

The rear left door is not completely closed.

Rear Right Door Ajar

The rear right door is not completely closed.

Liftgate Ajar

The liftgate is not completely closed.

Hood Ajar

The hood is not completely closed.

Switches Inhibited
Security Mode

The system has disabled the door switches.

Factory Keypad Code
XXXXX

The factory keypad code displays in the information display
after the system resets the keypad. See Passive Anti-Theft
System (page 74).

Driver Alert
Message

Action

Driver Alert Warning Rest
Now

Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.

Driver Alert Warning Rest
Suggested

Take a rest soon.

123

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Electronic Stability Control
Message

Action

ESC Service required

The system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.

ESC Off

Displays the traction control system status.

ESC On

Displays the traction control system status.

Message

Action

High Engine Temperature Stop Safely

Displays when the engine temperature is too high. Stop your
vehicle in a safe place and allow the engine to cool. If the
problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. See Engine
Coolant Check (page 291).

Engine Fault Service
Now

Engine service is required. Contact an authorized dealer.

Engine Oil Level Low
Check Level

Check the engine oil level. See Engine Oil Check (page 289).

Engine

Fuel
Message

Action

Fuel Level LOW

An early reminder of a low fuel condition.

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

The fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.

Hill Descent Control
Message

Action

Hill Descent Control OFF

Displays when you deactivate hill descent control mode.

For Hill Descent Reduce Displays when hill descent speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h).
Speed
For Hill Descent Select
Gear

Displays when hill descent control mode requires you to shift
the transmission into gear.

Hill Descent Driver
Resume Control

Displays when the hill control mode requires you to resume
control.

124

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Hill Descent Control
Fault

Displays when a hill descent system fault is present.

Hill Descent Control Off
System Cooling

Displays when you disable the hill descent control mode to
cool the brake system.

Hill Descent Control
Ready

Displays when you activate the hill descent control mode.

Hill Start Assist
Message

Action

Hill Start Assist Not
Available

Hill start assist is not available. Contact an authorized dealer.
See Hill Start Assist (page 197).

Keys and Intelligent Access
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to press the brake while starting your vehicle.

No Key Detected

The system does not detect the key. See Keyless Starting
(page 169).

Restart Now or Key is
Needed

When you press the Start Stop button to shut off the engine,
the system does not detect an Intelligent Access key inside
your vehicle.

Full Accessory Power
Active

Your vehicle is in the run ignition state.

Starting System Fault

There is a problem with your vehicle’s starting system. Contact
an authorized dealer for service.

Key Program Successful You have successfully programmed an intelligent access key
to the system.
Key Program Failure

You have failed to program an intelligent access key to the
system.

Max Number of Keys
Learned

You have programmed the maximum number of keys to the
system.

125

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Not Enough Keys
Learned

You have not programmed enough keys to the system.

Key Battery Low Replace The key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.
Soon
See Remote Control (page 53).
Engine ON

Informs you that you are exiting your vehicle with the intelligent access key and the engine is on.

Lane Keeping System
Message

Action

Lane Keeping Sys.
Malfunction Service
Required

The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.

Front Camera Temporarily Not Available

The system has detected a condition that has caused the
system to be temporarily unavailable.

Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen

The system has detected a condition that requires a clean
windshield to operate properly.

Front Camera Malfunc- The system has malfunctioned. Contact an authorized dealer
tion Service Required
as soon as possible.
Keep Hands on Steering
Wheel

The system requests the driver to keep their hands on the
steering wheel.

Maintenance
Message

Action

LOW Engine Oil Pressure

Stop your vehicle as soon as safely possible. Switch off the
engine. Check the oil level. If the warning stays on or continues
to come on with your engine running, contact an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Change Engine Oil Soon

The engine oil life remaining is 10% or less.

Oil Change Required

The oil life left reaches 0%.

Engine Coolant Overtemperature

The engine coolant temperature is excessively high.

126

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Washer Fluid Level Low

The washer fluid is low and needs refilling.

Transport Mode Contact Indicates that your vehicle is still in Transport mode. This may
Dealer
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.
Factory Mode Contact
Dealer

Indicates that your vehicle is still in Factory mode. This may
not allow some features to operate properly. Contact an
authorized dealer.

MyKey
Message

Action

MyKey Not Created

You cannot program a MyKey during key programming.

MyKey Active Drive
Safely

MyKey is active.

Speed Limited to XX
MPH/km/h

When starting your vehicle, a MyKey is in use and the MyKey
speed limit is on.

Vehicle Near Top Speed When a MyKey is in use, the MyKey speed limit is on and your
vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Check Speed Drive
Safely

MyKey is active.

Buckle Up to Unmute
Audio

A MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is active.

Could Not Program
Integrated Key

You attempted to program a spare key using two existing
MyKeys.

127

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Park Aid
Message

Action

Check Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Principle of Operation
(page 205).

Check Rear Park Aid

The system has detected a condition that requires service.
Contact an authorized dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page
205).

Front Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Rear Park Aid On Off

Displays the park aid status.

Park Brake
Message

Action

Park Brake Engaged

You have set the parking brake and you have driven the vehicle
more than 3 mph (5 km/h). If the warning stays on after you
have released the parking brake, contact an authorized dealer.

Power Steering
Message

Action

Steering Malfunction
Service Now

The power steering system has detected a condition that
requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Service Power Steering
Now

The power steering system is not working. Stop your vehicle
at a safe place. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering Assist Fault

The power steering system has detected a condition within
the power steering system, or passive entry or passive start
system requires service. Contact an authorized dealer.

Steering column lock: You need to turn the steering wheel in order to disengage the
Remove and re-insert
steering lock.
key while turning wheel
to unlock

128

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
Message

Action

Pre-Collision Warning
Malfunction

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.

Pre-Collision Warning
Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual

You have a blocked sensor due to bad weather, ice, mud or
water in front of the radar sensor. You can typically clean the
sensor to resolve. See Pre-Collision Assist (page 238).

Pre-Collision Warning
Not Available

A fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized
dealer.

Remote Start
Message

Action

To Drive: Press Brake
and Gear Shift Button

A reminder to apply the brake and push the gearshift button
to drive your vehicle after a remote start.

Seats
Message

Action

Objects are by the passenger seat. After you move the objects
Occupant Sensor
BLOCKED Remove
away from the seat, if the warning stays on or continues to
Objects Near Passenger come on, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Seat
Memory Recall Not
A reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.
Permitted While Driving
Memory X Saved

Shows where you have saved your memory setting.

129

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Starting System
Message

Action

To START Press Brake

A reminder to apply the brake when starting your vehicle.

Cranking Time Exceeded

The starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to
start your vehicle.

Engine Start Pending
Please Wait

The starter is attempting to start your vehicle.

Pending Start Cancelled

The system has cancelled the pending start.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Message

Action

LOW Tire Pressure

One or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 333).

Tire Pressure Monitor
Fault

The tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the
warning stays on or continues to come on, contact an
authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 333).

Tire Pressure Sensor
Fault

A tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is
in use. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact
an authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 333).

Terrain Management System
Message

Action

Normal Mode Active

Displays terrain management normal mode is currently active.

Snow, Gravel, Grass
Mode Active

Displays terrain management snow, gravel, grass mode is
currently active.

Mud, Rut Mode Active

Displays terrain management mud, ruts mode is currently
active.

130

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Sand Mode Active

Displays terrain management sand mode is currently active.

Terrain Management
System Fault

Displays when the terrain management system detects an
error.

Mode Change Not
Accepted, Retry

Displayed when terrain management mode cannot be
changed at the time of your request.

Traction Control
Message

Action

Traction Control Off

Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 199).

Traction Control On

Displays the status of the traction control system. See Using
Traction Control (page 199).

Trailer
Message

Action

Trailer Sway Reduce
Speed

Displays when the trailer sway control has detected a trailer
sway. See Trailer Sway Control (page 250).

Transmission
Message

Action

Transmission Malfunction Service Now

Contact an authorized dealer.

Transmission Overtem- The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
perature Stop Safely
safe place as soon as possible.
Transmission Overheating Stop Safely

The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a
safe place as soon as possible.

Transmission Service
Required

Contact an authorized dealer.

Transmission Too Hot
Press Brake

The transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.

131

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Information Displays
Message

Action

Transmission Limited
Function See Manual

The transmission has overheated and has limited functionality.

Transmission Warming
Up Please Wait

The transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before
you drive.

Transmission Not in Park

A reminder to shift into park.

Press Brake Pedal

A request for you to apply the brake as needed by the transmission.

Transmission Adjusted

The transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.

Transmission AdaptMode

The transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.

Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On

The transmission is locked and unable to select gears.

Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off

The transmission is unlocked and free to select gears.

132

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
MANUAL CLIMATE CONTROL

E193398

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.
Note: At least one of these
buttons illuminates on when the
system is on.

133

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. Recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel
vents, air conditioning turns on
and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed.

Temperature control: Adjusts
the temperature of the air
circulated in your vehicle.

Climate Control
G

Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging.
Recirculation may also turn on
and off in Panel or Panel/Floor
air flow modes during hot
weather in order to improve
cooling efficiency.

Rear passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting for the rear
passenger compartment.

Rear fan speed control lock:
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.

Rear passenger power: Press
to switch the rear system on and
off.

Rear fan speed control:
Adjusts the volume of air
circulated to the rear passenger
compartment.

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
141).

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.

E193399

134

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
A

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off.

Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
141).

MAX Defrost: Press to switch
on defrost. The driver and
passenger settings set to HI, air
flows through the windshield
vents, and the fan adjusts to the
highest speed. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear
the windshield of a thin covering
of ice. The heated rear window
also turns on when you select
maximum defrost.

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.

Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
F

Air distribution control: Press
to switch air flow from the
windshield, instrument panel, or
footwell vents on or off. You can
distribute air through any
combination of these vents.

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.

DUAL: Press to switch on
temperature control for the
passenger side of the vehicle.
When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the
same as the driver settings.

135

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
L

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust

to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.

AUTOMATIC CLIMATE
CONTROL - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.

E193400

136

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
A

A/C: Press to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, maximum defrost), the
air conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even though
you switch off the air
conditioning.

MAX A/C: Press for maximum
cooling. The driver and
passenger settings set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning turns on and the fan
adjusts to the highest speed.
Recirculated air: Press to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air. The air currently
in the passenger compartment
recirculates. This may reduce the
time needed to cool the interior
(when used with A/C) and
reduce unwanted odors from
entering your vehicle.

Passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting on the
passenger side.

Climate controlled seats:
Press to switch the climate
controlled seats on and off.

Fan speed control: Adjusts the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.

Power: Press to switch the
system on and off. When the
system is off, it prevents outside
air from entering the vehicle.

Driver temperature control:
Adjusts the temperature setting
on the driver side. This control
also adjusts the passenger side
temperature when you switch
off dual zone mode.

Heated rear window: Press to
switch the heated rear window
on and off. See Heated
Windows and Mirrors (page
141).

Defrost: Press to distribute air
through the windshield air vents
and de-mister. Air distribution to
the instrument panel and
footwell vents turns off. You can
also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin
covering of ice.

Note: Recirculated air may turn
off (or prevent you from
switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to
reduce the risk of fogging or to
improve cooling efficiency.
D

DUAL: Press to switch on
temperature control for the
passenger side of the vehicle.
When dual zone is off, passenger
temperature settings remain the
same as the driver settings.

Heated seats: Press to switch
the heated seats on and off. See
Heated Seats (page 158).

137

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.

Note: To prevent window
fogging, you cannot select
recirculated air when maximum
defrost is on.
N

Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.

AUTO: Press to switch on
automatic operation. Adjust to
select the desired temperature.
Fan speed, air distribution, air
conditioning operation, and
outside or recirculated air adjust
to heat or cool the vehicle to
maintain the desired
temperature. You can also
switch off dual zone mode by
pressing and holding for more
than two seconds.

Manual Climate Control
Note: To reduce fogging of the windshield
during humid weather, adjust the air
distribution control to the windshield air
vents position.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is
not necessary. The system automatically
adjusts to heat or cool the interior to your
selected temperature as quickly as possible.
For the system to function efficiently, the
instrument panel and side air vents should
be fully open.

HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.

Note: If you select AUTO during cold
temperatures, the system directs airflow to
the windshield and side window vents. In
addition, the fan may run at a slower speed
until the engine warms up.

Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.

Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system automatically uses
recirculated air to maximize interior cooling.
Fan speed may also reduce until the air
cools.

Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.

138

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
Quickly Heating the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
full heat setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

Recommended Settings for Heating
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the hot settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Direct air to the footwell using the air
distribution buttons.

Quickly Cooling the Interior
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Select MAX A/C.

Drive with the windows open until you
feel cold air through the air vents.

139

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Adjust the fan speed to the center
setting.

Press AUTO.

Adjust the temperature control to the
midway point of the cold settings.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

Direct air to the instrument panel using
the air distribution buttons.

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold Weather
Manual climate control

Automatic climate control

Direct air to the windshield using the air Press the defrost button.
distribution buttons.

Press A/C.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting.

Adjust the fan speed to the highest
setting.

Adjust the temperature control to the
desired setting. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.

REAR PASSENGER CLIMATE CONTROLS

140

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control

E188689

Rear fan speed control:
Adjusts the volume of air
circulated to the rear passenger
compartment.

Rear heated seats: Press to
switch the rear heated seats on
and off.

Rear passenger temperature
control: Adjusts the
temperature setting for the rear
passenger compartment.

Rear air distribution control:
Press to switch the direction of
air flow.

Rear fan speed control lock:
When illuminated, you can only
operate the rear passenger
settings through the front
controls.

HEATED WINDOWS AND
MIRRORS
Note: Make sure the engine is running
before operating the heated windows.

141

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
Heated Rear Window

Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 499).

Press the button to clear the
heated rear window of thin ice
E184884
and fog. The heated rear
window turns off after a short period of
time. Press the button again to switch it
off.

For additional cabin air filter information,
or to replace the filter, see an authorized
dealer.

REMOTE START (If Equipped)

Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display.
The system adjusts the interior
temperature depending on your chosen
settings during remote start.

Heated Exterior Mirrors

You cannot adjust the climate control
setting during remote start operation.
When you switch the ignition on, the
climate control system returns to the
previous settings. You can now make
adjustments.

When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.

You need to switch on certain
vehicle-dependent features, such as:
• Heated seats.
• Cooled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.

Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.

CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.

Automatic Settings
In hot weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The cooled seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display).
In moderate weather, the system either
heats or cools (based on previous
settings). The rear defroster, heated
mirrors and heated or cooled seats do not
turn on.

You can locate the cabin air filter behind
the glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
142

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Climate Control
In cold weather, the system sets to 72°F
(22°C). The heated seats are set to high
(if available, and AUTO is on in the
information display). The heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.

143

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base
of your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the
top of it is level with the top of your
head and as far forward as possible.
Make sure that you remain
comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in
(25 cm) between your breastbone and
the airbag cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the
safety belt over the center of your
shoulder and position the lap strap
tightly across your hips.

SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out
of position or with the seatback reclined
too far can take weight off the seat cushion
and affect the decision of the passenger
sensing system, resulting in serious injury
or death in the event of a crash. Always sit
upright against your seat back, with your
feet on the floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the
seatback as this can cause the occupant
to slide under the safety belt, resulting in
serious injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects
higher than the seatback to reduce the risk
of serious injury in the event of a crash or
during heavy braking.

Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.

HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.

E68595

When you use them properly, the seat,
head restraint, safety belt and airbags will
provide optimum protection in the event
of a crash.

144

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
The head restraints consist of:
WARNING: The head restraint is a
safety device. Whenever possible it should
be installed and properly adjusted when
the seat is occupied. Failure to adjust the
head restraint properly could reduce its
effectiveness during certain impacts.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

Two steel stems.

Guide sleeve adjust and release
button.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint

Front seat head restraints

1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1.

Pull the head restraint up until it
reaches its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.

E138642

Second-row center seat head restraint
(If equipped)

E138645

145

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
Installing the Head Restraint

Third-row head restraints

Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Second-row outboard seat head
restraints

E190836

The head restraints consist of:

E201128

The head restraints consist of:
A

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

Two steel stems.

Guide sleeve unlock and remove
button.

Fold button.

An energy absorbing head
restraint.

Two steel stems.

Fold strap.

Folding the Head Restraint
Pull the fold strap (C). Pull the head
restraint back up to reset.
Note: Press the stow or fold button on the
power folding seats to automatically fold
the head restraint.

Tilting Head Restraints
Folding the Head Restraint

The front head restraints tilt for extra
comfort. To tilt the head restraint, do the
following:

1. Press and hold button D.
2. Pull the head restraint back up to reset.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Fold the head restraint.
2. Press and hold both C buttons.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.

146

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats

E190838

Recline Adjustment
E144727

Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.

WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivot it forward
again to release it to the rearward, un-tilted
position.

MANUAL SEATS (If Equipped)
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
WARNING: Make sure the seat fully
locks into place by rocking it backward and
forward. Not securing the seat into the
locked position can be dangerous in a
crash and could cause serious personal
injury or death.

E190837

147

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
Lumbar Adjustment (If Equipped)

POWER SEATS (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of
your vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.
E190839

E176038

148

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support (If

Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seat backrest and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.

Equipped)

E176039

E156301

Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Massage Mode

Lumbar and Bolster Mode

Back massage intensity
adjustment

Upper lumbar

Massage intensity decrease

Lumbar decrease

and off
C

Cushion massage intensity
adjustment

Lower lumbar

Massage intensity increase

Lumbar increase

On and off

You can also adjust this feature through
the touchscreen. When switched on, the
system displays directions for you to adjust
the lumbar settings in your seat or to set
the massage function.

The massage feature defaults to an
alternating massage mode with back
massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar
and bolster features default to the middle
lumbar mode.

To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:

Press C a second time to adjust the back
bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the
cushion bolster.

149

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
> Multi-Contour Seat.

Seats
Saving a PreSet Position

2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.

1. Switch the ignition on.
2. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
3. Press and hold the desired preset
button until you hear a single tone.

To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1.

Press the Menu Settings icon > Vehicle
>Multi-Contour Seat.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press Off, Lo or Hi.

You can save up to three preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset
at any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position

MEMORY FUNCTION (If Equipped)

Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving
position. The memory features move to
the position stored for that preset.

WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear
of obstructions and that all occupants are
clear of moving parts.

Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when the ignition is off, or when the
transmission is in park (P) or neutral (N)
and the vehicle is not moving if the ignition
is on.

WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.

You can also recall a preset memory
position by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked
to a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.

This feature automatically recalls the
position of the following:
•
•
•
•

Driver seat.
Power mirrors.
Optional power adjustable foot pedals.
Optional power steering column.

Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.

The memory control is on the driver door.

Note: Pressing any active memory feature
adjustment control, or any memory button
during a memory recall, cancels the
operation.

Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent
Access Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to three remote controls
or intelligent access (IA) keys.
E142554

150

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
1.

With the ignition on, move the memory
features to the desired positions.
2. Press and hold the desired preset
button for about five seconds. A tone
sounds after about two seconds.
Continue holding until you hear a
second tone.
3. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.

WARNING: Reclining the seatback
can cause an occupant to slide under the
seat's seatbelt, resulting in severe personal
injuries in the event of a crash.
Recline Adjustment

To unlink a remote control, follow the
same procedure – except in step 3, press
the unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote
control or intelligent access key is in range,
the memory function moves to the settings
of the first key to recall a memory position.

Easy Entry and Exit Feature
E190840

If you enable the easy entry and exit
feature, it automatically moves the driver
seat position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm)
when you switch the ignition off.

Lift the handle to adjust the seatback
rearward or forward. The seatback can
also fold forward until it is flat.
Fold flat seatback

The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature
through the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105).

REAR SEATS
Adjusting the Rear Seats
Second Row Seats
E213288

Lift the handle and fold the seatback
forward until it is flat.

WARNING: Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap belt
snug and low across the hips.

Note: For the bench seats, make sure the
center seatbelt is unbuckled before folding
the seatback.

151

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
Note: You may have to lower the center
head restraint. See Head Restraints (page
144).

Moving the Seats Backward and
Forward (If Equipped)

Fold and tumble the second-row seat to
access the third row:

E190838

Third Row Seats (Manual Seats)
E193964

WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seat backrest
before returning it to the original position.
Pull on the seat backrest to make sure that
it has fully latched after returning the seat
backrest to its original position. An
unlatched seat may become dangerous if
you stop suddenly or have a crash.
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or
release a seat floor latch when the vehicle
is moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.

Fold the outboard head restraint.

E213288

2. Lift the handle on the side of the seat
to fold the seatback flat.

Note: Remove items from the second-row
seat. Make sure that no bulky objects such
as purses or briefcases are on the floor in
front of the second-row seats before
tumbling them.
Note: For second-row bench seats, make
sure the center seatbelt is unbuckled before
folding the seatback.
Note: You may have to move the front-row
seat forward to allow the second-row seat
to be fully tumbled.

152

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
5. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat Step 4.
6. Pull the head restraint back up to its
normal adjusted position.
E190844

3. Lift the handle all the way up until the
seat releases from the floor. Rotate the
seat forward to allow access to the
third row.

E190847

Make sure that the rear latch hooks are
properly engaged with the floor striker.
Note: Make sure that the seat and seatback
are latched securely in position. Keep floor
area free of objects that would prevent
proper seat engagement.

E190845

4. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.

Third Row Seat Access (Power Fold
and Tumble Seat-If equipped)

WARNING: Do not fold a seat if it is
occupied. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury.

E190846

153

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats

WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
with a seat that is unlatched or in the
folded position. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in the event of a sudden stop or
crash.
Note: You may have to lower the center
head restraint. See Head Restraints (page
144).
E190848

The control is at the back of the rear door
opening. Press and hold it to fold the
seatback down and tumble the seat
forward for access to the third row.
Third Row Seat Exit (Manual Seat,
Power Fold and Tumble Seat)

WARNING: Do not place cargo or
any objects behind the seatback before
returning it to the original position.

E193964

Fold the outboard head restraint.

WARNING: Check under the seat
cushion to make sure no cargo or objects
are under the seat cushion before returning
the seat cushion to its original position, and
that the seat cushion locks into place.
Failure to do so may prevent the seat from
operating properly in the event of a crash,
which could increase the risk of serious
injury.
WARNING: Do not adjust a seat or
release a seat floor latch when the vehicle
is moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in
a sudden stop or crash.

E190849

2. Pull on the strap on the back of the
second row seat. This folds the
seatback forward. Pull the strap a
second time to tumble the seat
forward, allowing easy exit from the
third row seat.

154

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats

E190850

E190847

3. To return the seatback to the floor from
the tumbled position, rotate the seat
down until you hear it latching to the
floor.

Remove all objects from the seat and
stowage tub.

E190846

4. Lift the seatback toward the rear of the
vehicle, and rotate the seatback until
you hear a click, locking it in the upright
position. Note: The seatback will not
raise if the rear latch hooks are not
properly engaged to the floor striker. If
the seatback does not raise, then
repeat Step 3.
5. Pull the head restraint back up to its
normal adjusted position.

E193843

2. Fold the outboard head restraint by
pulling the head restraint release strap.

155

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats

E190924

E190854

3. From the rear of the vehicle, fold the
seatback by pulling and holding the red
strap while pushing the seatback
forward. Release the strap once the
seatback starts rotating forward.

Note: Do not use the third row seat back as
a load floor when the seatback is folded.
Note: Make sure that the area under the
seat is free of objects before stowing it.
Unfolding the Third Row Manual Seat

WARNING: Do not sit in seats that
are rearward facing when your vehicle is
moving. This is not a correct seating
position and the seatbelts do not properly
function this way. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury
or death in a sudden stop or crash.

4. Release the cushion latches by pulling
the short black strap while pulling on
the strap at the top of the seatback.
This tumbles the seat all the way into
the tub in the floor.
Note: Do not use the seat anchors as cargo
tie downs.

156

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats

E190927

E190926

Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.

2. To return the seatback to the upright
position, pull the red strap. Then while
holding the red strap, pull the long
strap on the seatback to raise the
seatback.
3. Pull the head restraints up to their
normal positions.

Note: Make sure the area under the load
floor is free of objects before unstowing it.

PowerFold™Third Row Seats (If
Equipped)
The third row power seat buttons are
behind the third row seats on the left-hand
quarter trim panel.

E190925

Unlatch and lift the seat out of the tub
in the floor by squeezing and pulling up
on the handle. Once the seat is in a
vertical position, push the seat over,
letting it fall onto the latches.

E213286

157

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

NORMAL: Press to return the
seat to the normal seating
position.

STOW: Press to stow the seat
into the tub floor.

Seats
C

FOLD: Press to fold down the
seatback.

RH / BOTH / LH: Press to select
the normal, stow and fold modes
to activate the right-hand seat,
the left-hand seat or both.

HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

Note: The third row seat includes obstacle
detection that allows the seat to stop and
reverse direction if it hits an obstacle so that
the obstacle can be removed.
Note: Pressing a different button while the
power seat feature is already being
performed may cause the first selected seat
movement to be cancelled. Allow the first
seat movement to be completed before
pressing a button for another function.
Note: Make sure that there are no objects
such as books, purses or briefcases on the
load floor before unstowing the seat. Failure
to remove all objects from the top of the
load floor prior to unstowing it may cause
damage to the seat.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.

Note: In order to allow the seat to complete
the stowed position, do not place objects
under the seat before stowing. Remove all
objects from the seat and stowage tub.
Note: In the unlikely event that the third
row power seat stops prematurely or travels
to an unexpected position, press the FOLD
button (C) to reset the seat and return it to
a normal position.

Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.

These seats feature a power one-touch
operation that allows you fold and stow
the seats.
•

•

The power fold seats work only when
the transmission is in park (P) and the
liftgate is open.
If the ignition is off and the feature is
still running, the battery saver turns it
off after 10 minutes. Press unlock on
the remote entry key transmitter to
reactivate the power seats or unlock it
with the keyless entry keypad. See
Remote Control (page 53).

E146322

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.

158

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.

Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Note: The heated seats may remain on
after you remote start your vehicle, based
on your remote start settings. The heated
seats may also turn on when you start your
vehicle if they were on when you switched
your vehicle off.

Second Row Heated Seats (If Equipped)
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must exercise care when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that insulates against
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the heated seat to overheat.
Do not puncture the seat with pins, needles
or other pointed objects. This may damage
the heating element which may cause the
heated seat to overheat. An overheated
seat may cause serious personal injury.

CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS
(If Equipped)

Heated Seats
WARNING: People who are unable
to feel pain to their skin because of
advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use,
exhaustion or other physical conditions,
must use caution when using the heated
seat. The heated seat may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time. Do not place
anything on the seat that may block the
heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This can
cause the heated seat to overheat. Do not
puncture the seat with pins, needles or
other pointed objects. This damages the
heating element and can cause the heated
seat to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.

Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.
E146322

159

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Seats
Climate Controlled Seat Air Filter
Replacement
Your vehicle has lifetime air filters that are
integrated with the seats. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not
required.
E146322

Cooled Seats
Note: The engine must be running to use
this feature.

E146309

Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cool settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler
settings.
Note: The cooled seats may remain on after
you remote start your vehicle, based on your
remote start settings. The cooled seats may
also turn on when you start your vehicle if
they were on when you switched your
vehicle off.

160

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
HomeLink Wireless Control
System
WARNING: Make sure that the
garage door and security device are free
from obstruction when you are
programming. Do not program the system
with the vehicle in the garage.
WARNING: Do not use the system
with any garage door opener that does not
have the safety stop and reverse feature
as required by U.S. Federal Safety
Standards (this includes any garage door
opener manufactured before April 1, 1982).
A garage door opener which cannot detect
an object, signaling the door to stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or death.

E188211

The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door
opener with a three-button transmitter
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features,
a garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the
home. You can program garage doors as
well as entry gate operators, security
systems, entry door locks and home or
office lighting.

Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.

Additional system information can be
found online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

Note: We recommend that upon the sale
or lease termination of your vehicle, you
erase the programmed function buttons for
security reasons. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes later in this section.

In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your in-vehicle
HomeLink function button with your
hand-held transmitter.

Note: You can program a maximum of
three devices. To change or replace any of
the three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the
current settings. See Erasing the Function
Button Codes.

Note: The programming steps below
assume you will be programming HomeLink
that was not previously programmed. If your
HomeLink was previously programmed, you
may need to erase your HomeLink buttons.
See Erasing the Function Button Codes.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This helps ensure quicker
training and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.

161

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
If the indicator light flashes rapidly, press
and hold for two seconds and release the
programmed HomeLink button. Repeat
the "press/hold/release" sequence up to
three times to complete the programming
process. If your device still does not
operate, you must program your garage
door. See Programming Your Garage
Door Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat
Steps 1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

E188212

With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, switch your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Press and release the function button
that you would like to program.
3. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
4. Press and hold the hand-held
transmitter button you want to
program while watching the indicator
light on HomeLink. Continue to hold
the hand-held button until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes rapidly
or is continuously on.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.

Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.

E142659

Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.

5. Press and hold the HomeLink button
you programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. Your device
should activate when the HomeLink
button is pressed and released.

162

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)

E188212

E188213

3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending
on your brand of garage door opener,
you may need to repeat this sequence
a third time.

Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the
indicator light above the buttons
flashes rapidly.
2. When the indicator light flashes,
release the buttons. You erased the
codes for all buttons.

Gate Operator / Canadian
Programming

Reprogramming a Single Button

Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
after several seconds of transmission –
which may not be long enough for
HomeLink to pick up the signal during
programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
some U.S. gate operators are designed to
“time-out” in the same manner.

To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1.

Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
2. The indicator light begins to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the
Programming section.

Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.

For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/user/HomeLinkGentex
or by calling the toll-free help line at
1-800-355-3515.

Press and release, every two seconds,
your hand-held transmitter until the
HomeLink indicator light changes to a
rapidly blinking or continuously on light.
2. Release the hand-held transmitter
button.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming, Step 4.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.

163

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Universal Garage Door Opener (If Equipped)
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications to your
device not expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance can void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC
radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment. End Users must
follow the specific operating instructions
for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This
transmitter must be at least 8 in (20 cm)
from the user and must not be co-located
or operating in conjunction with any other
antenna or transmitter.
The term “IC:” before the
certification/registration number only
signifies that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.

164

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
12 Volt DC Power Point

Locations

WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter
can cause damage not covered by the
vehicle warranty, and can result in fire or
serious injury.

Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
• In the cargo area.

110 Volt AC Power Point (If Equipped)

Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.

WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond
the 150 watt load limit and could result in
fire or serious injury.

If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition
on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.

Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.

Do not insert objects other than an
accessory plug into the power point. This
damages the power point and may blow
the fuse.

You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is
on the rear of the center console.

Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Note: Timed power points remain on for 30
minutes if the vehicle is in accessory mode.
If you switch the vehicle off, the timed
power points remain on for 75 minutes.

E247586

165

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Auxiliary Power Points
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged
in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition
is off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off
power when in fault mode if the device
exceeds the 150 watt limit. Unplug your
device and switch the ignition off. Switch
the ignition back on, but do not plug your
device back in. Let the system cool off and
switch the ignition off to reset the fault
mode. Switch the ignition back on and
make sure the indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven
refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical
equipment or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an
extremely stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.

166

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Storage Compartments
Second Row Center Console (If

CENTER CONSOLE

Equipped)

Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:

E211667

E226487

USB port and SD card.

Power point.

Cup holder.

Terrain control and hill descent
control.

AC power point or USB port.

Rear climate controls.

AC power point.

USB smart charger.

Cup holder.

Flip forward armrest.

Utility compartment.

Rear Seat Armrest

E190042

167

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Storage Compartments
OVERHEAD CONSOLE

E224352

Press near the rear edge of the door to
open it.

168

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the
engine.

GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.

IGNITION SWITCH (If Equipped)

WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine
in a closed garage or in other enclosed
areas. Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always
open the garage door before you start the
engine.

E72128

0 (off) - The ignition is off.
Note: When you switch the ignition off and
leave your vehicle, do not leave your key in
the ignition. This could cause your vehicle
battery to lose charge.

WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment.
If you smell exhaust fumes inside your
vehicle, have your vehicle inspected
immediately. Do not drive if you smell
exhaust fumes.

I (accessory) - Allows the electrical
accessories, such as the radio, to operate
while the engine is not running.
Note: Do not leave the ignition key in this
position for too long. This could cause your
vehicle battery to lose charge.

If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi
(8 km) after you reconnect it. This is
because the engine management system
must realign itself with the engine. You
can disregard any unusual driving
characteristics during this period.

II (on) - All electrical circuits are
operational and the warning lamps and
indicators illuminate.
III (start) - cranks the engine.

KEYLESS STARTING (If Equipped)

The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.

Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the engine.

169

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Ignition Modes

Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each
time, without the engine starting, you
reached the 60-second time limit. A
message appears in the information display
alerting you that you exceeded the cranking
time. You cannot attempt to start the
engine for at least 15 minutes. After 15
minutes, you are limited to a 15-second
engine cranking time. You need to wait 60
minutes before you can crank the engine for
60 seconds again.

E146431

The keyless starting system has three
modes:
Off: Turns the ignition off.
•

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode, or
when the engine is running but the
vehicle is not moving.

Before starting your vehicle, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and
electrical accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Make sure the transmission is in park
(P).
• Switch the ignition on. For vehicles with
a keyless ignition, see the following
instructions.

On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
•

Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.

Start: Starts the engine.
•

Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button for any length of time. An
indicator light on the button illuminates
when the ignition is on and when the
engine starts.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Turn the key to the start position to
start the engine.
Note: The engine may continue cranking
for up to 15 seconds or until it starts.

STARTING A GASOLINE
ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases. This helps to warm up the
engine. If the engine idle speed does not
slow down automatically, have your
vehicle checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: If you cannot start the engine on the
first try, wait for a short period and try again.

Vehicles with Keyless Start
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.

170

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
2. Insert the passive key into the backup
slot.
3. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal then press the push button
ignition switch to switch the ignition on
and start your vehicle.

Note: You must have your intelligent access
key in your vehicle in order to shift the
transmission out of park (P).
1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
The system does not function if:
• The passive key frequencies are
jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.

Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to
restart your vehicle within 20 seconds of
switching it off, even if it does not detect
a valid passive key.

If you are unable to start your vehicle, do
the following:

Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
push button ignition switch. After 20
seconds, you can no longer start your
vehicle if it does not detect a valid passive
key.

Once your vehicle starts, it remains running
until you press the push button ignition
switch, even if your vehicle does not detect
a valid passive key. If you open and close
a door while your vehicle is running, the
system searches for a valid passive key.
You cannot start your vehicle if the system
does not detect a valid passive key within
20 seconds.

Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:

1. Fully depress the brake pedal.
2. Shift into park (P).
3. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
4. Start the engine.

E198728

Open the floor console storage
compartment lid.

171

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
Automatic Engine Shutdown

2. Switch the ignition off.
3. Apply the parking brake.

For vehicles with a keyless ignition, this
feature automatically shuts down the
engine if it has been idling for an extended
period. The ignition also turns off in order
to save battery power. Before your vehicle
shuts down, a message appears in the
information display showing a timer
counting down from 30 seconds. If you do
not intervene within 30 seconds, your
vehicle shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to
inform you that your vehicle has shut down
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.

Vehicles with Keyless Start
1. Shift into park (P).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: The ignition, all electrical circuits and
all warning lamps and indicators will be
turned off.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving

Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off
the automatic shutdown feature. When you
switch it off temporarily, it turns on at the
next ignition cycle.

WARNING: Switching off the engine
when the vehicle is still moving will result
in a loss of brake and steering assistance.
The steering will not lock, but higher effort
will be required. When the ignition is
switched off, some electrical circuits,
including air bags, warning lamps and
indicators may also be off. If the ignition
was turned off accidentally, you can shift
into neutral (N) and re-start the engine.

You can stop the shutdown, or reset the
timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle, for example pressing
the brake or accelerator pedal.
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition
is on using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 105). The
feature only remains off for the current
ignition cycle.
• During the 30-second countdown, the
system prompts you to press OK or
RESET to temporarily switch the
feature off for the current ignition cycle
only.

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1.

Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P) and switch the ignition
off.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Vehicles with Keyless Start

Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary

Shift into neutral and use the brakes to
bring your vehicle to a safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, shift
into park (P).

Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1.

Shift into park (P).

172

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
3. Press and hold the push button ignition
switch, or press it three times within
two seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.

WARNING: Do not fully close the
hood, or allow it to drop under its own
weight when using the engine block heater.
This could damage the power cable and
may cause an electrical short resulting in
fire, injury and property damage.

Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: If you smell exhaust
fumes inside your vehicle, have your vehicle
checked by your authorized dealer
immediately. Do not drive your vehicle if
you smell exhaust fumes. Carbon
monoxide is present in exhaust fumes.
Take precautions to avoid its dangerous
effects.

Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F
(-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by
warming the engine coolant. This allows
the climate control system to respond
quickly. The equipment includes a heater
element (installed in the engine block) and
a wire harness. You can connect the
system to a grounded 120-volt AC
electrical source.

Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the
following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (3 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.

We recommend that you do the following
for a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by
Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) or
Canadian Standards Association
(CSA). This extension cord must be
suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord
plug connections are free and clear of
water. This could cause an electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If
Equipped)

WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not use your heater
with ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.

173

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Starting and Stopping the Engine
•
•

•

Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
Check for heat anywhere in the
electrical hookup once the system has
been operating for approximately 30
minutes.
Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
Make sure the heater system is
checked for proper operation before
winter.

Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are
clean and dry prior to use. Clean them with
a dry cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours
of energy per hour of use. The system does
not have a thermostat. It achieves
maximum temperature after
approximately three hours of operation.
Using the heater longer than three hours
does not improve system performance and
unnecessarily uses electricity.

174

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling
•

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.

•

WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until
the sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray
out, which could cause serious personal
injury.

•

WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain
benzene, which is a cancer-causing agent.

•

WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases,
excessive or prolonged breathing of
fuel vapor can cause serious illness and
permanent injury.
Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush
with water for 15 minutes and seek
medical attention. Failure to seek
proper medical attention could lead to
permanent injury.
Fuels can be harmful if absorbed
through the skin. If you splash fuel on
your skin, clothing or both, promptly
remove contaminated clothing and
thoroughly wash your skin with soap
and water. Repeated or prolonged skin
contact causes skin irritation.
Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram
for the treatment of alcoholism.
Breathing fuel vapors could cause an
adverse reaction, serious personal
injury or sickness. Immediately call a
physician if you experience any adverse
reactions.

FUEL QUALITY - GASOLINE

Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and
any open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or
fatal if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic
and if swallowed can cause death or
permanent injury. If fuel is swallowed
immediately call a physician, even if no
symptoms are immediately apparent.
The toxic effects of fuel may not be
apparent for hours.

Choosing the Right Fuel

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.

175

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling
Some fuel stations, particularly those in
high altitude areas, offer fuels posted as
regular unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating below 87. The use of these fuels
could result in engine damage that will not
be covered by the vehicle warranty.

•

Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.

The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (commonly known
as MMT), which is a manganese-based
fuel additive, will impair engine
performance and affect the emission
control system.

For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well
as other conditions, for example when
towing a trailer. See Towing (page 249).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

FUEL QUALITY - E85
Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles
Flex fuel vehicles have one of the following
identifiers:
• Yellow fuel filler cap.
• Yellow bezel around the fuel filler inlet.
• Yellow fuel filler housing.
• Yellow E85 label on the fuel tank filler
door.

We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal
vehicle and engine performance. For
additional information, refer to
www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.

E161513

Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87 or
regular unleaded gasoline blended with a
maximum of 85% ethanol (E85).

176

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

•

Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.

Switching Between E85 and
Gasoline

Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact
an authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.

We do not recommend repeatedly
alternating between E85 and gasoline. If
you switch from using E85 to gasoline, or
from gasoline to E85, add as much fuel as
possible, at least half a tank. Drive your
vehicle immediately for a minimum of 5 mi
(8 km) to allow it to adapt to the change
in ethanol concentration. If you use E85
exclusively, we recommend that you fill
the fuel tank with regular unleaded
gasoline at each scheduled oil change.

FUEL FILLER FUNNEL
LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is in the spare wheel
storage tray.

Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuels containing more than 85%
ethanol or E100 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based
additives, including manganese-based
compounds.

RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.

177

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel
to restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition
from off to on several times after
refueling to allow the fuel system to
pump the fuel from the tank to the
engine. When restarting, cranking time
takes a few seconds longer than
normal.

WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel
in the household refuse or the public
sewage system. Use an authorized waste
disposal facility.

Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.

When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 177).

Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a
fuel pump nozzle can produce static
electricity. This can cause a fire if you are
filling an ungrounded fuel container.

Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as
they may not work with the capless fuel
system and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from
a fuel container, do the following:

Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an
ungrounded fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.

1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
E157452

WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle
of a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel
into the fuel filler neck. This may damage
the fuel system filler neck or its seal and
cause fuel to run onto the ground.

3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.

178

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.

REFUELING

Refueling System Overview

B
E206911

Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.

Right-hand side. To open the
fuel filler door, press the center
rear edge of the fuel filler door
and then release.

Left-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.

Right-hand side. Pull the rear of
the fuel filler door to open it.

C
E267248

Fuel filler door.

Fuel tank filler valve.

Fuel tank filler pipe.

Your vehicle does not have a fuel tank filler
cap.

Refueling Your Vehicle
WARNING: When refueling always
shut the engine off and never allow sparks
or open flames near the fuel tank filler
valve. Never smoke or use a cell phone
while refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely
hazardous under certain conditions. Avoid
inhaling excess fumes.

179

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling

WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the
fuel system. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in fire, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
E139202

WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off
for the first time. Failure to follow this will
fill the expansion space in the fuel tank and
could lead to fuel overflowing.

3. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the
first notch on the nozzle A. Keep the
fuel pump nozzle resting on the fuel
tank filler pipe.

WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel
tank. The pressure in an overfilled tank may
cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and
fire.
WARNING: Wait at least five
seconds before removing the fuel pump
nozzle to allow any residual fuel to drain
into the fuel tank.
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Select the correct fuel pump nozzle for
your vehicle.

E139203

4. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position
B when refueling. Holding the fuel
pump nozzle in position A can affect
the flow of fuel and shut off the fuel
pump nozzle before the fuel tank is full.

180

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling
A

3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel tank filler valve for any
debris that may be restricting its
movement.
6. Remove any debris from the fuel tank
filler valve.
7. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the
fuel filler funnel provided with your
vehicle into the fuel filler pipe. See
Fuel Filler Funnel Location (page
177). This action should dislodge any
debris that may be preventing the fuel
tank filler valve from fully closing.
8. Remove the fuel pump nozzle or fuel
filler funnel from the fuel filler pipe.
9. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: The message may not immediately
reset. If the message continues to appear
and a warning lamp illuminates, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.

E206912

5. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within
the area shown.

E119081

6. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly
remove it.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.

FUEL CONSUMPTION

Do not attempt to start the engine if you
have filled the fuel tank with incorrect fuel.
Incorrect fuel use could cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.

Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in
the advertised capacity is an empty
reserve. The empty reserve is an
unspecified amount of fuel that remains
in the fuel tank when the fuel gauge
indicates empty.

Refueling System Warning (If Equipped)
If the fuel tank filler valve does not fully
close, a message could appear in the
information display.

Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.

Message

Check Fuel Fill Inlet

Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy
figures through the trip computer average
fuel function. See General Information
(page 105).

If the message appears, do the following:
1.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).

181

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuel and Refueling
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is
the break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
•
•
•
•

•
•
•
•

Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
Fully loading your vehicle.
Carrying unnecessary weight.
Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 175).
Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.

182

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Engine Emission Control
EMISSION LAW

Tampering With a Noise Control
System

WARNING: Do not remove or alter
the original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor
of the vehicle. The floor covering and
insulation protect occupants of the vehicle
from the engine and exhaust system heat
and noise. On vehicles with no original
equipment floor covering insulation, do not
carry passengers in a manner that permits
prolonged skin contact with the metal
floor. Failure to follow these instructions
may result in fire or personal injury.

Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by
any person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to
the ultimate purchaser or while it is in
use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.

U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components.
Similar federal or provincial laws may
apply in Canada. We do not approve of any
vehicle modification without first
determining applicable laws.

The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.

Tampering with emissions
control systems including
related sensors or the Diesel
Exhaust Fluid system can result in reduced
engine power and the illumination of the
service engine soon light.

If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive
exhaust smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.

183

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Engine Emission Control
•
•

Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
Incorrect engine oil viscosity for
climactic conditions.

Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you
correct the concern, have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable
exhaust emission standards.

Noise Emissions Warranty,
Prohibited Tampering Acts and
Maintenance

To make sure that the catalytic converter
and other emission control components
continue to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 262).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.

On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb
(4,536 kg) Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The preceding statements
concerning prohibited tampering acts and
maintenance, and the noise warranty
found in the Warranty Guide, are
applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.

CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry
ground cover. The emission system heats
up the engine compartment and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire.

Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The scheduled maintenance items listed
in scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of
your vehicle and to its emissions system.

WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to
repair any part of the exhaust system until
it has cooled. Use special care when
working around the catalytic converter.
The catalytic converter heats up to a very
high temperature after only a short period
of engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.

If you use anything other than Ford,
Motorcraft or Ford-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service
of components affecting emission control,
such non-Ford parts should be equivalent
to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.

184

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Engine Emission Control
1.

Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the
fuel—the engine may misfire or run
poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 179).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.

Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged
exhaust system may allow exhaust to
enter the vehicle. Have a damaged or
improperly operating exhaust system
inspected and repaired immediately.

You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with
good quality fuel, properly closing the fuel
fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry
out. After three driving cycles without these
or any other temporary malfunctions
present, the service engine soon indicator
should stay off the next time you start the
engine. A driving cycle consists of a cold
engine startup followed by mixed city and
highway driving. No additional vehicle
service is required.

Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles
are not permitted to intentionally remove
an emission control device or prevent it
from working. Information about your
vehicle’s emission system is on the Vehicle
Emission Control Information Decal
located on or near the engine. This decal
also lists engine displacement.

If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may
not have symptoms that are apparent,
continued driving with the service engine
soon indicator on can result in increased
emissions, lower fuel economy, reduced
engine and transmission smoothness and
lead to more costly repairs.

Please consult your warranty information
for complete details.

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the
environment by making sure that your
vehicle continues to meet government
emission standards. The OBD-II system
also assists a service technician in properly
servicing your vehicle.

Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs
to inspect the emission control equipment
on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting
a vehicle registration.

When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a
malfunction. Temporary malfunctions may
cause the service engine soon indicator to
illuminate. Examples are:

If the service engine soon
indicator is on or the bulb does
not work, your vehicle may need
service. See On-Board Diagnostics.

185

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Engine Emission Control
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if
the service engine soon indicator is on or
not working properly (bulb is burned out),
or if the OBD-II system has determined
that some of the emission control systems
have not been properly checked. In this
case, the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing. To
determine if the vehicle is ready for I/M
testing, turn the ignition key to the on
position for 15 seconds without cranking
the engine. If the service engine soon
indicator blinks eight times, it means that
the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing; if
the service engine soon indicator stays on
solid, it means that your vehicle is ready
for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing,
you can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway
driving:
1.

15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least
eight hours with the ignition off. Then,
start the vehicle and complete the
above driving cycle. The vehicle must
warm up to its normal operating
temperature. Once started, do not turn
off the vehicle until the above driving
cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M
testing, you need to repeat the above
driving cycle.

186

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Transmission
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.

WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal
simultaneously. Applying both pedals
simultaneously for more than a few
seconds will limit engine performance,
which may result in difficulty maintaining
speed in traffic and could lead to serious
injury.

E142628

Park (P)
This position locks the transmission and
prevents the wheels from turning.
Reverse (R)

Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.

Understanding the Positions of
Your Automatic Transmission

With the gearshift lever in reverse (R), your
vehicle moves backward. Always come to
a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).

Putting your vehicle in gear:

Neutral (N)

1. Fully press down on the brake pedal.
2. Press and hold the button on the front
of the gearshift lever.
3. Move the gearshift lever into the
desired gear.
4. Release the button and your
transmission remains in the selected
gear.

With the gearshift lever in neutral (N), your
vehicle can be started and is free to roll.
Hold the brake pedal down when in this
position.
Drive (D)
Drive (D) is the normal driving position for
the best fuel economy. The overdrive
function allows automatic upshifts and
downshifts through gears one through six.

187

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Transmission
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission

Sport (S)
Moving the gearshift lever to sport (S):
• Provides additional grade (engine)
braking and extends lower gear
operation to enhance performance for
uphill climbs, hilly terrain or
mountainous areas. This increases
engine RPM during engine braking.
• Provides additional lower gear
operation through the automatic
transmission shift strategy.
• Gears are selected more quickly and
at higher engine speeds.

Your vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift
Automatic transmission. The SelectShift
Automatic transmission gives you the
ability to change gears up or down
(without a clutch) as desired.
In order to prevent the engine from running
at too low an RPM, which may cause it to
stall, SelectShift still automatically makes
some downshifts if it has determined that
you have not downshifted in time.
Although SelectShift makes some
downshifts for you, it still allows you to
downshift at any time as long as the
SelectShift determines that damage to
the engine from over-revving does not
occur.

Tow Mode (If Equipped)
To activate tow mode, press the
button under the headlamp
E161509
control. The indicator light
illuminates and a message displays in the
instrument cluster when the system
becomes active. Press the button again to
turn the system off.

Note: Engine damage may occur if you
maintain excessive engine revving without
shifting.
Note: Vehicles may have either steering
wheel controls or gearshift lever controls.

The Tow Mode Feature:
• Moves upshifts to higher engine speeds
to reduce the frequency of
transmission shifting.
• Provides engine braking in all forward
gears, which slows your vehicle and
assist you in controlling your vehicle
when descending a grade.
• Depending on driving conditions and
load conditions, may downshift the
transmission, slow your vehicle and
control your vehicle speed when
descending a hill, without pressing the
accelerator pedal. The amount of
downshift braking provided varies
based upon the amount the brake
pedal is pressed.

SelectShift does not automatically upshift,
even if the engine is approaching the RPM
limit. It must be shifted manually by
pressing the + button. Notice should be
taken of the shift indicator lamp, which
alerts you when to shift to make sure you
achieve the highest level or efficiency and
fuel economy.
Pull the + paddle on the steering wheel
or push the + button on the gearshift
lever to activate SelectShift.
•
•

The tow mode feature improves
transmission operation when towing a
trailer or a heavy load. All transmission
gear ranges are available when using tow
mode.
188

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.

Transmission

Upshifts When Accelerating (Recommended for Best Fuel Economy)

Shift from:
1-2

15 mph (24 km/h)

2-3

25 mph (40 km/h)

E144821

For vehicles with gearshift lever controls:
•
•

Push the toggle switch (+) to upshift.
Push the toggle switch (-) to
downshift.

3-4

40 mph (64 km/h)

4-5

45 mph (72 km/h)

5-6

50 mph (80 km/h)

Brake-Shift Interlock Override

SelectShift in drive (D):
• Provides a temporary manual mode
for performing more demanding
maneuvers where extra control of gear
selection is required (for example,
when towing or overtaking). This mode
holds a selected gear for a temporary
period of time dependent on driver
inputs (for example, steering or
accelerator pedal input).

WARNING: When doing this
procedure, you need to take the
transmission out of park (P) which means
your vehicle can roll freely. To avoid
unwanted vehicle movement, always fully
apply the parking brake prior to doing this
procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.

SelectShift in sport (S):
• Provides a permanent manual gear
selection where full control of gear
selection is required.

WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.

To exit SelectShift mode shift the
transmission into another gear (for
example, drive [D]).

WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.

The instrument cluster displays your
currently selected gear. If a gear is
requested but not available due to vehicle
conditions (low speed, too high engine
speed for requested gear selection), the
current gear flashes three times.

Use the brake shift interlock lever to move
the gearshift lever from the park position
in the event of an electrical malfunction or
if your vehicle has a dead battery.

Note: At full accelerator pedal travel, the
transmission automatically downshifts for
maximum performance.

Apply the parking brake and turn the
ignition off before performing this
procedure.

189

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Transmission
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud
or Snow
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to the transmission and
tires may occur, or the engine may overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
it may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

E267076

1. Open the media bin.
2. Remove the rubber insert.
3. Use a screwdriver to unsnap the access
cover.
4. Move the plunger forward, towards the
front of the vehicle and hold.
5. With the plunger held in the forward
position, move the gearshift lever out
of the park position.
6. Snap the access cover back in position,
place the rubber tray back in position
and close the media bin.
7. Apply the brake pedal, start the vehicle
and release the parking brake.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.

190

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
The 4WD system is always active and
requires no driver input. It is capable of
handling all road conditions, including
street and highway driving as well as
off-road and winter driving. The driver can
optimize more 4WD control by moving the
terrain management switch for the correct
terrain. See Using Terrain Control (page
202).

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
This system is a proactive system. It has
the ability to anticipate wheel slip and
transfer torque to the rear wheels before
slip occurs. Even when wheel slip is not
present, the system is continuously making
adjustments to the torque distribution, in
an attempt to improve straight line and
cornering behavior, both on and off road.

Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display when an 4WD
system fault is present See Information
Messages (page 119). An 4WD system fault
will cause the 4WD system to default to
front-wheel drive only mode. When this
warning message is displayed, have your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer

The system automatically turns on every
time you switch the ignition on.
If any component requires maintenance,
a message appears in the information
display.

USING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE

Note: A warning message will be displayed
in the information display if the 4WD system
has overheated See Information
Messages (page 119). This condition may
occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme
conditions with excessive wheel slip, such
as deep sand. To resume normal 4WD
function as soon as possible, stop the
vehicle in a safe location and stop the
engine for at least 10 minutes. After the
engine has been restarted and the 4WD
system has adequately cooled, the warning
message will turn off and normal 4WD
function will return.

WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity such as utility and
four-wheel drive vehicles handle differently
than vehicles with a lower center of gravity.
Utility and four-wheel drive vehicles are
not designed for cornering at speeds as
high as passenger cars any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to
perform satisfactorily under off-road
conditions. Avoid sharp turns, excessive
speed and abrupt maneuvers in these
vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Do not use a spare tire of a different size
other than the tire provided. If the
mini-spare tire is installed, the 4WD system
may disable automatically and enter
front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components. This condition will
be indicated by a warning in the
information display See Information
Messages (page 119). If there is a warning
message in the information display from
using the spare tire, this indicator should
turn off after reinstalling the repaired or
replaced normal road tire and cycling the
ignition off and on. It is recommended to

The intelligent 4WD system continuously
monitors vehicle conditions and
automatically adjusts the power
distribution between the front and rear
wheels. It combines transparent
all-surface operation with highly capable
four-wheel drive.

191

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire
as soon as possible. Major dissimilar tire
sizes between the front and rear axles
could cause the 4WD system to stop
functioning and default to front-wheel
drive or damage the 4WD system.

Basic operating principles in special
conditions
•

•

How Your Vehicle Differs From
Other Vehicles
Truck and utility vehicles can differ from
some other vehicles. Your vehicle may be
higher to allow it to travel over rough
terrain without getting hung up or
damaging underbody components.

Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.

If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
•

The differences that make your vehicle so
versatile also make it handle differently
than an ordinary passenger car.
Maintain steering wheel control at all
times, especially in rough terrain. Since
sudden changes in terrain can result in
abrupt steering wheel motion, make sure
you grip the steering wheel from the
outside. Do not grip the spokes.

•

Drive cautiously to avoid vehicle damage
from concealed objects such as rocks and
stumps.

•

You should either know the terrain or
examine maps of the area before driving.
Map out your route before driving in the
area. To maintain steering and braking
control of your vehicle, you must have all
four wheels on the ground and they must
be rolling, not sliding or spinning.

If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle
back onto the pavement only after
reducing your speed. Do not turn the
steering wheel too sharply while
returning to the road surface.
It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors,
with minor damage to your vehicle
rather than attempt a sudden return to
the pavement which could cause the
vehicle to slide sideways out of control
or rollover. Remember, your safety and
the safety of others should be your
primary concern.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Driving In Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

WARNING: Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure the transmission
is in P (Park). Turn the ignition to the lock
position or turn the vehicle off using the
start/stop button and remove the key
whenever you leave your vehicle.

Note: 4WD vehicles are equipped for driving
on sand, snow, mud and rough roads and
have operating characteristics that are
somewhat different from conventional
vehicles, both on and off the highway.

192

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)

WARNING: If the parking brake is
fully released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not
be working properly. See your authorized
dealer.

•

WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 35 mph (56 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.

•

Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the
transmission and tires may occur or the
engine may overheat.

Sand

If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.

When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly
and avoid spinning the wheels.

If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability
Control™, it may be beneficial to
disengage the AdvanceTrac® with Roll
Stability Control™ system while
attempting to rock the vehicle.

Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and
cause the vehicle to become stuck to the
point that assistance may be required from
another vehicle. Remember, you may be
able to back out the way you came if you
proceed with caution.

Emergency Maneuvers
•

abrupt steering, acceleration or braking
which could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover and/or personal injury. Use all
available road surface to return the
vehicle to a safe direction of travel.
In the event of an emergency stop,
avoid skidding the tires and do not
attempt any sharp steering wheel
movements.
If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (i.e., from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a
maneuver (steering, acceleration or
braking). Again, avoid these abrupt
inputs.

In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid
"over-driving" your vehicle (i.e., turn the
steering wheel only as rapidly and as
far as required to avoid the
emergency). Excessive steering will
result in less vehicle control, not more.
Additionally, smooth variations of the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
pressure should be utilized if changes
in vehicle speed are called for. Avoid

Mud and Water
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage your vehicle.
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may
be limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the hubs (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.

193

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.

Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down
a hill or steep incline, you should always
try to drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start
in a lower gear rather than downshifting to
a lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.

Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even 4WD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning your wheels. If the vehicle
does slide, steer in the direction of the slide
until you regain control of the vehicle.

If you do stall out, do not try to turn around
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause
the tires to slip, spin or lose traction,
resulting in loss of vehicle control.

After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires.
Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating
driveshafts causes an imbalance that
could damage drive components.

E143950

“Tread Lightly” is an educational program
designed to increase public awareness of
land-use regulations and responsibilities
in our nations wilderness areas. Ford Motor
Company joins the U.S. Forest Service and
the Bureau of Land Management in
encouraging you to help preserve our
national forest and other public and private
lands by “treading lightly.”

E143949

Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating.
Do not descend in neutral; instead,
disengage overdrive or manually shift to a
lower gear. When descending a steep hill,
avoid sudden hard braking as you could
lose control. The front wheels have to be
turning in order to steer the vehicle.

Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will
use. Do not drive over the crest of a hill
without seeing what conditions are on the
other side. Do not drive in reverse over a hill
without the aid of an observer.

Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump”
the brakes.

194

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Four-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Driving on Snow and Ice

Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and
tested to provide predictable performance
whether loaded or empty and durable load
carrying capability. For this reason, Ford
Motor Company strongly recommends that
you do not make modifications such as
adding or removing parts (such as lowering
kits or stabilizer bars) or by using
replacement parts not equivalent to the
original factory equipment.

WARNING: If you are driving in
slippery conditions that require tire chains
or cables, then it is critical that you drive
cautiously. Keep speeds down, allow for
longer stopping distances and avoid
aggressive steering to reduce the chances
of a loss of vehicle control which can lead
to serious injury or death. If the rear end of
the vehicle slides while cornering, steer in
the direction of the slide until you regain
control of the vehicle.

Any modifications to a vehicle that raise
the center of gravity can make it more likely
the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss
of control. Ford Motor Company
recommends that caution be used with
any vehicle equipped with a high load or
device (such as ladder or luggage racks).

Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
4WD vehicles have advantages over 2WD
vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like
any other vehicle.

Failure to maintain your vehicle properly
may void the warranty, increase your repair
cost, reduce vehicle performance and
operational capabilities and adversely
affect driver and passenger safety.
Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis
components is recommended if the vehicle
is subjected to off-highway usage.

Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and
ice. Apply the accelerator slowly and
steadily when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
4WD vehicle may accelerate better than
a two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice,
it won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for
stopping. Drive slower than usual and
consider using one of the lower gears. In
emergency stopping situations, apply the
brake steadily. Since your vehicle is
equipped with a four wheel (ABS), do not
“pump” the brakes. See Hints on Driving
With Anti-Lock Brakes (page 197).

195

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Brakes
Brake Assist

GENERAL INFORMATION

Brake assist detects when you brake
rapidly by measuring the rate at which you
press the brake pedal. It provides
maximum braking efficiency as long as you
press the pedal, and can reduce stopping
distances in critical situations.

Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.

Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 314).

If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. Your vehicle
continues to have normal braking without
the anti-lock brake system function. Have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.

Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.

It also momentarily illuminates when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp
is functional. If it does not illuminate when
you switch the ignition on, or begins to
flash at any time, have the system checked
by an authorized dealer.

See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 100).
E144522

Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.

E144522

It illuminates when you engage
the parking brake and the
ignition is on.

If it illuminates when your vehicle is
moving, make sure the parking brake is
disengaged. If the parking brake is
disengaged, this indicates low brake fluid
level or a brake system fault. Have your
vehicle immediately checked.

Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal
becomes stuck or entrapped, apply steady
and firm pressure to the brake pedal to
slow the vehicle and reduce engine power.
If you experience this condition, apply the
brakes and bring your vehicle to a safe
stop. Move the transmission to park (P),
switch the engine off and apply the parking
brake. Inspect the accelerator pedal for
any interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.

196

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Brakes
hold the service brake pedal down, then
try reapplying the parking brake. Chock the
wheels if required. If the parking brake
cannot hold the weight of the vehicle, the
parking brake may need to be serviced or
the vehicle may be overloaded.

HINTS ON DRIVING WITH
ANTI-LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.

HILL START ASSIST
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking
brake.

Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.

WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure the transmission
is locked in park (P). Failure to set the
parking brake and engage park could result
in vehicle roll-away, property damage or
bodily injury.

WARNING: The system will turn off
if a malfunction is apparent or if you rev
the engine excessively. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

To set the parking brake, press the parking
brake pedal down to its fullest extent. The
brake warning lamp in the instrument
cluster will illuminate and remains
illuminated until the parking brake is
released.

The system makes it easier to pull away
when your vehicle is on a slope without the
need to use the parking brake.
When the system is active, your vehicle
remains stationary on the slope for two to
three seconds after you release the brake
pedal. This allows time to move your foot
from the brake to the accelerator pedal.
The system releases the brakes
automatically once the engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the slope. This
is an advantage when pulling away on a
slope, for example from a car park ramp,
traffic lights or when reversing uphill into
a parking space.

To release the parking brake, press the
parking brake pedal down again.
If you are parking your vehicle on a grade
or with a trailer, press and hold the brake
pedal down, then set the parking brake.
There may be a little vehicle movement as
the parking brake sets to hold the vehicle's
weight. This is normal and should be no
reason for concern. If needed, press and

197

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Brakes
The system activates on any slope that
causes your vehicle to roll.
Note: There is no warning light to indicate
the system is either on or off.

Using Hill Start Assist
1.

Press the brake pedal to bring your
vehicle to a complete standstill.Keep
the brake pedal pressed and shift into
first gear when facing uphill or reverse
(R) when facing downhill.
2. If the sensors detect that your vehicle
is on a slope, the system activates
automatically.
3. When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal, your vehicle remains on
the slope without rolling away for
about two to three seconds. This hold
time automatically extends if you are
in the process of driving off.
4. Drive off in the normal manner. The
system releases the brakes
automatically.
Note: When you remove your foot from the
brake pedal and press the pedal again when
the system is active, you will experience
significantly reduced brake pedal travel. This
is normal.

Switching the System On and Off
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. The system
remembers the last setting when you start
your vehicle.
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
You cannot turn the system on or off.
When you switch the ignition on, the
system automatically turns on.

198

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Traction Control
Using the Information Display
Controls

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid
drive wheel spin and loss of traction.

You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General
Information (page 105).

If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels
and, when needed, reduces engine power
at the same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.

Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off
or on.

USING TRACTION CONTROL

System Indicator Lights and
Messages

Using a Switch (If Equipped)

The stability and traction control
light:
WARNING: The stability and traction
control light illuminates steadily if the
system detects a failure. Make sure you
did not manually disable the traction
control system using the information
display controls or the switch. If the
stability control and traction control light
is still illuminating steadily, have the
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with
the traction control disabled could lead to
an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

E138639

•
•
•

Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.

The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates
E130458
on engine start-up and stays on
when you switch the traction control
system off.

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.

Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information
display showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either
using the information display controls or
the switch.

199

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Stability Control
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control
system you may experience the following
conditions:

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability
control system. In addition, installing any
stereo loudspeakers may interfere with
and adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket
stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from
the front center console, the tunnel, and
the front seats in order to minimize the risk
of interfering with the electronic stability
control sensors. Reducing the
effectiveness of the electronic stability
control system could lead to an increased
risk of loss of vehicle control, vehicle
rollover, personal injury and death.

•
•
•
•
•
•

The stability and traction control light
flashes.
Your vehicle slows down.
Reduced engine power.
A vibration in the brake pedal.
The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
If the driving condition is severe and
your foot is not on the brake, the brake
pedal may move as the systems
applies higher brake forces.

The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by
applying brakes to one or more of the
wheels individually and, if necessary,
reducing engine power.

WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’s always possible to lose
control of a vehicle due to inappropriate
driver input for the conditions. Aggressive
driving on any road condition can cause
you to lose control of your vehicle
increasing the risk of personal injury or
property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires
have exceeded their ability to grip the road;
this could reduce the operator’s ability to
control the vehicle potentially resulting in
a loss of vehicle control, vehicle rollover,
personal injury and death. If your electronic
stability control system activates, SLOW
DOWN.

Roll Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent rollovers by detecting your
vehicle’s roll motion and the rate at which
it changes by applying the brakes to one
or more wheels individually.
Curve Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to follow the road when cornering severely
or avoiding objects in the roadway. Curve
Control operates by reducing engine power
and, if necessary, applying brakes to one
or more of the wheels individually.

The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.

200

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Stability Control
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 199).

B
B
A
A

E72903

Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.

Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.

USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each
time you switch the ignition on.
You cannot switch the stability control and
roll stability control systems off, but when
you shift into reverse (R), the systems
deactivate.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on. See Using Traction Control
(page 199).

201

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Terrain Control (If Equipped)
USING TERRAIN CONTROL

The terrain management system optimizes
drivability and comfort as well as
maximizing traction while operating on
different types of terrain.

Mud/Ruts mode should be
selected for muddy, rutted, soft
or uneven terrain.

Normal mode is for on-road
conditions and should be
selected before driving on
surfaces which are similar to a
hard road surface or once the
need for a special mode has
passed. Select Normal mode
when towing a trailer.

Turn the control located on the center
console to choose between the following
modes:

Note: The Sand and Mud/Ruts modes are
for off-road use only.

Note: The curve control portion of the
AdvanceTrac® system is unavailable when
you select Sand or Mud/Ruts.

If the system becomes inoperable,
selecting some modes may not be possible
and a message displays. If it becomes
inoperable due to a system malfunction,
all of the mode indicators on the control
turn off and one of the following messages
appears in the information display:

4
E193313

TERRAIN MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
FAULT: Turning the engine on and off may
clear the fault. If that does not work, have
the system serviced by an authorized
dealer.

Grass/Gravel/Snow mode
should be selected where a firm
surface is covered with loose or
slippery material such as packed
snow, ice, water, grass, or a thin
layer of gravel or sand. For deep
gravel or sand, select Sand
mode. If the vehicle cannot gain
traction in deep snow, switching
off the traction control system
may help (switch traction
control back on when you regain
traction). See Using Traction
Control (page 199).

MODE CHANGE NOT ACCEPTED,
RETRY: A mode change cannot be made
at the time of driver request. Try the mode
change again.

Sand mode should be selected
in soft dry sand or deep gravel. If
crossing wet sand that may be
sufficiently deep enough for the
wheels to sink into the surface,
select Mud/Ruts mode.

202

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Terrain Control (If Equipped)
Using hill descent control

USING HILL DESCENT
CONTROL

Press and release the hill
descent button located in the
center of the terrain
management control. A light in the control
illuminates and a chime sounds when this
feature activates.

Principle of operation
WARNING: Hill descent control
cannot control descent in all surface
conditions and circumstances, such as ice
or extremely steep grades. Hill descent
control is a driver assist system and cannot
substitute for good judgment by the driver.
Failure to do so may result in loss of vehicle
control, crash or serious injury.

To increase descent speed, press the
accelerator pedal until you reach the
desired speed. To decrease descent speed,
press the brake pedal until you reach the
desired speed.
Whether accelerating or decelerating, once
you reach the desired descent speed,
remove your feet from the pedals and hill
descent control maintains the chosen
vehicle speed.

WARNING: Hill descent control does
not provide hill hold at zero miles per hour
(0 kilometers per hour). When stopped,
the parking brake must be applied or the
vehicle must be placed in P (Park) or it
may roll away.

Note: You may observe noise from the ABS
pump motor during hill descent control
operation. This is a normal characteristic of
the ABS and should be no reason for
concern.

Hill descent control allows the driver to set
and maintain vehicle speed while
descending steep grades in various surface
conditions.

Hill descent modes

Hill descent control can maintain vehicle
speeds on downhill grades between 3 mph
(5 km/h) and 20 mph (32 km/h). Above
20 mph (32 km/h), the system remains
armed, but descent speed cannot be set
or maintained.
Hill descent control requires a cooling
down interval after a period of sustained
use. The amount of time that the feature
can remain active before cooling varies
with conditions. The system provides a
warning in the message center and a chime
sounds when the system is about to
disengage for cooling. At this time,
manually apply the brakes as needed to
maintain descent speed.

•

At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When you press the Hill Descent
Control and Hill Descent Control
activates, HILL DESCENT CONTROL
ACTIVE appears in the message
center for several seconds.

•

At speeds below 20 mph (32 km/h):
When you press the Hill Descent
Control switch and conditions are not
correct for hill descent activation, the
Hill Descent Control system enables,
the light on the button is solid and HILL
DESCENT CONTROL READY
displays in the message center for
several seconds.

203

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Terrain Control (If Equipped)
•

•

At speeds above 20 mph (32 km/h):
When you press the Hill Descent
Control switch, the Hill Descent Control
system enables, the light on the button
illuminates and FOR HILL CNTRL, 20
MPH OR LESS displays in the
message center for several seconds.
For Hill Descent Control to enable, the
vehicle must be in a drive gear or (R)
Reverse. If the vehicle is in P (Park) or
N (Neutral) and you press the button,
FOR HILL CNTRL, SELECT GEAR
displays in the message center for
several seconds.

Refer to the Information Displays for
additional Hill Descent Control messages.
See Information Messages (page 119).

204

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device
to prevent false alerts.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not
detect objects with surfaces that absorb
reflection. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result
in a crash.

Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
connected to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.

WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.

The system can be switched off through
the information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 105).

WARNING: The system may not
detect small or moving objects, particularly
those close to the ground.

If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information
display. See Information Messages
(page 119).

Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 59).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects.

REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
rate of the audible warning increases.
When the obstacle is less than 12 in
(30 cm) away, the warning sounds
continuously. If the system detects a
stationary or receding object farther than
12 in (30 cm) from the corners of the
bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an
object approaching, the warning sounds
again.

Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to
the bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned
or bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.

205

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.

E130178

Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from
the rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.

FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.

The system detects certain objects while
the transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a
moving object is approaching the rear
of your vehicle at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of less than 3 mph
(5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away
from the bumper.

E187330

Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object,
a warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning
tone repeat rate increases. The warning
tone sounds continuously when an object
is 12 in (30 cm) or less from the front
bumper.

206

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the
pop-up message that appears once you
shift the transmission into reverse (R). See
General Information (page 105). If your
vehicle has a parking aid button, you can
switch the system off by pressing the
button.

If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only
when your vehicle is moving at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or below and an obstacle is
located inside the detection area. Once
your vehicle is stationary, the visual
indication will stop after 4 seconds.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

SIDE SENSING SYSTEM (If

Equipped)

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.

The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles within the vehicle's driving path,
located near the sides of your vehicle. The
side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).

The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks
illuminate and move towards the
vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed
out.

Note: Obstacles that enter the side
detection area without being detected and
mapped by the front or rear side sensors will
not be detected.

If the transmission is in reverse (R), the
front sensing system provides audio
warnings when your vehicle is moving and
the detected obstacle is moving towards
your vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary,
the audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds. Visual indication is always
present in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any
other forward gear (for example, low (L),
sport (S) or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in
(30 cm), the visual indication remains on.

E187810

Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close
to the side of your vehicle, an audible
warning sounds. As your vehicle moves
closer to obstacles within the driving path
of your vehicle, the rate of the audible
warning increases.

207

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If

obstacles are detected within 24 in
(60 cm) and are inside the driving path of
your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches a
standstill condition, the audible warning
stops after two seconds and visual
indication stops after four seconds.

Equipped)

If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system provides visual distance
indication only when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and
there is a front or rear parking aid obstacle
detected, and the side obstacle is within
24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the visual
distance indication stops after four
seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks do not
appear.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control
system off.

E190459

The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.

The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven
approximately the length of your vehicle
in order for the system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is
activated.
• The traction control system is
activated.
• When the steering wheel angle
information is not available, the side
sensing system is not available. The
vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft
(150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to
recover the steering wheel angle
information.

As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and obstacles
are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are
inside the driving path of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the audible
warning stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains
on when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport
(S) or any forward gear in manual
transmission, the side sensing system
provides audible and visual distance
warnings when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and

208

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.

ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)

Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.

Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The sensors may falsely detect objects due
to ultrasonic interference caused by, for
example motorcycle exhausts, truck air
brakes or horns.

WARNING: The sensors may not
detect objects in heavy rain or other
conditions that cause interference.

Note: If you change any tires, the system
must recalibrate and may not correctly
operate for a short time.
The system may not correctly operate in
any of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire that is
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are incorrectly
inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow, fog,
high humidity and high temperatures.

WARNING: Active park assist does
not apply the brakes under any
circumstances.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
Active park assist is a multi-step process
and may require you to shift the
transmission multiple times. Follow the
onscreen instructions until the parking
maneuver is complete.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose
to override the system by grabbing the
steering wheel, or by taking full control of
your vehicle after pressing the active park
assist button.

Do not use the system if:
• You have attached an add-on
accessory close to the sensors on the
front or rear of your vehicle. For
example, a bike rack or trailer.
• You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.

Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any
loose items clear of the steering wheel
when using active park assist.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.

209

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
•
•

Parallel Parking

The front bumper, rear bumper or the
side sensors are damaged.
The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.

The system detects available parallel
parking spaces and steers your vehicle into
the space. You control the accelerator,
gearshift and brakes. The system visually
and audibly guides you into a parallel
parking space.

Using Active Park Assist
Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode

Press the button once to search
for a parking space.

Press the button once to
activate parallel parking. Press
E146186
the button a second time to
activate perpendicular parking. If you press
the button again the system switches off.

E146186

Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
active park assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.

If your vehicle is parked and after you
switch the ignition on, you can use the
information display to toggle through the
modes. Press the button to switch the
system on and open the system menu in
the information display.

When the vehicle speed is less than
22 mph (35 km/h), the system scans both
sides of your vehicle for an available
parking space. A message and a graphic
appear in the information display to
indicate the system is searching for a
parking space. Use the direction indicator
to be offered parking spaces on either the
left-hand side or right-hand side of your
vehicle.

Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default
mode is parallel park out assist. However if
you did not use active park assist to parallel
park your vehicle, use the information
display to select park out assist.
Note: You can only repeatedly press the
active park assist button to toggle through
the modes after moving your vehicle
approximately 33 ft (10 m).

Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.

To toggle through the modes, use the
buttons on the information display to
select the following:
• Parallel parking.
• Perpendicular parking.
• Parallel park out assist.
• Switch the system off.

Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.

Note: There is no time limit for toggling
through the modes.

E130107

Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and parallel to the other parked vehicles
when searching for a parking space.

210

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away
from other parked vehicles, the system may
not be able to detect an available parking
space.

E130108

When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready
to park.

When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and an
information message appears.

Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.

Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.

Note: The system always offers the last
parking space it detects. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.

Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system
by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
an active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system
off.

Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the
system shows a message to instruct you to
reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Parallel
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle
steers itself into the space. The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.

Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates
or fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates
or fails.

Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.

If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.

211

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds.
Stop your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready
to park.

Perpendicular Parking
The system detects available
perpendicular parking spaces and steers
your vehicle into the space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you into
a perpendicular parking space.

Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.

Press the button twice to search
for a parking space.
E146186

Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.

When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system
is searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator to be offered parking
spaces on either the left-hand side or
right-hand side of your vehicle.

Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the
system shows a message to instruct you to
reduce the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a
Perpendicular Parking Space

Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.

When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle
steers itself into the space. The system
displays instructions to move your vehicle
backward and forward in the space.

Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.

Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.

E186193

Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and parallel to the other parked vehicles
when searching for a parking space.

Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away
from other parked vehicles, the system may
not be able to detect an available parking
space.

212

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates
or fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates
or fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Parallel Park Out Assist
E186191

When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.

The system steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The
system visually and audibly guides you out
of a parallel parking space.

When the active park assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and a message
appears.

Note: This system is not intended to assist
when exiting a perpendicular parking space.

Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.

E146186

Press the button once when your
vehicle is stationary in a parallel
parking space.

Note: If you did not use active park assist
to parallel park your vehicle, pressing the
button once selects parallel park. You must
use the information display to select park
out assist.

Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system
by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during
an active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system
off.

The system displays a message instructing
you to switch a direction indicator on. Use
the direction indicator to select which side
of your vehicle you want to exit the parking
space. The system displays instructions to
move your vehicle backward and forward
in the space.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct
you to stop your vehicle. The system may
not provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.

213

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be
available when the clearance to the front
or the rear of your vehicle is too small.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you
interrupt the maneuver, or the system
switches off, you must take full control of
your vehicle.

E188012

After the system directs your vehicle to a
position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle. Generally hand-over is
when your vehicle is still inside the parking
space.

Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.

Troubleshooting
Symptom

Possible Cause

The system does not search for You may have switched the traction control off.
a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must
be moving forward to be able to detect a parking space.
The system does not offer a
parking space.

The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice
or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors can affect how the
system functions.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your
vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on
the opposite side of the parking space.
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than
2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h)
for parallel parking or greater than 19 mph (30 km/h)
for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After
you reconnect the battery you must drive your vehicle
on a straight road for a short period of time.

The system does not correctly Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the
position your vehicle in a
current transmission position. For example, rolling
parking space.
forward when in reverse (R).
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the
system from correctly aligning your vehicle.

214

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Symptom

Possible Cause

Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be
correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained.
For example, not inflated correctly, improper size, or of
different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example,
a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects
changes after your vehicle passes the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes.
For example, driving from a heated garage into the cold,
or after leaving a car wash.

REAR VIEW CAMERA

WARNING: Use caution when the
rear cargo door is ajar. If the rear cargo door
is ajar, the camera will be out of position
and the video image may be incorrect. All
guidelines disappear when the rear cargo
door is ajar. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.

WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.

WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.

WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.

Note: Some vehicles may not come
equipped with guidelines.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your
vehicle.

WARNING: Reverse your vehicle
slowly. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.

During operation, lines appear in the
display which represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your
vehicle.

215

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing. This might not provide
adequate coverage as it usually provides in
normal operation and some objects might
not be seen. In some vehicles, the guidelines
may disappear when you connect the trailer
tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly
under the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if one or both
reverse lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a
soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner. You can also use the rear
washer to clean the camera. See Rear
Window Wiper and Washers (page
82).
• The rear of your vehicle is hit or
damaged, causing the camera to
become misaligned.

E253742

The camera is located on the luggage
compartment door.

Using the Rear View Camera
System
The rear view camera system displays
what is behind your vehicle when you place
the transmission in reverse (R).
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.

Camera System Settings
The rear view camera system settings can
be accessed through the display screen.
See General Information (page 105).

The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines (if equipped): Show
the intended path of your vehicle when
reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another
object behind you.
• Centerline: Helps align the center of
your vehicle with an object (for
example, a trailer).

Camera Guidelines
Note: Active guidelines are only available
when the transmission is in reverse (R).

Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R)
and the luggage compartment door or
liftgate is open, no rear view camera
features will display.

216

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids

B C

The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on the steering wheel
position. The active guidelines do not
display when the steering wheel position
is straight.

Always use caution while reversing.
Objects in the red zone are closest to your
vehicle and objects in the green zone are
farther away. Objects are getting closer to
your vehicle as they move from the green
zone to the yellow or red zones. Use the
side view mirrors and rear view mirror to
get better coverage on both sides and rear
of the vehicle.

Obstacle Distance Indicator (If
Equipped)

F
E142436

Active guidelines (If equipped)

Centerline

Fixed guideline: Green zone

Fixed guideline: Yellow zone

Fixed guideline: Red zone

Rear bumper

Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn
the steering wheel to point the guidelines
toward an intended path. If you change
the steering wheel position while reversing,
your vehicle might deviate from the original
intended path.

E190459

The system will provide an image of your
vehicle and the sensor zones. The zones
will highlight green, yellow and red when
the parking aid sensors detect an object in
the coverage area.

217

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Manual Zoom

180 DEGREE CAMERA

WARNING: When manual zoom is
on, the full area behind your vehicle may
not show. Be aware of your surroundings
when using the manual zoom feature.

WARNING: The front camera system
still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with looking out of your
vehicle.

Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).

WARNING: Objects that are close
to either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.

Note: When you enable manual zoom, only
the centerline is shown.
Selectable settings for this feature are
Zoom in (+) and Zoom out (-). Press the
symbol in the camera screen to change the
view. The default setting is Zoom OFF.

WARNING: Use caution when
turning camera features on or off when the
transmission is not in park (P). Make sure
your vehicle is not moving.

This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only
active while the transmission is in reverse
(R).

Rear Camera Delay
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
The default setting for the rear camera
delay is OFF.
When shifting the transmission out of
reverse (R) and into any gear other than
park (P), the camera image remains in the
display until:
• Your vehicle speed reaches
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).
• You shift your vehicle into park (P).

E253795

The front view camera is located in the
grille. The camera provides a video image
of the area in front of your vehicle.
Note: The area displayed on the screen may
vary according to your vehicle's orientation
or road condition.
Note: The front view camera switches off
if your vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph
(10 km/h). You have to switch the system
back on by using the camera system button
once below the speed threshold.

218

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Parking Aids
Using the System
The 180 degree camera system consists
of front and rear cameras. The system:
• Allows you to see what is directly in
front or behind your vehicle.
• Provides cross traffic view in front and
behind your vehicle.
• Provides visibility during parking
maneuvers.
The camera system button is
located on the center stack and
E188847
allows you to toggle through
different camera views.
Note: The camera system may not operate
correctly if mud, water or debris obstructs
the camera's view. You can clean the lens
with a soft, lint-free cloth and non-abrasive
cleaner or by using your front or rear washer.
See Wipers and Washers (page 81).

Camera Views
Press the camera button to toggle
between different views.
• Normal Rear View: Provides an image
of what is directly behind your vehicle
when your vehicle is in reverse (R).
• Expanded Rear View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
is directly behind your vehicle when
your vehicle is in reverse (R).
• Normal Front View: Provides an
image of what is directly in front your
vehicle when your vehicle is in neutral
(N) or drive (D).
• Expanded Front View: Provides an
expanded 180 degree image of what
is directly in front your vehicle when
your vehicle is in neutral (N) or drive
(D).

219

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Cruise Control
Switching Cruise Control On

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Press ON.

Cruise control lets you maintain a set
speed without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. You can use cruise
control when your vehicle speed is greater
than 20 mph (30 km/h).

The indicator appears in the
information display.
E71340

Setting the Cruise Speed
1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.

USING CRUISE CONTROL (If
Equipped)

WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could
result in loss of vehicle control, serious
injury or death.

Changing the Set Speed
Note: If you accelerate by pressing the
accelerator pedal, the set speed will not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed that
you previously set.

WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could increase
above the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.

•
•

Note: Cruise control disengages if the
vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph
(16 km/h) below the set speed when driving
uphill.

•

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET-. Release
the control when you reach the desired
speed.

Canceling the Set Speed
Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press RES.

Switching Cruise Control Off
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.

E200995

The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel.

Press OFF when the system is in stand by
mode, or switch the ignition off.

220

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Cruise Control
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)

WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.

WARNING: Always pay close
attention to changing road conditions
when using adaptive cruise control. The
system does not replace attentive driving.
Failing to pay attention to the road may
result in a crash, serious injury or death.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
is not a crash warning or avoidance system.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane.
You can select four gap settings.

WARNING: Do not use the adaptive
cruise control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections or
roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or
roads that are winding, slippery, unpaved,
or steep slopes.

The system uses a radar sensor that
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.

WARNING: Do not use the system
in poor visibility, for example fog, heavy
rain, spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer with aftermarket
trailer brake controls. Aftermarket trailer
brakes will not function properly when you
switch the system on because the brakes
are electronically controlled. Failing to do
so may result in loss of vehicle control,
which could result in serious injury.
E200996

WARNING: Do not use tire sizes
other than those recommended because
this can affect the normal operation of the
system. Failure to do so may result in a loss
of vehicle control, which could result in
serious injury.

The adaptive cruise controls are on the
steering wheel.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On
Press ON.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
may not detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).

E144529

WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect pedestrians or objects in
the road.

221

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

The indicator, current gap setting
and set speed appear in the
information display.

Cruise Control
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a
vehicle, your vehicle does not decelerate
automatically to a stop, nor does your
vehicle always decelerate quickly enough
to avoid a crash without driver intervention.
Always apply the brakes when necessary.
Failing to do so may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.

E164805

Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Note: When adaptive cruise control is
active, the speedometer may vary slightly
from the set speed displayed in the
information display.

WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
only warns of vehicles detected by the
radar sensor. In some cases there may be
no warning or a delayed warning. You
should always apply the brakes when
necessary. Failure to do so may result in a
crash, serious injury or death.

1. Drive to desired speed.
2. Press SET+ or SET-.
3. A green indicator light, the current gap
setting and your set speed appear in
the information display.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal.

Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small
temporary acceleration to help you pass.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in
the same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts
to maintain a preset gap distance. A
vehicle graphic illuminates in the
instrument cluster.

E164805

Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap
from the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates
to a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out
of the lane you are in.
• Your vehicle speed falls below 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• You set a new gap distance.

5. A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is
a vehicle detected in front of you.

222

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Cruise Control
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance
from the vehicle in front. The system only
applies limited braking. You can override
the system by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level will not be sufficient, an
audible warning sounds when the system
continues to brake. A red warning bar
displays on the windshield and you must
take immediate action.

E164805

The selected gap appears in the
information display as shown by the bars
in the image.

Setting the Gap Distance

Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings

Note: The gap setting is time dependent
and therefore the distance automatically
adjusts with your vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.

Graphic display,
bars indicated
between vehicles

Dynamic behavior

Sport.

Normal.

You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in
front by pressing the gap control.

Normal.

Comfort.

Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.

Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the
system by pressing the accelerator pedal,
it does not automatically apply the brakes
to maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.

E201206

Gap decrease.

Gap increase.

When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
When you override the system,
the green indicator light
illuminates and the vehicle
graphic does not appear in the information
display.
E144529

223

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Cruise Control
Hilly Condition Usage

The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a
lower speed if following a slower vehicle.

Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for
an extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again when the brakes have
cooled.

Changing the Set Speed
•
•

•

Press SET+ or SET- to change the set
speed in small increments.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal
until you reach the desired speed. Press
SET+ or SET-.
Press and hold SET+ or SET- to
change the set speed in large
increments. Release the control when
you reach the desired speed.

Select a lower gear during prolonged
downhill driving on steep slopes, such as
mountainous areas, when the system is
active. In such situations, the system needs
additional engine braking to reduce the
load on the vehicle’s regular brake system
to prevent the brakes from overheating.

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off

The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Note: You erase the set speed and gap
setting when you switch the system off.
Press OFF when the system is in standby
mode, or switch the ignition off.

Canceling the Set Speed

Detection Issues

Press CAN or tap the brake pedal. The set
speed does not erase.

Resuming the Set Speed

WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges,
tunnels and safety barriers. In these cases,
the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required.

Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Press RES. Your vehicle speed returns to
the previously set speed and gap setting.
The set speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.

Automatic Cancellation

WARNING: If the system
malfunctions, have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.

Note: If the engine speed drops too low, an
audible warning sounds and a message
appears in the information display.
Automatic braking releases.

The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect
a vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does
not illuminate if the system does not
detect a vehicle in front of you.

The system does not operate below
12 mph (20 km/h).

224

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Cruise Control
In these cases, the system may brake late
or unexpectedly. You should stay alert and
take action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the
radar-sensing zone may change. This could
cause missed or false vehicle detection.

System Not Available
The system may not turn on if there is:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.

Blocked Sensor

E71621

Detection issues can occur:

E145632

When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.

Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is
behind a fascia panel.

With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.

There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front
when driving into and coming out
of a bend or curve in the road.

A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does
not function when something blocks the
sensor.

225

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Cruise Control

Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
Cause

Action

The surface of the radar is dirty or
obstructed.

Clean the grille surface in front of the radar
or remove the object causing the obstruction.

The surface of the radar is clean but the
message remains in the display.

Wait a short time. It may take several
minutes for the radar to detect that it is free
from obstruction.

Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the
radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

Water, snow or ice on the surface of the
road may interfere with the radar signals.

Do not use the system in these conditions
because it may not detect any vehicles
ahead.

You are in a desert or remote area with no
other vehicles and no roadside objects.

Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise
control.

Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no
actual block. This happens, for example, when driving in sparse rural or desert
environments. A false blocked condition either self clears, or clears after you restart your
vehicle.
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
E71340
control indicator light if you
select normal cruise control. The gap
setting does not display, and the system
does not automatically respond to lead
vehicles. Automatic braking remains active
to maintain set speed.

Switching to Normal Cruise
Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control
will not brake when your vehicle is
approaching slower vehicles. Always be
aware of which mode you have selected
and apply the brakes when necessary.
You can manually change from adaptive
cruise control to normal cruise control
through the information display.

226

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.

PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects and snow or ice.

WARNING: The system is designed
to aid the driver. It is not intended to
replace your attention and judgment. You
are still responsible to drive with due care
and attention.

Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.

WARNING: At all times, you are
responsible for controlling your vehicle,
supervising the system and intervening, if
required. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.

Note: The system will store the on or off
setting in the information display menu
through ignition cycles.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph
(64 km/h). When below the activation
speed, the information display informs the
driver that the system is unavailable.

WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks
if you feel tired. Do not wait for the system
to warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles
may result in the system warning you even
if you are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.

E249505

The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.

WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.

If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system will alert you using
a chime and a message in the cluster
display.

WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.

227

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
USING DRIVER ALERT

LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If

Switching the System On and Off

Equipped)

Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 105).

WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to
drive with due care and attention. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

When activated, the system will monitor
your alertness level based upon your
driving behavior in relation to the lane
markings, and other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system will not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).

WARNING: Always drive with due
care and attention when using and
operating the controls and features on your
vehicle.

The warning system has two stages. At
first, the system issues a temporary
warning that you need to take a rest. This
message will only appear for a short time.
If the system detects further reduction in
driving alertness, it may issue another
warning that will remain in the information
display for a longer time. You can press OK
on the steering wheel control to clear the
warning.

WARNING: In cold and severe
weather conditions the system may not
function. Rain, snow and spray can all limit
sensor performance.
WARNING: The system will not
operate if the sensor cannot track the road
lane markings.

Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
•
•

WARNING: The sensor may
incorrectly track lane markings as other
structures or objects. This can result in a
false or missed warning.

Switching the ignition off and on.
Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.

WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted
with a suspension kit not approved by us.

228

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When you select aid or alert and aid
mode and the system detects no steering
activity for a short period, the system alerts
you to put your hands on the steering wheel.
The system may detect a light grip or touch
on the steering wheel as hands off driving.

E132099

Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.

Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.

System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last
known selection for each of these settings.
You do not need to readjust your settings
each time you switch the system on.
Mode: This setting allows you to select
which of the system features you can
enable.

E249505

When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your
lane is likely to occur, the system notifies
or assists you to stay in your lane through
the steering system and information
display. Depending on the feature
operation mode you select, the system
provides a warning by vibrating the steering
wheel or a steering assistance by gently
counter steering your vehicle back into the
lane.

E165515

Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.

Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey,
it defaults to on and the mode sets to alert.

229

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
•
•
•

Low.
Normal.
High.

System Display

E165516

Aid only – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
E151660

If you switch the system on in alert mode,
an overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings appears in the information
display.
If you switch the system on in aid or alert
and aid mode, a separate white icon also
appears, or in some vehicles, arrows
appear with the lane markings.
When you switch off the system, the lane
marking graphics do not display.

E165517

Alert

Aid

While the system is on, the color of the
lane markings change to indicate the
system status.

Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.

Gray: Indicates that the system is
temporarily unable to provide a warning
or intervention on the indicated side. This
may be because:

If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the
vehicle, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.

•

Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.

•
•

Intensity: This setting affects the intensity
of the steering wheel vibration used for the
alert and alert + aid modes. This setting
does not affect the aid mode.
230

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
The direction indicator is active.
Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.

Driving Aids
•
•

The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field-of-view.
The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or
fog, following a large vehicle that is
blocking or shadowing the lane or poor
headlamp illumination.

Yellow: Indicates that the system is
providing or has just provided a lane
keeping aid intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
•
•
•
•
•

See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is
available or ready to provide a warning or
intervention on the indicated side.

Quick braking.
Fast acceleration.
Using the turn signal indicator.
Evasive steering maneuver.
Driving too close to the lane marking.

Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?

Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.

231

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings
on the road?

Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.

Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the
Aid or Aid + Alert mode?

High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.

BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)

WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy
rain and spray. Always drive with due care
and attention. Failure to take care may
result in a crash.

WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system
is not a replacement for careful driving.

E255695

232

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone.
The detection area is on both sides of your
vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft
(4 m) beyond the rear bumper. The
detection area extends to approximately
59 ft (18 m) beyond the rear bumper when
the vehicle speed is greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h) to alert you of faster
approaching vehicles.

System Lights and Messages

Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.

E142442

When the system detects a vehicle, an
alert indicator illuminates in the exterior
mirror on the side the approaching vehicle
is coming from. If you turn the direction
indicator on for that side of your vehicle,
the alert indicator flashes.

Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).

Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors

Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the
following occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
6 mph (10 km/h).

The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.

Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).

Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.

E205199

Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.

233

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
If the sensors become blocked, a message
may appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 119). The
alert indicators remain illuminated but the
system does not alert you.

CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If
Equipped)

Switching the System On and Off

WARNING: Do not use the cross
traffic alert system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before reversing
out of a parking space. The cross traffic
alert system is not a replacement for
careful driving.

You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 105). When you switch
the system off, a warning lamp illuminates
and a message displays. When you switch
the system on or off, the alert indicators
flash twice.

System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning
lamp illuminates and a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 119).

Note: The system remembers the last
setting when you start your vehicle.

The system is designed to alert you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
you shift into reverse (R).

Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved
by us, the system turns off when you attach
a trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.

Using the Cross Traffic Alert
System
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that approach with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.

To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.

The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of
reverse (R).

234

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids

E142440

The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.

E142441

235

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
Zone coverage also decreases when
parking at narrow angles. The sensor on
the left-hand side is mostly obstructed and
zone coverage on that side is severely
reduced.

Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.

System Lights, Messages and
Audible Alerts

If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when
you shift into reverse (R). See
Information Messages (page 119).

System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate
when any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects
are obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds greater
than 37 mph (60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.

E142442

When the system detects a vehicle, an
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror
on the side the approaching vehicle is
coming from. A tone sounds and a
message appears in the information
display.

System Errors

Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing in the distance.

If the system detects a fault a message
displays. See Information Messages
(page 119).

Blocked Sensors

Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off
using the information display. See
Information Messages (page 119). When
you switch system off, a message displays.
See Information Messages (page 119).
Note: The system turns on each time you
switch the ignition on and you shift into
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the
system off, it turns on the next time you
switch the ignition on.

E205199

The sensors are behind the rear bumper
on both sides of your vehicle.

236

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to
the steering system. You do not lose the
ability to steer your vehicle manually.
Typical steering and driving maneuvers
allow the system to cool and return to
normal operation.

Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension
components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.

STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power
steering system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault
is detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the
ignition off. After at least 10 seconds,
switch the ignition on and watch the
information display for a steering system
warning message. If a steering system
warning message returns, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.

Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with
the brake system to help operate
advanced stability control and accident
avoidance systems. Additionally, whenever
the battery is disconnected or a new
battery installed, you must drive your
vehicle a short distance before the system
relearns the strategy and reactivates all
systems.

WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Obtain immediate service from an
authorized dealer, failure to do so may
result in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.

237

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If

pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians,
or pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of
your vehicle, serious personal injury or
death.

Equipped)

WARNING: The pre-collision assist
system's brake support reduces collision
speed only if you brake your vehicle before
any collision. You must press your brake
pedal as you would in any typical braking
situation.

WARNING: The system does not
detect vehicles that are driving in a
different direction, pedestrians at night,
cyclists or animals. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

WARNING: The system cannot help
prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and
speed.
Note: The system does not detect, warn or
respond to potential collisions with vehicles
to the rear or sides of your vehicle.

WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or
steering. Failure to take care may lead to
a crash or personal injury.

Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System

WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during cold
and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice,
rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the
system. Keep the front camera and radar
free of snow and ice. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.

The system is active at speeds above
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h).

E156130

The system alerts you of certain collision
risks. The system's sensor detects your
vehicle's rapid approach to other vehicles
traveling in the same direction as your
vehicle.

WARNING: In situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running

238

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends
using the highest sensitivity setting where
possible. Setting lower sensitivity would
lead to fewer and later system warnings.
Blocked Sensors
E156131

When your vehicle rapidly approaches
another vehicle, a flashing visual warning
appears and an audible warning tone
sounds.
The brake support system assists you in
reducing any collision speed by
pre-charging the brakes. If the risk of
collision continues to increase after the
audio-visual warning, the brake support
prepares the brake system for rapid
braking. Brake support does not
automatically apply the brakes. If you press
the brake pedal, the system could apply
additional braking up to maximum braking
force, even if you lightly press the brake
pedal.

E145632

If a blocked sensor message appears in the
information display, dirt, water or an object
is blocking the sensor. The sensor is
located behind a cover near the driver side
of the lower grille. If anything blocks the
sensor, your vehicle cannot see through
the sensor, and the system does not work.
Possible causes for the blocked sensor
message and corrective actions are listed
below.

You can adjust the warning system's
sensitivity through your information
display. See General Information (page
105).

239

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Aids

Cause

Action

The radar sensor cover in the grille is dirty
or obstructed.

Clean the radar sensor cover or remove the
obstruction.

The surface of the radar sensor cover is
clean but the message remains in the
display.

Wait a short time. The radar may take
several minutes to reset after you remove
the obstruction.

Heavy rain, spray, snow or fog in the air
interferes with the radar signals.

The system is temporarily disabled. Shortly
after weather conditions improve, the
system automatically reactivates.

Swirling water, snow or ice on the road
surface interferes with the radar signals.

The system is temporarily disabled. Shortly
after weather conditions improve, the
system automatically reactivates.

System Limitations
Due to the nature of radar technology,
there may be certain instances where
vehicles do not provide a collision warning.
These include:
•
•
•
•
•

•
•

Stationary vehicles or vehicles moving
below 6 mph (10 km/h).
Pedestrians or objects in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles in the same lane.
Severe weather conditions (see
blocked sensor section).
Debris build-up on the grille near the
headlamps (see blocked sensor
section).
Small distance to vehicle ahead.
Large steering wheel and pedal
movements (very active driving style).

Damage to the front end of your vehicle
may alter the radar sensor's coverage area.
This may result in missed or false collision
warnings. Have an authorized dealer check
your radar sensor for proper coverage and
operation.

240

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
CARGO NETS (If Equipped)

REAR UNDER FLOOR
STORAGE
Cargo Management System (If

WARNING: This net is not designed
to restrain objects during a collision or
heavy braking.

Equipped)

The cargo net secures lightweight objects
in the cargo area. Attach the net to the
anchors provided. Repeat the attachment
on both sides of the vehicle.

E142445

The system is located in the floor of the
cargo area. Lift the handle to open.

Adjustable Load Floor (If Equipped)

E142446

Vehicles with the standard size spare tire
can adjust the load floor to two positions.
The front of the load floor can be placed
either on (for high position) or below (for
low position) the ledges behind the rear
seats. The rear of the load floor always sits
on the two small shelves located on the
liftgate trim.

E204323

241

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
ROOF RACKS AND LOAD
CARRIERS (If Equipped)

LUGGAGE COVERS (If Equipped)

WARNING: Make sure that the posts
are properly latched in mounting features.
The cover may cause injury in a sudden
stop or accident if it is not securely
installed.

WARNING: When loading the roof
racks, we recommend you evenly distribute
the load, as well as maintain a low center
of gravity. Loaded vehicles, with higher
centers of gravity, may handle differently
than unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower speeds and
increased stopping distance, when driving
a heavily loaded vehicle.

WARNING: Do not place any objects
on the cargo area shade. They may
obstruct your vision or strike occupants of
your vehicle in a sudden stop or crash.
Use the cargo shade to cover items in the
cargo area of your vehicle.

The maximum recommended load, evenly
distributed on the crossbars, is:
• 100 lb (45 kg) for vehicles without a
moonroof.
• 45 lb (20 kg) for vehicles with a
moonroof.
For correct roof rack system function, you
must place loads directly on crossbars
affixed to the roof rack side rails. When
using the roof rack system, we recommend
you use Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars
designed specifically for your vehicle.
Make sure that you securely fasten the
load. Check the tightness of the load
before driving and at each fuel stop.

E142447

Insert the ends of the cargo shade into the
mounting features located behind the rear
seat on the rear trim panels to install the
cargo shade.

Thumbwheel Kit

To operate the cargo shade:
1.

Pull the rear edge of the cargo shade
rearward.
2. Secure both ends of the support rod
into the retention slots located on the
rear quarter trim panels.

E203659

242

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
Note: There may be snap caps in the new
side rail position, which must be removed
before installing the crossbar. You can
remove these caps by using a T25 torx tool
or a similar tool.

A thumbwheel kit is included in your
vehicle for tying light loads to your roof.
The kit is located in the glovebox.
Make sure to check that the thumbwheels
are tight each time you add or remove load
from the roof rack, and periodically while
traveling. Make sure that the load is secure
before traveling.

LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and
without a Trailer

Note: There may be snap caps in the side
rail, which must be removed before
installing the thumbwheels. These caps can
be removed by using a T25 torx tool or a
similar tool.

This section guides you in the
proper loading of your vehicle,
trailer, or both. Keep your loaded
vehicle weight within its design
rating capability, with or without
a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return
of vehicle design performance.
Before you load your vehicle,
become familiar with the
following terms for determining
your vehicle’s weight rating, with
or without a trailer, from the
vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.

Adjusting the Crossbar (If Equipped)
Note: For less wind noise and better
aerodynamics, only install the crossbars
when you need them for carrying cargo.
Follow the steps to reposition or remove the
rear crossbar. You can remove the front
crossbar fasteners by unscrewing the
assembly.

E203063

Remove the crossbar bolts at both
sides of the front crossbar by using a
T25 torx tool or a similar tool.
2. Remove the crossbar by sliding the
ends off of the side rails.
3. Move the crossbar to the new side rail
position and slide onto rail.
4. Replace and tighten the bolts at both
sides of the crossbar by using a T25
torx tool or a similar tool.
243

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:

E198719

Payload

PAYLOAD

E143816

244

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating)

Payload is the combined weight
of cargo and passengers that your
vehicle is carrying. The maximum
payload for your vehicle appears
on the Tire and Loading label. The
label is either on the B-pillar or the
edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and
Canada may not have a tire and
loading label. Look for “The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg OR XXX lb” for maximum
payload. The payload listed on the
Tire and Loading Information label
is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly
plant. If you install any additional
equipment on your vehicle, you
must determine the new payload.
Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed
on the Tire and Loading label.
When towing, trailer tongue
weight or king pin weight is also
part of payload.

GAWR is the maximum allowable
weight that a single axle (front or
rear) can carry. These numbers
are on the Safety Compliance
Certification label. The label is
located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its Gross Axle
Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle.
This includes all options,
equipment, passengers and cargo.
It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
The label is located on the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver
seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating.

WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle
can be limited either by volume
capacity (how much space is
available) or by payload capacity
(how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have
reached the maximum payload of
your vehicle, do not add more
cargo, even if there is space
available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and vehicle rollover.
245

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
vehicle’s braking system is rated
for operation at Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, not at Gross
Combined Weight Rating.)
Separate functional brakes should
be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the
Gross Combined Weight of the
towing vehicle plus the trailer
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating of the towing vehicle.
The gross combined weight must
never exceed the Gross Combined
Weight Rating.
Note: For trailer towing
information refer to the RV and
Trailer Towing Guide available at
an authorized dealer.

Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:

E198828

WARNING: Exceeding the
Safety Compliance Certification
label vehicle weight rating limits
could result in substandard
vehicle handling or performance,
engine, transmission and/or
structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of
control and personal injury.

WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.

Maximum Loaded Trailer
Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is
the highest possible weight of a
fully loaded trailer the vehicle can
tow. Consult an authorized dealer
(or the RV and Trailer Towing
Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed
information.

WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the
original tires because they may
lower your vehicle’s GVWR and
GAWR limitations. Replacement
tires with a higher limit than the
original tires do not increase the
GVWR and GAWR limitations.

GCWR (Gross Combined
Weight Rating)

WARNING: Exceeding any
vehicle weight rating limitation
could result in serious damage to
your vehicle, personal injury or
both.

GCWR is the maximum allowable
weight of the vehicle and the
loaded trailer, including all cargo
and passengers, that the vehicle
can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
246

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
Steps for determining the
correct load limit:

Helpful examples for calculating
the available amount of cargo
and luggage load capacity

1. Locate the statement "The
combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lb." on your
vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from XXX kg or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For
example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1,400 lb. and there will
be five 150 lb. passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined
weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.

Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You decide
to go golfing. Is there enough load
capacity to carry you, four of your
friends and all the golf bags? You
and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and
the golf bags weigh approximately
30 pounds (13.5 kilograms) each.
The calculation would be: 1400 (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) = 1400 - 1100
- 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you have
enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends
and your golf bags. In metric units,
the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (5 x 99 kilograms) (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 - 495 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a
1400-pound (635-kilogram) cargo
and luggage capacity. You and
one of your friends decide to pick
up cement from the local home
improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for
the past two years. Measuring the
inside of the vehicle with the rear
seat folded down, you have room
for twelve 100-pound
(45-kilogram) bags of cement. Do
you have enough load capacity to
transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each
weigh 220 pounds (99 kilograms),
the calculation would be: 1400 (2 x 220) - (12 x 100) = 1400 - 440
247

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Load Carrying
- 1200 = - 240 pounds. No, you do
not have enough cargo capacity
to carry that much weight. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 540 = -103 kilograms.
You will need to reduce the load
weight by at least 240 pounds
(104 kilograms). If you remove
three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load
calculation would be:1400 - (2 x
220) - (9 x 100) = 1400 - 440 900 = 60 pounds. Now you have
the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In
metric units, the calculation would
be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (9 x 45 kilograms) =
635 - 198 - 405 = 32 kilograms.
The above calculations also
assume that the loads are
positioned in your vehicle in a
manner that does not overload
the front or the rear gross axle
weight rating specified for your
vehicle on the Safety Compliance
Certification label.

Special Loading Instructions
for Owners of Pick-up Trucks
and Utility-type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles
may handle differently than
unloaded vehicles. Take extra
precautions, such as slower
speeds and increased stopping
distance, when driving a heavily
loaded vehicle.

248

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing
Load Placement

TOWING A TRAILER

To help minimize how trailer
movement affects your vehicle
when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest
to the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items
centered between the left and
right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above
the trailer axles or just slightly
forward toward the trailer
tongue. Do not allow the final
trailer tongue weight to go
above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the
correct rise or drop and load
capacity. When both the
loaded vehicle and trailer are
connected, the trailer frame
should be level, or slightly
angled down toward your
vehicle, when viewed from the
side.
When driving with a trailer or
payload, a slight takeoff vibration
or shudder may be present due to
the increased payload weight.
Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting
your vehicle up for towing is
located in another chapter of this
manual. See Load Limit (page
243).
You can also find information in
the RV & Trailer Towing Guide
available at your authorized
dealer, or online.

WARNING: Towing trailers
beyond the maximum
recommended gross trailer weight
exceeds the limit of your vehicle
and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
WARNING: Do not exceed
the GVWR or the GAWR specified
on the certification label.
Note: See Recommended
Towing Weights (page 250).
Your vehicle may have electrical
items, such as fuses or relays,
related to towing. See Fuses
(page 273).
Your vehicle's load capacity
designation is by weight, not by
volume, so you cannot necessarily
use all available space when
loading a vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places an extra
load on your vehicle's engine,
transmission, axle, brakes, tires
and suspension. Inspect these
components periodically during,
and after, any towing operation.

249

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing

RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
Website http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS

TRAILER SWAY CONTROL (If
Equipped)

Note: Do not exceed the trailer
weight for your vehicle
configuration listed in the chart
below.
Note: Be sure to take into
consideration trailer frontal area.
Do not exceed 20 ft² (1.86 m²) if
your vehicle can tow a class I trailer
or 40 ft² (3.72 m²) if your vehicle
can tow a class III trailer.
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight
by 2% per 1,000 ft (300 m)
starting at the 1,000 ft (300 m)
elevation point.
Note: Certain states require
electric trailer brakes for trailers
over a specified weight. Be sure to
check state regulations for this
specified weight. The maximum
trailer weights listed may be limited
to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector
needed to activate electric trailer
brakes.

WARNING: Turning off trailer sway
control increases the risk of loss of vehicle
control, serious injury or death. Ford does
not recommend disabling this feature
except in situations where speed reduction
may be detrimental (such as hill climbing),
the driver has significant trailer towing
experience, and can control trailer sway
and maintain safe operation.
Note: This feature does not prevent trailer
sway, but reduces it when it begins.
Note: This feature cannot stop all trailers
from swaying.
Note: In some cases, if your vehicle speed
is too high, the system may turn on multiple
times, gradually reducing your vehicle speed.
The system applies the brakes to the
individual wheels and reduces engine
torque to aid vehicle stability. If the trailer
begins to sway, the stability control
warning lamp flashes and a message
appears in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 119). Slow
your vehicle down, pull safely to the side
of the road and check for correct load
distribution. See Load Carrying (page
241).
You can switch this feature off in the
information display. When you switch the
ignition on, the system automatically turns
on.

250

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing
Your vehicle may tow a trailer
provided the maximum trailer
weight is less than or equal to the
Engine
2.3L GTDI 2WD

3.5L TiVCT 2WD
2.3L GTDI 2WD

3.5L TiVCT 2WD
2.3L GTDI 4WD

3.5L TiVCT 4WD
2.3L GTDI 4WD

3.5L TiVCT 4WD
3.5L GTDI 4WD

maximum trailer weight listed for
your vehicle configuration on the
following chart.

Maximum GCWR

Maximum trailer
weight

6,900 lb (3,130 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

6,900 lb (3,130 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

7,950 lb (3,606 kg)

3,000 lb (1,361 kg)

9,950 lb (4,513 kg)

5,000 lb (2,268 kg)

7,100 lb (3,221 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

7,100 lb (3,221 kg)

2,000 lb (907 kg)

8,150 lb (3,697 kg)

3,000 lb (1,361 kg)

10,150 lb (4,604 kg)

5,000 lb (2,268 kg)

10,400 lb (4,717 kg)

5,000 lb (2,268 kg)

1 Without

Trailer Towing Package.
Trailer Towing Package.
3 For towing trailers up to 3500 lb (1588 kg), use a weight-carrying hitch
and ball, which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through your
vehicle’s underbody structure. For towing trailers over 3500 lb (1588
kg), up to the maximum trailer weight, we recommend you use a
weight-distributing hitch to increase front axle load when towing.
2 With

251

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing
When hooking-up a trailer using a
weight-distributing hitch, always use the
following procedure:

ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws
for towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with
towing accessories for the proper
installation and adjustment
specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives
you.

1.
2.

You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's
load in the Load Carrying chapter. See
Load Limit (page 243).

Park the loaded vehicle, without the
trailer, on a level surface.
Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender. This is H1.
Attach the loaded trailer to your vehicle
without the weight-distributing bars
connected.
Measure the height to the top of your
vehicle's front wheel opening on the
fender a second time. This is H2.
Install and adjust the tension in the
weight-distributing bars so that the
height of your vehicle's front wheel
opening on the fender is approximately
half the way down from H2, toward H1.
Check that the trailer is level or slightly
nose down toward your vehicle. If not,
adjust the ball height accordingly and
repeat Steps 2-6.

When the trailer is level or slightly nose
down toward the vehicle:
• Lock the bar tension adjuster in place.
• Check that the trailer tongue securely
attaches and locks onto the hitch.
• Install safety chains, lighting, and trailer
brake controls as required by law or the
trailer manufacturer.

Remember to account for the trailer
tongue weight as part of your vehicle load
when calculating the total vehicle weight.

Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.

Safety Chains

Weight-distributing Hitches

Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the
hook retainers of your vehicle hitch.

WARNING: Do not adjust the spring
bars so that your vehicle's rear bumper is
higher than before attaching the trailer.
Doing so will defeat the function of the
weight-distributing hitch, which may cause
unpredictable handling, and could result
in serious personal injury.

To connect the trailer’s safety chains, cross
them under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning tight corners. Do
not allow the chains to drag on the ground.

252

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing
Trailer Brakes

Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up
to get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip.
When turning, make wider turns so the
trailer wheels clear curbs and other
obstacles.

WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may
not have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.

When Towing a Trailer
•

Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them to
the manufacturer's specifications. The
trailer brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.

•
•

The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.

•

Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1,500 lb
(680 kg) when loaded.

•

Trailer Lamps
•

WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp
wiring; this may damage the electrical
system resulting in fire. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible for
assistance in proper trailer tow wiring
installation. Additional electrical
equipment may be required.

•

Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.

•

•
1.

253

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
Do not make full-throttle starts.
Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly
after you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
gearshift in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed
control may turn off automatically
when you are towing on long, steep
grades.
Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and
transmission cooling.
Allow more distance for stopping with
a trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.

Towing
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the automatic transmission in
park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back
of the trailer wheels. (Chocks not
included with vehicle.)

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies,
car-hauling trailer, or flatbed transport
vehicle), it can be flat-towed (all wheels
on the ground, regardless of the powertrain
and transmission configuration) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Place the transmission in position N. If
you cannot move the transmission into
N, you may need to override it. See
Transmission (page 187).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to
rise above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher
than 6 in (15 cm) above the bottom
edge of the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.

WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.

Recreational Towing

Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime
the rear axle has been submerged in water.
Water may have contaminated the rear
axle lubricant, which is not normally
checked or changed unless a leak is
suspected or other axle repair is required.

Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 133).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example
of recreational towing would be towing
your vehicle behind a motorhome. We
designed these guidelines to prevent
damage to your transmission.

254

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing
Recreational Towing

Front-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.

Four-wheel drive vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot recreational tow your vehicle.

You can tow your vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.

TOWING THE VEHICLE ON
FOUR WHEELS - 3.5L
DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™

Vehicles with Keyless Start
1.

Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then pressing the keyless
start button until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
gearshift into neutral (N).
3. Switch the vehicle off by pressing the
keyless start button once.
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. You need the door
key to lock and unlock doors when the
battery cable is disconnected. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 298).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.

WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when
being towed.

Emergency Towing
If your vehicle becomes inoperable
(without access to wheel dollies or vehicle
transport trailer), it can be flat-towed (all
wheels on the ground, regardless of the
powertrain and transmission
configuration) under the following
conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward for
towing in a forward direction.
• Shift into neutral (N). If you cannot
shift into neutral (N), you may need to
override it. See Transmission (page
187).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).

Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
Vehicles with an Ignition Key
1.

Start the vehicle by pressing the brake
pedal, and then turning the ignition key
until the vehicle starts.
2. Press the brake pedal and shift the
transmission into neutral (N).

255

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Towing
3. Switch off your vehicle by turning the
ignition key past the accessory position.
The key position is between the
accessory and off positions. See
Ignition Switch (page 169).
4. Disconnect the negative (black) cable
from the battery. See Changing the
12V Battery (page 298).
Note: The anti-theft system does not work
until you reconnect the battery cable.
Start the engine within 15 minutes of
reconnecting the battery cable.
All Vehicles
•
•

Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Start the engine and allow it to run for
a few minutes at the beginning of each
day and every six hours thereafter. With
the engine running and your foot on the
brake, shift into drive (D) and then into
reverse (R) before shifting back into
neutral (N).

Front-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your front-wheel
drive vehicle with the front wheels off the
ground by using a tow dolly, or with all four
wheels off the ground using a vehicle
transport trailer. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by
the equipment provider.
Four-wheel Drive Vehicles
Alternatively, you can tow your four-wheel
drive vehicle with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. Do
not tow your four-wheel drive vehicle with
the front wheels off the ground (by using
a tow dolly) and the rear wheels on the
ground. This causes damage to your
four-wheel drive system. If you are using a
vehicle transport trailer, follow the
instruction specified by the equipment
provider.

256

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Hints
Avoid these actions; they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Sudden accelerations or hard
accelerations.
• Revving the engine before turning it off.
• Idle for periods longer than one minute.
• Warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Use the air conditioner or front
defroster.
• Use the speed control in hilly terrain.
• Rest your foot on the brake pedal while
driving.
• Drive a heavily loaded vehicle or tow a
trailer.
• Carry unnecessary weight
(approximately 1 mpg [0.4 km/L] is
lost for every 400 lb [180 kilogram] of
weight carried).
• Driving with the wheels out of
alignment.

BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During
this time, your vehicle may exhibit some
unusual driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first
1,000 mi (1,600 km). Vary your speed
frequently and change up through the
gears early. Do not labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).

ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Your fuel economy is affected by several
things, such as how you drive, the
conditions you drive under, and how you
maintain your vehicle.
You may improve your fuel economy by
keeping these things in mind:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds without
stopping.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving.
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds (traveling
at 55 mph [88 km/h] uses 15% less
fuel than traveling at 65 mph [105
km/h]).
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.

Conditions
• Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a
trailer may reduce fuel economy at any
speed.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle (for example bug deflectors,
rollbars, light bars, running boards, ski
racks or luggage racks) may reduce
fuel economy.
• To maximize the fuel economy, drive
with the tonneau cover installed (if
equipped).
• Using fuel blended with alcohol may
lower fuel economy.
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures during the first 5–10 mi
(12–16 km) of driving.
• Driving on flat terrain offers improved
fuel economy as compared to driving
on hilly terrain.

257

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Hints
•

•

Transmissions give their best fuel
economy when operated in the top
cruise gear and with steady pressure
on the gas pedal.
Four-wheel-drive operation (if
equipped) is less fuel efficient than
two-wheel-drive operation.
Close the windows for high-speed
driving.

•
•
•

Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
Check that the horn works.
Check that the exterior lights work.
Turn the steering wheel to check that
the steering power assist works.

FLOOR MATS

DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the
loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.

WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.

WARNING: Pedals that cannot
move freely can cause loss of vehicle
control and increase the risk of serious
personal injury.

Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
Before driving through standing water,
check the depth. Never drive through water
that is higher than the bottom of the front
rocker area of your vehicle.

WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot
slip out of position and interfere with the
pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.

E266447

WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.

When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:

258

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Driving Hints

E142666

To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and
press down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to
make sure they are secure.

259

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Roadside Emergencies
•

ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company
offers a complimentary roadside
assistance program. This program is
separate from the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
The service is available:
• 24 hours a day, seven days a week.
• For the coverage period listed on the
Roadside Assistance Card included in
your Owner's Manual portfolio.

•

Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the customer's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall deliver up
to 2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L)
of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft
(30 m) of a paved or county
maintained road, no recoveries.

Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law, shall tow Ford
eligible vehicles to an authorized dealer
within 35 mi (56 km) of the
disablement location or to the nearest
authorized dealer. If a member
requests a tow to an authorized dealer
that is more than 35 mi (56 km) from
the disablement location, the member
shall be responsible for any mileage
costs in excess of 35 mi (56 km).
Roadside Assistance includes up to
$200 for a towed trailer if the disabled
eligible vehicle requires service at the
nearest authorized dealer. If the towing
vehicle is operational but the trailer is
not, then the trailer does not qualify for
any roadside services.

Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference. This card is in
the owner's information portfolio in the
glove compartment.
United States vehicle customers who
require Roadside Assistance, call
1-800-241-3673.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Ford Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for
towing to the nearest dealership within
35 mi (56 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States vehicle
customers call 1-800-241-3673.
Customers need to submit their original
receipts.

260

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Roadside Emergencies
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance

HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when
the ignition is in any position, or if the key is
not in the ignition. If used when the vehicle
is not running, the battery loses charge. As
a result, there may be insufficient power to
restart your vehicle.

To fully assist you should you have a
vehicle concern, Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited offers a complimentary
roadside assistance program. This
program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, but the coverage
is concurrent with the powertrain coverage
period of your vehicle.

The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your
hazard flashers when your
vehicle is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.

Canadian customers who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-665-2006.

•

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance

•

Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your
wallet for quick reference.

FUEL SHUTOFF

In Canada, this card is found in the
Warranty Guide in the glove compartment
of your vehicle.

Press the flasher control and all front
and rear direction indicators flash.
Press the button again to switch them
off.

WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage

Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.

The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
If you require more information, please
refer to the coverage section of your
warranty guide, call us in Canada at
1-800-665-2006, or visit our website at
www.ford.ca.

Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of
fuel to the engine in the event of a
moderate to severe crash. Not every
impact causes a shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.

261

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If your vehicle has a key system:
1. Switch off the ignition.
2. Switch to start position.
3. Switch off the ignition.
4. Switch on the ignition to re-enable the
fuel pump.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

WARNING: Keep batteries out of
reach of children. Batteries contain sulfuric
acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or
clothing. Shield your eyes when working
near the battery to protect against possible
splashing of acid solution. In case of acid
contact with skin or eyes, flush
immediately with water for a minimum of
15 minutes and get prompt medical
attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.

If your vehicle has a push button start
system:
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and
START/STOP to switch on your
vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle
by pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
5. If the vehicle does not start, repeat
steps 1 through 4.

WARNING: Use only adequately
sized cables with insulated clamps.

Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your
automatic transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle
with an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.

JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE

Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the
two vehicles do not touch.

WARNING: Batteries normally
produce explosive gases which can cause
personal injury. Therefore, do not allow
flames, sparks or lighted substances to
come near the battery. When working near
the battery, always shield your face and
protect your eyes. Always provide correct
ventilation.

Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not attach the cables
to fuel lines, engine rocker covers, the
intake manifold or electrical components
as grounding points. Stay clear of moving
parts. To avoid reverse polarity
connections, make sure that you correctly
identify the positive (+) and negative (-)
terminals on both the disabled and booster
vehicles before connecting the cables.

262

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Roadside Emergencies
2. Connect the other end of the positive
(+) cable to the positive (+) terminal
of the booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the
negative (-) cable to an exposed metal
part of the stalled vehicle's engine,
away from the battery and the fuel
injection system, or connect the
negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.

WARNING: Do not attach the end
of the positive cable to the studs or
L-shaped eyelet located above the positive
(+) terminal of your vehicle’s battery. High
current may flow through and cause
damage to the fuses.
WARNING: Do not connect the end
of the second cable to the negative (-)
terminal of the battery to be jumped. A
spark may cause an explosion of the gases
that surround the battery.

Jump Starting

Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.

Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.

Removing the Jumper Cables

Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.

4
2

E142664

Connect the positive (+) jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal of the
discharged battery.

263

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Roadside Emergencies
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.

The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the
remote entry transmitter (if equipped).
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled
in specific markets.

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE

3
E142665

1.
2.

Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.

E143886

264

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Roadside Emergencies
If you need to have your vehicle towed,
contact a professional towing service or,
if you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, your roadside
assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Ford
Motor Company has not approved a
slingbelt towing procedure. Vehicle
damage may occur if towed incorrectly, or
by any other means.
Ford Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck
operators. Have your tow truck operator
refer to this manual for proper hook-up
and towing procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the
front wheels off the ground. When towing
in this manner, the rear wheels can remain
on the ground.
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel or four-wheel drive
vehicle requires that all wheels be off the
ground, such as using a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment. This prevents
damage to the transmission, all-wheel or
four-wheel drive system and vehicle.

265

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Customer Assistance
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED

Website

www.owner.ford.com

Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line will provide warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure
your continued satisfaction.

These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• U.S. dealer locator by Dealer Name,
City/State or Zip Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Ford Extended Service Plans.
• Ford Genuine Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.

Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized
to perform all warranty repairs. This means
that, depending on the warranty repair
needed, you may have to take your vehicle
to another authorized dealer.

In Canada:

A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle
to the authorized dealer. Repairs will be
made using Ford or Motorcraft® parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Ford.

Mailing address
Customer Relationship Centre
Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 0C8

Away From Home

Telephone

If you are away from home when your
vehicle needs service, contact the Ford
Customer Relationship Center or use the
online resources listed below to find the
nearest authorized dealer.

1-800-565-3673 (FORD)
Website

www.ford.ca

In the United States:

Twitter

Mailing address

@FordServiceCA (English Canada)
@FordServiceQC (Quebec)

Ford Motor Company
Customer Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126

Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are
receiving, follow these steps:

Telephone
1-800-392-3673 (FORD)
(TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952)

Additional information and resources are
available online:

266

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.

Customer Assistance
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Ford Motor Company policies,
please contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center.

IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s
applicable express warranty after a
reasonable number of attempts, the
manufacturer shall be required to either
replace the vehicle with one substantially
identical or repurchase the vehicle and
reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to
the actual price paid or payable by the
consumer (less a reasonable allowance
for consumer use). The consumer has the
right to choose whether to receive a refund
or replacement vehicle.

In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Customer Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’s current odometer reading.

California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had
a reasonable number of attempts to
conform the vehicle to its applicable
express warranties if, within the first 18
months of ownership of a new vehicle or
the first 18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever
occurs first:

In some states within the United States,
you must directly notify Ford in writing
before pursuing remedies under your
state's warranty laws, and Ford is also
allowed a final repair attempt.
Additionally, in some states within the
United States, a consumer has the option
of submitting a warranty dispute to the
BBB Auto Line before taking action under
the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, or to
the extent allowed by state law, before
pursuing replacement or repurchase
remedies provided by certain state laws.
This dispute handling procedure is not
required prior to enforcing state created
rights or other rights which are independent
of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act or
state replacement or repurchase laws.

Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect
or condition that substantially impairs
the use, value or safety of the vehicle)
OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair
of nonconformities for a total of more
than 30 calendar days (not necessarily
all at one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the
need for the repair of the nonconformity
at the following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126

267

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Customer Assistance
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred
by California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b).
You are also required to use BBB AUTO
LINE before exercising rights or seeking
remedies created by the Federal
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C.
sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seek
redress by pursuing rights and remedies
not created by California Civil Code Section
1793.22(b) or the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE is
not required by those statutes.

Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty
days after you file your claim with the BBB.
You are not bound by the decision, and
may reject the decision and proceed to
court where all findings of the BBB Auto
Line dispute, and decision, are admissible
in the court action. Should you choose to
accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford
is then bound by the decision, and must
comply with the decision within 30 days
of receipt of your acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application.
You will be asked for your name and
address, general information about your
new vehicle, information about your
warranty concerns, and any steps you have
already taken to try to resolve them. A
Customer Claim Form will be mailed that
will need to be completed, signed and
returned to the BBB along with proof of
ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB will
review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.

THE BETTER BUSINESS
BUREAU (BBB) AUTO LINE
PROGRAM (U.S. ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford
Motor Company and to your dealer. If a
warranty concern has not been resolved
using the three-step procedure outlined
earlier in this chapter in the Getting the
Services you need section, you may be
eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO
LINE program.

You can get more information by
calling BBB AUTO LINE at
1-800-955-5100, or writing to:

The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration.
During mediation, a representative of the
BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor
Company to explore options for settlement
of the claim. If an agreement is not reached
during mediation or you do not want to
participate in mediation, and if your claim
is eligible, you may participate in the
arbitration process. An arbitration hearing
will be scheduled so that you can present
your case in an informal setting before an
impartial person. The arbitrator will
consider the testimony provided and make
a decision after the hearing.

BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center
at 1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.

268

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Customer Assistance
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)

GETTING ASSISTANCE
OUTSIDE THE U.S. AND
CANADA

For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where
you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford
of Canada and the authorized dealer to
resolve a factory-related vehicle service
concern have been unsatisfactory, Ford of
Canada participates in an impartial third
party mediation/arbitration program
administered by the Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded
fuel or petrol/gas engines or the proper
sulfur fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact
our Customer Relationship Center.

The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.

The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage
the effectiveness of your emission control
system and may cause engine knocking or
serious engine damage. Ford Motor
Company or Ford of Canada is not
responsible for any damage caused by use
of improper fuel. Using improper fuels may
also result in difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the United States.

In the CAMVAP program, impartial
third-party arbitrators conduct hearings at
mutually convenient times and places in
an informal environment. These impartial
arbitrators review the positions of the
parties, make decisions and, when
appropriate, render awards to resolve
disputes. CAMVAP decisions are fast, fair,
and final as the arbitrator’s award is
binding on both you and Ford of Canada.

If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands
and/or Puerto Rico, Central America, the
Caribbean, and Israel and the Middle East,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. If
the authorized dealer cannot help you,
contact the corresponding Ford Customer
Assistance Center:

CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For
more information, without charge or
obligation, call your CAMVAP Provincial
Administrator directly at 1-800-207-0685
or visit www.camvap.ca.

FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:

269

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Customer Assistance

Customer Relationship Center

Phone

Fax

E-mail

Asia Pacific

N/A

apemcrc@ford.com

Caribbean and
Central America

+1 313 594 4857

expcac@ford.com

971 4 3327 266

menacac@ford.com

Ford
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
Middle East

UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell
phone users in Saudi
800850078

North Africa

N/A

nafcrc@ford.com

Puerto Rico and U.S.
Virgin Islands

+1-800-841-3673

N/A

prcac@ford.com

Sub-Saharan Africa

+1-313-594-4857

N/A

ssacrc@ford.com

South Korea

+82-02-1600-6003

N/A

infokr1@ford.com or
infokr@lincoln.com

If you are in another foreign country,
contact the nearest authorized dealer. In
the event your inquiry is unresolved,
communicate your concern with the
dealership’s Sales Manager, Service
Manager or Customer Relations Manager.
If you require additional assistance or
clarification, please contact the respective
Customer Relationship Center as
previously listed.

If you buy your vehicle in North America
and then relocate to any of the above
locations, register your vehicle
identification number (VIN) and new
address with Ford Global Trade Services
by emailing, expcso@ford.com.

Customers in the U.S. should call
1-800-392-3673.

270

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Customer Assistance
If NHTSA receives similar
complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between
you, your dealer, or Ford Motor
Company.
To contact NHTSA, you may call
the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue,
Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle
safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.

ORDERING ADDITIONAL
OWNER'S LITERATURE
To order the publications in this portfolio,
contact Helm, Incorporated at:
HELM, INCORPORATED
47911 Halyard Drive
Plymouth, Michigan 48170
Attention: Customer Service
Or to order a free publication catalog, call
toll free: 1-800-782-4356
Monday-Friday 8:00 a.m. - 6:00 p.m. EST
Helm, Incorporated can also be reached
by their website:
www.helminc.com
(Items in this catalog may be purchased
by credit card, check or money order.)

Obtaining a French Owner’s
Manual
French Owner’s Manual can be obtained
from your authorized dealer or by
contacting Helm, Incorporated using the
contact information listed previously in this
section.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(U.S. ONLY)

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.

E142557

If you believe that your vehicle has
a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying
Ford Motor Company.
271

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Customer Assistance

Transport Canada Contact Information

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motorvehicles.html (English)

Website

http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehiculesautomobiles.html (French)

Phone

1–800–333–0510

Ford of Canada Contact Information

Website

www.ford.ca

Phone

1–800–565-3673

272

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
The power distribution box is located in
the engine compartment. It has
high-current fuses that protect your
vehicle's main electrical systems from
overloads.

FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box

If the battery has been disconnected and
reconnected, some features will need to
be reset. See Changing the 12V Battery
(page 298).

WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of
electrical shock, always replace the cover
to the power distribution box before
reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid
reservoirs.

E193713

273

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses

Fuse or Relay
Number

1
2
3

Fuse Rating

Powertrain control module power.

Engine emissions (MIL).

20A
20A

20A

Protected Component

A/C clutch control relay coil.
Variable Air Conditioning Compressor.
Active grille shutters.
Ignition coils.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

10
11
12

15A
—

—

Heated mirrors.
Right hand side electronic cooling fan 3
relay.

40A

Not used.
1

Heated rear window.
Not used.
Powertrain control module relay.

Horn relay power.

A/C clutch relay power.

20A
10A

—

Rear heated window and heated mirrors
relay.

—

Rear blower motor relay.

—

Not used.

—

Left hand side cooling fan relay.

—

Cooling fans series/parallel relay.

274

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

25A

Protected Component

Electronic fan relay 2.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

26
27

Not used.
2

Anti-lock brake system valves.

Trailer tow battery charge relay power.

30A
30A

—

Not used.

—

Starter relay.

—

31
32
33
34

Not used.
1

Electric power-assisted steering.

Anti-lock brake system module.

10A
10A

10A

Powertrain control module (Ignition Switch
Position - Run).
Blind spot information system.
Adaptive cruise control.
Front view camera.
Rear camera.

—

Not used.

—

Blower motor relay.

—

Trailer tow battery charge relay.

—

A/C compressor clutch relay.

—

Horn relay.

—

41
42
43

Not used.
2

40A
—

Rear blower motor.
Not used.

40A

Front blower motor.

275

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52

Fuse Rating

Protected Component

Voltage quality module bus.

Electronic fan relay 1.

Trailer tow brake controller.

50A

40A
30A
—

Not used.

50A

—

Body control module RP1 bus.
Not used.

50A
50A

Body control module RP2 bus.

Electronic fan relay 3.

Anti-lock brake system pump.

60A

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.
2

40A

Power inverter.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

60
61
62
63
64
65
66

Not used.

20A

—

Not used.

20A

Power point (instrument panel).

Fuel pump.

30A
—
20A
—

Power point (front console bin).

Not used.
2

Power point (2nd row) (without USB
charger).
Not used.

276

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75

Fuse Rating

20A
—

15A
—

30A

79
80
81
82
83
84
85

Driver seat module.
Driver seat power.

Front wiper motor.
Not used.
Not used.

3rd row power folding seat module relay.

Starter relay.

30A
30A
—

Not used.
1

Trailer tow back-up lamp relay.

Steering column lock (if equipped).

Brake on/off switch.

10A

20A
10A
—
5A

Heated/cooled seats.

Passenger seat power.

30A

—

Trailer tow left-hand and right-hand stop
and direction indicator lamps.

30A

Power liftgate.

Not used.
2

—

Power point (cargo area).
Not used.

30A

Protected Component

Not used.
1

2nd row USB charger (if equipped).

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

277

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

Fuse Rating

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99

Not used.
1

Multi-contour seat module relay.

Alternator sense.

Rear washer relay.

Rear wiper relay.

15A

10A
15A
15A

10A
5A

Protected Component

Rain sensor.

20A
20A

Powertrain control module relay coil
power.

2nd row seat motors.

Trailer tow parking lamp relay.

1 Micro

2 fuse.
fuse.
3 J-case fuse.
2 M-case

Note: It may be easier to access the fuse
panel if you remove the finish trim piece.

Passenger Compartment Fuse
Panel
The fuse panel is located under the
instrument panel to the left of the steering
column.

278

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses

E145984

Fuse or Relay
Number

1
2
3
4
5

Fuse Rating

10A

Memory seat switch (lumbar power).

Driver unlock relay.
Aftermarket electronic brake controller.

20A

Demand lamps.
Battery saver.

7.5A
20A

Protected Components

Rear heated seat module.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

Not used.

—

10
11

5A
5A

Not used.
2

Embedded modem.
Hands free liftgate.
Rear climate control module.
Securicode™ keyless entry keypad.
Power liftgate module.

279

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

12
13

14
15
16
17
18

19
20
21

22
23

24
25
26
27

Fuse Rating

7.5A

10A

10A
—

Protected Components

Front climate control module.
Instrument cluster.
Smart data link.
Steering column control module.
Extended power module.
Smart datalink connector power.
Heads up display.
Not used.
Electronic finish panel.

Push button start switch.
Ignition switch.
Key inhibit.

7.5A
—
5A

Transmission control switch.
Not used.
Terrain management switch.
Heads up display.
Humidity sensor.

Occupant classification sensor.

10A

20A

30A

Delayed accessory power.
Power windows.
Moonroof.
Folding mirror relay.
DC inverter.
Window/moonroof switch illumination.
Central lock relay.
Left-hand front smart window motor.
Door zone module.
Right-hand front smart window motor.
Door zone module.
Moonroof.

280

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Fuse or Relay
Number

28
29

Fuse Rating

—

33
34
35
36

37
38

Sony amplifier - 10 channel.

Sony amplifier - 14 channel.

30A
—

20A

Not used.
Not used.
1

10A

20A

SYNC module.
GPS module.
Display.
Radio frequency receiver.

Radio.

Starter relay.

30A
5A

Protected Components

Restraints control module.
Extended power module.

15A

20A

30A

Lane departure warning module.
Auto high beam.
EC mirrors.
Rear heated seats.
Heated steering wheel.
Left-hand front window motor.
Rear power window motors.

1 Micro

2 fuse.
3 fuse.
3 Circuit breaker.
2 Micro

281

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse
with one that has the specified amperage
rating. Using a fuse with a higher amperage
rating can cause severe wire damage and
could start a fire.

E217331

If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses
before replacing any electrical
components.

Fuse Types

E207206

Callout

Fuse Type

Micro 2

Micro 3

Maxi

Mini

282

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Fuses
Callout

Fuse Type

M Case

J Case

J Case Low Profile

283

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Working with the Engine On

GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale
value. There is a large network of
authorized dealers that are there to help
you with their professional servicing
expertise. We believe that their specially
trained technicians are best qualified to
service your vehicle properly and expertly.
They are supported by a wide range of
highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1.

Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.

If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which
parts and services are covered.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood

Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.

Precautions
•
•
•

•

Do not work on a hot engine.
Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
Do not work on a vehicle with the
engine running in an enclosed space,
unless you are sure you have enough
ventilation.
Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away
from the battery and all fuel related
parts.

Working with the Engine Off
1.

Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.

1
E203008

284

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
1.

Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle located under the left-hand
side of the instrument panel.
2. Slightly lift the hood.

E203009

3. Move the catch to the left.

E203320

4. Open the hood. Support the hood with
the strut.

Closing the Hood
1.

Remove the hood strut from the catch
and secure it correctly after use.
2. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last
8–12 in (20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.3L ECOBOOST™

285

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance

E270722

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
291).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 288).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 289).

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 297).

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 298).

Engine compartment fusebox.
See Changing a Fuse (page
282).

Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 308).

Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 298).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L DURATEC

286

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
A

E223186

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 297).

Automatic transmission fluid
dipstick. See Automatic
Transmission Fluid Check
(page 295).

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 298).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 289).

Engine compartment fusebox.
See Fuse Specification Chart
(page 273).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 289).

Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 308).

Windshield washer fluid
reservoir. See Washer Fluid
Check (page 298).

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
291).

UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

287

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance

E270723

Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page
291).

Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 289).

Engine oil dipstick. See Engine
Oil Dipstick (page 289).

Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 297).

Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 298).

Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 273).

Air filter assembly. See
Changing the Engine Air Filter
(page 308).

Automatic transmission dipstick.
See Automatic Transmission
Fluid Check (page 295).

Washer fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 298).

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™

E161560

288

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Minimum.

Maximum.

Maintenance
7.

Replace the dipstick and remove it
again to check the oil level. See Under
Hood Overview (page 285).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If
the oil level is at the minimum mark,
add oil immediately. See Capacities
and Specifications (page 354).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.5L
DURATEC/3.5L ECOBOOST™

Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.

E146429

MIN

MAX

Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).

Adding Engine Oil

ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1.

2.
3.
4.

5.
6.

WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.

Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
Switch the engine off and wait 15
minutes for the oil to drain into the oil
pan. Checking the engine oil level too
soon after you switch the engine off
may result in an inaccurate reading.
Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 284).
Remove the dipstick and wipe it with
a clean, lint-free cloth. See Under
Hood Overview (page 285).

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

E142732

289

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol
conforms to the current engine and
emission system protection standards and
fuel economy requirements of the
International Lubricants Specification
Advisory Committee (ILSAC).

From the main menu scroll to:
Message

To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1.

Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 285).
Turn it counterclockwise and remove
it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 354). You may
have to use a funnel to pour the engine
oil into the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.

Action and description

Settings

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Vehicle

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Oil Life

Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll
to the following message.

Hold OK to Press and hold the OK
Reset
button until the instrument
cluster displays the
following message.
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator resets the instrument
cluster displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.

Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.

Not Reset
Reset Cancelled

Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.

OIL CHANGE INDICATOR
RESET
Use the information display controls on
the steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.

290

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Maintain coolant concentration within
48% to 50%, which equates to a freeze
point between -29°F (-34°C) and -35°F
(-37°C). Coolant concentration should be
checked using a refractometer. We do not
recommend the use of hydrometers or
coolant test strips for measuring coolant
concentration.

ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the
coolant reservoir cap when the cooling
system is hot. Wait 10 minutes for the
cooling system to cool down. Cover the
coolant reservoir cap with a thick cloth to
prevent the possibility of scalding and
slowly remove the cap. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal
injury.

Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine
coolant when the engine is hot. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.

WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it
difficult to see through the windshield.

WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is
cool before unscrewing the coolant
pressure relief cap. The cooling system is
under pressure. Steam and hot liquid can
come out forcefully when you loosen the
cap slightly.

Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Take care not to put
engine coolant in the windshield washer
fluid reservoir or windshield washer fluid in
the engine coolant reservoir.

WARNING: Do not add coolant
further than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at
the intervals listed in the scheduled
maintenance information. See Scheduled
Maintenance (page 499).

Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.

Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and MAX marks on the
coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.

291

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle. If necessary, add enough
prediluted engine coolant to bring the
coolant level to the correct level.

It is very important to use prediluted
coolant approved to the correct
specification in order to avoid plugging the
small passageways in the engine cooling
system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 343). Do not mix
different colors or types of coolant in your
vehicle. Mixing of engine coolants or using
an incorrect coolant may harm the engine
or cooling system components and may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.

If you have to add more than 1.1 qt (1 L) of
engine coolant per month, have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Operating an engine with a low level of
coolant can result in engine overheating
and possible engine damage.

Note: If prediluted coolant is not available,
use the approved concentrated coolant
diluting it to 50/50 with distilled water. See
Capacities and Specifications (page 343).
Using water that has not been deionised
may contribute to deposit formation,
corrosion and plugging of the small cooling
system passageways.

Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.

Note: Coolants marketed for all makes and
models may not be approved to our
specifications and may cause damage to
the cooling system. Resulting component
damage may not be covered by the vehicle
Warranty.

In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant
in order to reach a vehicle service location.
In this instance, qualified personnel:
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the coolant system.
3. Refill with engine coolant as soon as
possible.

If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the
following:

Water alone, without engine coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.

Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant approved to
the correct specification. See
Capacities and Specifications (page
343).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to
reach the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.

Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.

292

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Coolant Change

Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of
the coolant.

At specific mileage intervals, as listed in
the scheduled maintenance information,
the coolant should be changed. Add
prediluted coolant approved to the correct
specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 343).

Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process
is not yet available.

Fail-Safe Cooling

Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards
for recycling and disposing of automotive
fluids.

Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient
temperature, vehicle load and terrain.

Severe Climates

How Fail-Safe Cooling Works

If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60%
provides improved freeze point
protection. Coolant concentrations
above 60% decrease the overheat
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

If the engine begins to overheat,
the coolant temperature gauge
moves toward the red zone:
A warning lamp illuminates and
a message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating
cylinder operation. Each disabled cylinder
acts as an air pump and cools the engine.

If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• You can decrease the coolant
concentration to 40%.
• Coolant concentrations below 40%
decrease the freeze and corrosion
protection characteristics of the
coolant and may cause engine
damage.

When this occurs, your vehicle still
operates, however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.

Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.

When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.

293

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated

4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools,
you can re-start the engine. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible to
minimize engine damage.
Note: Driving your vehicle without repair
increases the chance of engine damage.

WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will
have limited power, will not be able to
maintain high-speed operation, and may
completely shut down without warning,
potentially losing engine power, power
steering assist, and power brake assist,
which may increase the possibility of a
crash resulting in serious injury.

Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
crash and injury, be prepared that the
vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle
may not be able to accelerate with full
power until the coolant temperature
reduces.

If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long
or steep grade in high ambient
temperatures.

Your vehicle has limited engine power
when in the fail-safe mode, drive your
vehicle with caution. Your vehicle does not
maintain high-speed operation and the
engine may operate poorly.

At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.

Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:

You may notice a reduction in vehicle
speed caused by reduced engine power in
order to manage the engine coolant
temperature. Your vehicle may enter this
mode if certain high-temperature and
high-load conditions take place. The
amount of speed reduction depends on
vehicle loading, grade and ambient
temperature. If this occurs, there is no
need to stop your vehicle. You can
continue to drive.

Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend
that you contact your roadside
assistance service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short
period for the engine to cool.

294

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
The air conditioning may automatically
turn on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant
temperature decreases to the normal
operating temperature, the air conditioning
turns on.

Have an authorized dealer check and
change the transmission fluid at the
correct service interval. See Maintenance
(page 284). Your transmission does not
consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission is
not working properly, (i.e., if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly) or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.

If the coolant temperature gauge moves
fully into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine
soon messages appear in your information
display, do the following:
1.

3.
4.

Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives, treatments or cleaning
agents. The use of these materials may
affect transmission operation and result
in damage to internal transmission
components.

Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe
to do so. Fully apply the parking brake,
shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. After
several minutes, if the temperature
does not drop, follow the remaining
steps.
Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
If the coolant level is normal, restart
the engine and continue.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 3.5L DURATEC/
3.5L ECOBOOST™
Do not use supplemental transmission
fluid additives because they are
unnecessary and could lead to
transmission damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
The transmission does not consume fluid.
However, if the transmission slips or shifts
slowly you should check the fluid level. If
you notice a sign of leaking fluid, contact
an authorized dealer.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK - 2.3L
ECOBOOST™

Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level

Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.

WARNING: The dipstick and
surrounding components are hot. Use
gloves when moving components and
checking the transmission fluid level.
Failure to follow this warning could result
in serious personal injury.

295

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Note: If the fluid level is below the
minimum range do not drive your vehicle. A
low fluid level can damage the transmission.

Only check the transmission fluid level
when the engine is at normal operating
temperature 179°F (82°C)-199°F (93°C).
Normal operating temperature is reached
after driving approximately 20 mi (30 km).

Correct Fluid Level
If the fluid level is within the hash mark
area (between points A and B) do not add
any fluid.

High Fluid Level
If the fluid level is above the maximum
range (above point B) fluid may need to
be removed. High fluid levels may be
caused by a overheating condition. If you
have operated your vehicle at high speeds,
towing a trailer or in city traffic during hot
weather, allow your vehicle to cool for a
minimum of 30 minutes before rechecking
the level.

E190273

Minimum.

Maximum.

Note: Check the fluid level with the engine
running and the transmission in park (P).
1.
2.

Note: An overfill condition can damage the
transmission.

Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction. See Under Hood Overview
(page 286).
Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth. Replace
the cap and dipstick and remove it
again to check the fluid level.
Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
If the fluid level is at the MIN mark, add
fluid immediately. See Adding
Transmission Fluid.
Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.

Adding Transmission Fluid
1.

2.
3.

4.
5.

Low Fluid Level

If the fluid level is within the minimum
range (below point A) add the correct
specification fluid to be within the hash
mark area. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 354).

296

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Rotate the automatic transmission
fluid cap in a counterclockwise
direction.
Remove the cap and dipstick and wipe
it with a clean, lint-free cloth.
Add fluid that meets the Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 354). Pour the
fluid directly into the automatic
transmission fluid cap and dipstick
hole.
Replace the cap and dipstick and
remove it again to check the fluid level.
Make sure that the fluid level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks.
Replace the automatic transmission
fluid cap and dipstick. Turn it clockwise
until you feel a strong resistance.

Maintenance
*

Vehicles With Turbocharged Engines
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens,
rinse the affected areas immediately with
plenty of water and contact your physician.

WARNING: Do not start the engine
with the air filter removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty and can result in serious injury.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

WARNING: A fluid level between the
MAX and MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to
add fluid. A fluid level not in the normal
operating range could compromise the
performance of the system. Have your
vehicle checked immediately.

Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
Remove the air filter assembly securing
bolts.
Lift the air filter assembly to disengage
the locating pins.
Rotate the air filter assembly slightly
in a counterclockwise direction.
Check the transmission fluid level.
Install the air filter assembly in reverse
order. Tighten the air filter assembly
securing bolts until you feel a strong
resistance.

BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid
other than the recommended brake fluid
as this will reduce brake efficiency. Use of
incorrect fluid could result in the loss of
vehicle control, serious personal injury or
death.

E170684

To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.

WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with
dirt, water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage or failure. Failure to adhere to this
warning could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.

Only use fluid that meets Ford
specifications.

297

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID
CHECK

CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric
power steering (EPS) system. There is no
fluid reservoir to check or fill.

WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your
vehicle in temperatures below 41.0°F
(5°C), use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection. Failure to use washer fluid with
antifreeze protection in cold weather could
result in impaired windshield vision and
increase the risk of injury or accident.

WARNING: When lifting a
plastic-cased battery, excessive pressure
on the end walls could cause acid to flow
through the vent caps, resulting in personal
injury and damage to the vehicle or battery.
Lift the battery with a battery carrier or
with your hands on opposite corners.

Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.

Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is
low. Only use a washer fluid that meets
our specifications.
State or local regulations on volatile
organic compounds may restrict the use
of methanol, a common windshield washer
antifreeze additive. Washer fluids
containing non-methanol antifreeze
agents should be used only if they provide
cold weather protection without damaging
the vehicle’s paint finish, wiper blades or
washer system.

WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
reproductive harm. Wash your hands
after handling.
Your vehicle has a Motorcraft®
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water during
its life of service.
Note: If your vehicle's battery has a cover
or shield, make sure it is reinstalled after the
battery has been cleaned or replaced.
298

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Note: See an authorized dealer for low
voltage battery access, testing, or
replacement.

optimize the driveability and performance
of the engine. Some other computer
settings, like the clock and radio station
presets, are also maintained in memory by
power from the low voltage battery. When
a technician disconnects and connects the
low voltage battery, these settings are
erased. Complete the following procedure
in order to restore the settings:

When a low voltage battery replacement
is necessary, see an authorized dealer to
replace the low voltage battery with a Ford
recommended replacement low voltage
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.

With the vehicle at a complete stop,
set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into park (P).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Fully press the brake pedal and start
the vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the
engine is warming up, complete the
following: Reset the clock. See Audio
System (page 364). Reset the power
windows bounce-back feature. See
Windows and Mirrors (page 91).
Reset the radio station presets. See
Audio System (page 364).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute. If the engine turns off, press
the accelerator pedal to start the
engine.
7. While the engine is running, press the
brake pedal and shift into neutral (N).
8. Allow the engine to run for at least one
minute by pressing on the accelerator
pedal.
9. Drive the vehicle at least 12 mi (20 km)
to completely relearn the idle and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.

To ensure proper operation of the battery
management system (BMS), do not allow
a technician to connect any electrical
device ground connection directly to the
low voltage battery negative post. A
connection at the low voltage battery
negative post can cause inaccurate
measurements of the battery condition
and potential incorrect system operation.
Note: If a person adds electrical or
electronic accessories or components to the
vehicle, the accessories or components may
adversely affect the low voltage battery
performance and durability and may also
affect the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.
For longer, trouble-free operation, keep the
top of the battery clean and dry. Also,
make certain the battery cables are always
tightly fastened to the battery terminals.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
When a battery replacement is required,
the battery should only be replaced with
a Ford recommended replacement battery
that matches the electrical requirements
of the vehicle.
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are
maintained by power from the low voltage
battery. Some engine computer settings,
like the idle trim and fuel trim strategy,
299

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Front Wiper Blades

Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.

CHECKING THE WIPER
BLADES

E129990

Lift the wiper arm and then press the
wiper blade locking buttons together.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.

E142463

Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.

Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.

Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid
or water applied with a soft sponge or
cloth.

2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.

CHANGING THE WIPER
BLADES
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.

300

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Rear Window Wiper Blade

E142592

E183236

8 ft (2.4 m)

Ground to the center of the
headlamp high beam bulb

25 ft (7.6 m)

Horizontal reference line

Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure

1. Lift the wiper arm.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.

Park your vehicle on level ground
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) from a wall
or screen.
2. Measure the distance from the ground
to the center of the headlamp high
beam bulb and mark an 8 ft (2.4 m)
long horizontal reference line on the
wall or screen at this height.
Note: There may be an identifying mark on
the lens to help you locate the center line
of the headlamp high beam bulb. Refer to
the graphic below step 4.

Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
2. Remove the wiper blade.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.

ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment

Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.

If your vehicle has been involved in a crash,
have the aim of the headlamp beam
checked by an authorized dealer.

3. Switch on the low beam headlamps
and open the hood.

301

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance

E142465

4. On the wall or screen you will observe
a flat zone of high intensity light
located at the top of the beam pattern.
If the top edge of the flat zone of high
intensity light is not on the horizontal
reference line, adjust the aim of the
headlamp beam.

E203691

5. Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver or socket wrench, to turn
the adjuster clockwise or
counterclockwise to adjust the vertical
aim of the headlamp. The horizontal
edge of the brighter light should touch
the horizontal reference line.
6. Close the hood and switch off the
lamps.

302

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
Headlamp

REMOVING A HEADLAMP

E203696

E203692

To gain access to the headlamp securing
bolts and to remove the headlamp
assembly, you must first remove the front
fascia and front bumper assemblies. We
recommend you see an authorized dealer.

Headlamp high beam.

Front direction indicator.

Front Direction Indicator

CHANGING A BULB
WARNING: Switch the lamps and
the ignition off. Failure to do so could result
in serious personal injury.

WARNING: Bulbs can become hot.
Let the bulb cool down before removing it.
Failure to do so could result in personal
injury.
Use the correct specification bulb. See
Bulb Specification Chart (page 306).
Install in the reverse order unless otherwise
stated.

4
E203698

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.

303

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
LED Bulb (If Equipped)

3. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
4. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.

Rear Direction Indicator and
Reversing Lamp

Headlamp High Beam
Halogen Bulb

4
4
E203701

1.
2.

E203697

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
2. Carefully remove the cover.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector.
4. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Note: You cannot separate the bulb from
the bulb holder.

5.
6.
7.

Note: Do not touch the bulb glass.

304

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Switch all of the lamps and the ignition
off.
Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
screw covers.
Remove the retaining bolts from the
lamp assembly.
Gently pull the lamp assembly away
from the vehicle.
Release the wire from the securing clip.
Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

Maintenance
A

•
•

Brake and rear lamp.
Central high mounted brake lamp.

License Plate Lamp

6
1

2
3

E203702

Reverse lamp.

Rear direction indicator.

E203703

Use a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, to carefully remove the
lamp.
2. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise
and remove it.
3. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight
out.

LED Lamps
LED lamps are not serviceable items. See
an authorized dealer if they fail.
The following lamps are LED:
• Front fog lamps
• Front side marker lamps.
• Front signature lamps.
• Daytime running lamps.
• Headlamp high beam (If equipped).
• Headlamp low beam.
• Side direction indicator.
• Rear side marker lamp.

305

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
the proper lamp performance, light
brightness, light pattern and safe visibility.
The correct bulbs will not damage the
lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly
warranty and will provide quality bulb
illumination time.

BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the
chart below. Headlamp bulbs must be
marked with an authorized D.O.T. marking
for North America to make sure they have
Exterior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

Front side marker lamps.

LED

Front signature lamps.

LED

3757NAK

Front direction indicator.
Daytime running lamps.

LED

Headlamp low beam.

LED

9005LL

LED

Headlamp high beam (halogen).
Headlamp high beam (LED).
Front fog lamps.

LED

Side direction indicator.

LED

Rear side marker lamp.

LED

Brake and rear lamp.

LED

Central high mounted brake lamp.

LED

WY21W

Reversing lamps.

W21W

License plate lamp.

W5W

Rear direction indicator.

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.
Interior Lamps
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

Glove compartment lamp.
Interior lamp.
Vanity mirror lamp.

306

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

194

W5W

A6224PF

Maintenance
Lamp

Specification

Power (Watt)

W5W

Rear dome lamp.

LED

Luggage compartment lamp.

LED

Overhead console lamp.

Note: LED lamps are not serviceable. See an authorized dealer if they fail.

307

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Maintenance
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter
the air induction system. Engine
components are susceptible to damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 499).
Incorrect component use can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle
Warranty. See Motorcraft Parts (page
345).

E200522

To replace the air filter element do the
following:

1.
2.
3.
4.

6.
7.

308

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Remove the clips that secure the air
filter housing cover.
Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
Remove the air filter element from the
air filter housing.
Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
Install a new air filter element. Be
careful not to crimp the filter element
edges between the air filter housing
and cover. This could cause filter
damage and allow unfiltered air to
enter the engine if it is not properly
seated.
Install the air filter housing cover.
Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.

Vehicle Care
GENERAL INFORMATION

CLEANING PRODUCTS

Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.

Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:

Name

Specification

Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M5B194-B

Motorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)

ESR-M14P4-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P3-A

Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. &
Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with
Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37A/B/D/F (Canada)

WSS-M14P19-A

Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner,
ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)

ESR-M14P5-A

Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
•

CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH
shampoo, we recommend Motorcraft
Detail Wash.

•

309

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.

Vehicle Care
•

•

Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’s paintwork or trim over time.
We recommend Motorcraft Bug and
Tar Remover.
Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a
car wash.
When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces
immediately.

Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.

Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease
spots are present, we recommend
Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover.

Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
•

Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.

•
•
•

Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.

Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
Do not use water hotter than 179°F
(82°C).
Use a spray with a 40° wide spray
angle pattern.
Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your
vehicle's surface.

Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when
they are dry.

Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.

Exterior Chrome Parts

Underbody

•

Regularly clean the underside of your
vehicle using water. Keep body and door
drain holes free of debris or foreign
material.

•

Apply a high quality-cleaning product
to bumpers and other chrome parts.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
We recommend Motorcraft Custom
Bright Metal Cleaner.
Do not apply the cleaning product to
hot surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer
than the time recommended.
Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent
cosmetic damage.

Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from
under the hood we recommend Motorcraft
Wheel and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.

Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.

310

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Vehicle Care
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold
water to avoid cracking the engine
block or other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine
Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or
the area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution
box, and air filter assembly to prevent
water damage when cleaning the
engine.

WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your
vehicle in a shaded area out of direct
sunlight. Always wash your vehicle before
applying wax.
•
•
•
•

•
•

Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions
to apply and remove the wax.
Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
Do not allow wax to come in contact
with any non-body (low-gloss black)
colored trim. The wax will discolor or
stain the parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
Do not apply wax to glass areas.
After waxing, your car's paint should
feel smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.

CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.

CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.

311

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Vehicle Care
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats and seats
equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength
Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner.
• If grease or tar is present on the
material, spot-clean the area first with
Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Multi-Purpose
Cleaner.
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate)
or the ring will set.
• Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can
stain and discolor the fabric and affect
the flame retardant abilities of the seat
materials.

To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a
non-abrasive glass cleaner. When
cleaning the interior of the windshield,
avoid getting any glass cleaner on the
instrument panel or door panels. Wipe
any glass cleaner off these surfaces
immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with
tree sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean
the entire windshield using steel wool
(no greater than 0000 grade) in a
circular motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals
from the inside of the heated rear window.
The vehicle warranty does not cover
damage caused to the heated rear window
grid lines.

CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS

CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle's
seatbelts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.

WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when
cleaning the steering wheel or instrument
panel to avoid contamination of the airbag
system.

WARNING: On vehicles equipped
with seat-mounted airbags, do not use
chemical solvents or strong detergents.
Such products could contaminate the side
airbag system and affect performance of
the side airbag in a crash.

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats
(page 313).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster
lens with a clean, damp and soft cloth,
then use a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry
these areas.

312

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from
undesirable windshield reflection.
Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these
may damage the finish of the
instrument panel, interior trim and
cluster lens.
Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.

6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.

CLEANING LEATHER SEATS (If
Equipped)

Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
For cleaning and removing stains such as
dye transfer, use Motorcraft Premium
Leather and Vinyl Cleaner or a
commercially available leather cleaning
product for automotive interiors.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.

If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1.
2.

You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as
soon as possible.

Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean,
soft cloth as quickly as possible.
Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially
available leather cleaning product for
automotive interiors. Test any cleaner
or stain remover on an inconspicuous
area.
Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a
clean, soft cloth.
If necessary, apply more soap and
water solution or cleaning product to
a clean, soft cloth and press it onto the
soiled area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing
motion for 60 seconds on the soiled
area.

Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended
specifically for rubber, vinyl and
plastics.

313

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Vehicle Care
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.

REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’s color. Your vehicle
color code is printed on a sticker on the
front, left-hand side door jamb. Take your
color code to your authorized dealer to
make sure you get the correct color.

VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make
sure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.

Before repairing minor paint damage, use
a cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.

We engineer and test all motor vehicles
and their components for reliable, regular
driving. Under various conditions,
long-term storage may lead to degraded
engine performance or failure unless you
use specific precautions to preserve engine
components.

Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.

CLEANING THE WHEELS (If
Equipped)

General

Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use
Ford approved wheel cleaner if
available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you
use Ford approved bug and tar remover
if available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.

•

If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This
reduces the risk of corrosion of the brake
discs, brake pads and linings.

•

•
•

Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
Protect from sunlight, if possible.
If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.

Body
•

•
•

Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.

•

314

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wash your vehicle thoroughly to
remove dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from
exterior surfaces, rear-wheel housing
and the underside of front fenders.
Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary
when you wash your vehicle.
Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with
a light grade oil.

Vehicle Care
•
•

Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.

Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.

Brakes

Engine
•

•

Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil
contains contaminates which may
cause engine damage.
Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
With your foot on the brake, shift
through all the gears while the engine
is running.
We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.

Tires
•

•

When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt
or grease film build-up on window
surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage such as mice or squirrel
nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected
during storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire
inflation per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive
your vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and
forth to remove rust build-up.

Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the
fuel pump nozzle.

Protect against freezing temperatures.
When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling
system leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.

Battery
•
•

Make sure all linkages, cables, levers
and pins under your vehicle are covered
with grease to prevent rust.
Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m)
every 15 days to lubricate working parts
and prevent corrosion.

Removing Vehicle From Storage

Cooling system
•
•

Maintain recommended air pressure.

Miscellaneous

Fuel system
•

Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.

Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery,
we recommend that you disconnect
the battery cables to maintain battery
charge for quick starting.

315

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Vehicle Care
•

•

Check fluid levels (including coolant,
oil and gas) to make sure there are no
leaks, and fluids are at recommended
levels.
If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.

Contact an authorized dealer if you have
any concerns or issues.

316

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
Notice to utility vehicle and truck
owners

GENERAL INFORMATION
Use only approved wheel and tire sizes,
using other sizes could damage your
vehicle. If you change the diameter of the
tires from that fitted at the factory, the
speedometer may not display the correct
speed. If you intend to change the size of
the wheels from that fitted by the
manufacturer, you can check the suitability
with an authorized dealer.

WARNING: Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other
types of vehicles.
WARNING: Vehicles with a higher
center of gravity (utility and four-wheel
drive vehicles) handle differently than
vehicles with a lower center of gravity
(passenger cars). Avoid sharp turns,
excessive speed and abrupt steering in
these vehicles. Failure to drive cautiously
increases the risk of losing control of your
vehicle, vehicle rollover, personal injury and
death.

Additional information related to the
functionality and maintenance of your tires
can be found later in this chapter. See Tire
Care (page 319).
You can find the recommended tire
inflation pressures can on the Tire Label,
which is on the B-pillar or the edge of the
driver door. You can also find this
information on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label, affixed to either the
door hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door latch post;
next to the driver seating position.

WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.

We strongly recommend maintaining these
tire pressures at all times. Failure to follow
the tire pressure recommendations can
cause uneven treadwear patterns, reduced
fuel economy, and adversely affect the
way your vehicle handles.
Note: Check and set the tire pressure at the
ambient temperature in which you are
intending to drive your vehicle and when the
tires are cold.

Utility vehicles and trucks handle
differently than passenger cars in the
various driving conditions that are
encountered on streets, highways and
off-road. Utility vehicles and trucks are not
designed for cornering at speeds as high
as passenger cars any more than low-slung
sports cars are designed to perform
satisfactorily under off-road conditions.

Note: Check your tire pressures at least
once per month.
If your vehicle has a spare tire, set the
pressure to the highest value given for your
vehicle and tire size combination.

317

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
In four-wheel drive vehicles, the size of the
spare tire relative to the remaining tires can
have an effect on the 4x4 system. If there
is a significant difference between the size
of a spare and the remaining tires,
four-wheel drive functionality may be
limited. See Principle of Operation (page
191).

Study your owner's manual and any
supplements for specific information about
equipment features, instructions for safe
driving and additional precautions to
reduce the risk of an accident or serious
injury.

Four-wheel drive system (If Equipped)

How your vehicle differs from
other vehicles

WARNING: Do not become
overconfident in the ability of four-wheel
drive vehicles. Although a four-wheel drive
vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in low traction
situations, it won't stop any faster than
two-wheel drive vehicles. Always drive at
a safe speed.

Sport utility vehicles and trucks can differ
from some other vehicles in a few
noticeable ways. Your vehicle may be:
•

•

A vehicle equipped with four-wheel drive,
when selected, has the ability to use all
four wheels to power itself. This increases
traction which may enable you to safely
drive over terrain and road conditions that
a conventional two-wheel drive vehicle
cannot.
Power is supplied to all four wheels
through a transfer case or power transfer
unit. Four-wheel drive vehicles allow you
to select different modes as necessary. For
information on transfer case operation and
shifting procedures, See Four-Wheel
Drive (page 191). For information on
transfer case maintenance, See
Maintenance (page 284). You should
become thoroughly familiar with this
information before you operate your
vehicle.

•

Higher - to allow higher load carrying
capacity and to allow it to travel over
rough terrain without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
Shorter - to give it the capability to
approach inclines and drive over the
crest of a hill without getting hung up
or damaging underbody components.
All other things held equal, a shorter
wheelbase may make your vehicle
quicker to respond to steering inputs
than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase.
Narrower - to provide greater
maneuverability in tight spaces,
particularly in off-road use.

As a result of the above dimensional
differences, Sport utility vehicles and
trucks often have a higher center of gravity
and a greater difference in center of gravity
between the loaded and unloaded
condition. These differences that make
your vehicle so versatile also make it
handle differently than an ordinary
passenger car.

On some four-wheel drive vehicles, the
initial shift from two-wheel to four-wheel
drive when the vehicle is moving can cause
a momentary clunk and ratcheting sound.
These sounds are normal and are not
cause for concern.

318

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
U.S. Department of
Transportation Tire quality
grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford
Motor Company to give you the
following information about tire
grades exactly as the government
has written it.

TIRE CARE
Information About Uniform
Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a
comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150
would wear 1½ times as well on
the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative
performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.

E142542

Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
The Quality grades can be found
where applicable on the tire
sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For
example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the
United States Department of
Transportation has set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires.
They do not apply to deep tread,
winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use
spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim
diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined
in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 (c)(2).

Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based
on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.

319

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 139. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum
required by law.

The traction grades, from highest
to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The
grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.

Glossary of Tire Terminology
*Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure
and the maximum weight the
vehicle can carry.
*Tire Identification Number
(TIN): A number on the sidewall
of each tire providing information
about the tire brand and
manufacturing plant, tire size and
date of manufacture. Also referred
to as DOT code.
*Inflation pressure: A measure
of the amount of air in a tire.
*Standard load: A class of
P-metric or Metric tires designed
to carry a maximum load at set
pressure. For example: For
P-metric tires 35 psi (2.4 bar) and
for Metric tires 36 psi (2.5 bar).
Increasing the inflation pressure
beyond this pressure will not
increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
*Extra load: A class of P-metric
or Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load
carrying capability.

Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A
(the highest), B and C,
representing the tire’s resistance
to the generation of heat and its
ability to dissipate heat when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger
car tires must meet under the

320

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
Information Contained on the
Tire Sidewall

*kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of
air pressure.
*PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
*Cold tire pressure: The tire
pressure when the vehicle has
been stationary and out of direct
sunlight for an hour or more and
prior to the vehicle being driven for
1 mi (1.6 km).
*Recommended inflation
pressure: The cold inflation
pressure found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door
edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on
the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver door.
* B-pillar: The structural member
at the side of the vehicle behind
the front door.
*Bead area of the tire: Area of
the tire next to the rim.
* Sidewall of the tire: Area
between the bead area and the
tread.
*Tread area of the tire: Area of
the perimeter of the tire that
contacts the road when mounted
on the vehicle.
*Rim: The metal support (wheel)
for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire
beads are seated.

C D
B

G
H

E142543

P215/65R15 95H is an example of
a tire size, load index and speed
rating. The definitions of these
items are listed below. (Note that
the tire size, load index and speed
rating for your vehicle may be
different from this example.)
321

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed
rating. The speed rating denotes
the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extended
periods of time under a standard
condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle
may operate at different
conditions for load and inflation
pressure. These speed ratings may
need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The
ratings range from 81 mph
(130 km/h) to 186 mph
(299 km/h). These ratings are
listed in the following chart.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.

A. P: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that may be used for service on
cars, sport utility vehicles,
minivans and light trucks. Note: If
your tire size does not begin with
a letter this may mean it is
designated by either the European
Tire and Rim Technical
Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load
index. It is an index that relates to
how much weight a tire can carry.
You may find this information in
your owner’s manual. If not,
contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this
information on all tires because it
is not required by federal law.

322

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Letter
rating

Speed rating

81 mph (130 km/h)

87 mph (140 km/h)

99 mph (159 km/h)

106 mph (171 km/h)

112 mph (180 km/h)

118 mph (190 km/h)

124 mph (200 km/h)

130 mph (210 km/h)

149 mph (240 km/h)

Wheels and Tires
Letter
rating

Speed rating

168 mph (270 km/h)

J. Tire Ply Composition and
Material Used: Indicates the
number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate
the ply materials in the tire and the
sidewall, which include steel,
nylon, polyester, and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and
pounds that can be carried by the
tire. See the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), for the correct tire
pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
*Treadwear The treadwear grade
is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when
tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.

Y
186 mph (299 km/h)
Note: For tires with a maximum
speed capability over 149 mph
(240 km/h), tire manufacturers
sometimes use the letters ZR. For
those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299
km/h), tire manufacturers always
use the letters ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN): This begins with
the letters DOT and indicates that
the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers
or letters are the plant code
designating where it was
manufactured, the next two are
the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and
year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.

323

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
*Traction: The traction grades,
from highest to lowest are AA, A,
B, and C. The grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
*Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and
C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation
Pressure: Indicates the tire
manufacturers' maximum
permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum
load can be carried by the tire. This
pressure is normally higher than
the vehicle manufacturer's
recommended cold inflation
pressure which can be found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post,
next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be
set lower than the recommended
pressure on the vehicle label.

The tire suppliers may have
additional markings, notes or
warnings such as standard load
or radial tubeless.
Additional Information
Contained on the Tire Sidewall
for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.

D
E142544

LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association,
that is intended for service on light
trucks.
B. Load Range and Load
Inflation Limits: Indicates the
tire's load-carrying capabilities
and its inflation limits.
324

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg)
at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates the
maximum load and tire pressure
when the tire is used as a dual,
defined as four tires on the rear
axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb
(kg) at psi (kPa) cold: Indicates
the maximum load and tire
pressure when the tire is used as
a single, defined as two tires
(total) on the rear axle.

B
A

D
E

Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a
tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for
your vehicle may be different from
this example. Tire Quality Grades
do not apply to this type of tire.
E142545

T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P
type tires; these differences are
described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire,
designated by the Tire and Rim
Association, that is intended for
temporary service on cars, sport
utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal
width of the tire in millimeters
from sidewall edge to sidewall
edge. In general, the larger the
number, the wider the tire.

325

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio
which gives the tire's ratio of
height to width. Numbers of 70 or
lower indicate a short sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change
your wheel size, you will have to
purchase new tires to match the
new wheel diameter.

of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling
resistance, resulting in heat
buildup and internal damage to
the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular
wear, loss of vehicle control and
accidents. A tire can lose up to
half of its air pressure and not
appear to be flat!
You are strongly urged to buy a
reliable tire pressure gauge, as
automatic service station gauges
may be inaccurate. Ford
recommends the use of a digital
or dial-type tire pressure gauge
rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge. Use the
recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire
performance and wear.
Under-inflation or over-inflation
may cause uneven treadwear
patterns.
Always inflate your tires to the
Ford recommended inflation
pressure even if it is less than the
maximum inflation pressure
information found on the tire. You
will find a Tire Label containing
the Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure by the tire size
and other important information
located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver’s door.

Recommended Tire Pressures
and Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle
requires that your tires are
properly inflated. Remember that
a tire can lose up to half of its air
pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check
your tires. If one looks lower than
the others, use a tire gauge to
check the pressure of all tires and
adjust if required.
At least once a month and before
long trips, inspect each tire and
check the tire pressure with a tire
gauge (including spare, if
equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended
by Ford Motor Company.
WARNING: Under-inflation
is the most common cause of tire
failures and may result in severe
tire cracking, tread separation or
blowout, with unexpected loss of
vehicle control and increased risk

326

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
The Ford recommended tire
inflation pressure is also found on
the Safety Compliance
Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch on the
B-pillar, or on the edge of the
driver’s door.
Failure to follow the tire pressure
recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your
vehicle handles.

Improper or inadequate vehicle
maintenance can cause tires to
wear abnormally. Inspect all your
tires, including the spare,
frequently, and replace them if
one or more of the following
conditions exist:
Tire Wear

Inspecting Your Tires and
Wheel Valve Stems
Periodically inspect the tire treads
for uneven or excessive wear and
remove objects such as stones,
nails or glass that may be wedged
in the tread grooves. Check the tire
and valve stems for holes, cracks,
or cuts that may permit air
leakage and repair or replace the
tire and replace the valve stem.
Inspect the tire sidewalls for
cracking, cuts, bruises and other
signs of damage or excessive
wear. If internal damage to the tire
is suspected, have the tire
demounted and inspected in case
it needs to be repaired or replaced.
For your safety, tires that are
damaged or show signs of
excessive wear should not be used
because they are more likely to
blow out or fail.

E142546

When the tread is worn down to
one sixteenth of an inch (2 mm),
tires must be replaced to help
prevent your vehicle from skidding
and hydroplaning. Built-in
treadwear indicators, or wear bars,
which look like narrow strips of
smooth rubber across the tread
will appear on the tire when the
tread is worn down to one
sixteenth of an inch (2 mm).
When the tire tread wears down
to the same height as these wear
bars, the tire is worn out and must
be replaced.

327

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number

Damage
Periodically inspect the tire treads
and sidewalls for damage (such
as bulges in the tread or sidewalls,
cracks in the tread groove and
separation in the tread or
sidewall). If damage is observed
or suspected, have the tire
inspected by a tire professional.
Tires can be damaged during
off-road use, so inspection after
off-road use is also
recommended.

Both United States and Canada
Federal regulations require tire
manufacturers to place
standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This
information identifies and
describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire
Identification Number for safety
standard certification and in case
of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards. The next
two numbers or letters are the
plant code designating where it
was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last
four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For
example, the numbers 317 mean
the 31st week of 1997. After 2000,
the numbers go to four digits. For
example, 2501 means the 25th
week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes
used for traceability. This
information is used to contact
customers if a tire defect requires
a recall.

Age
WARNING: Tires degrade
over time depending on many
factors such as weather, storage
conditions, and conditions of use
(load, speed, inflation pressure)
the tires experience throughout
their lives.
In general, tires should be
replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat
caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading conditions
can accelerate the aging process
and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire
when you replace the road tires or
after six years due to aging even if
it has not been used.

Tire Replacement
Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride
and handling capability.

328

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires

WARNING: Only use
replacement tires and wheels that
are the same size, load index,
speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or
all-season versus all-terrain) as
those originally provided by Ford.
The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the
Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), or the
Tire Label which is located on the
B-Pillar or edge of the driver's
door. If this information is not
found on these labels, then you
should contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible. Use of
any tire or wheel not
recommended by Ford can affect
the safety and performance of
your vehicle, which could result in
an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.

WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the
maximum pressure, a Ford dealer
or other tire service professional
should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate
steel carcass tires with a remote
air fill with the person inflating
standing at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
WARNING: When inflating
the tire for mounting pressures up
to 20 psi (1.38 bar) greater than
the maximum pressure on the tire
sidewall, the following
precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the
tire:
•

Make sure that you have the
correct tire and wheel size.
• Lubricate the tire bead and
wheel bead seat area again.
• Stand at a minimum of 12 ft
(3.66 m) away from the wheel
and tire assembly.
• Use both eye and ear
protection.
Important: Remember to replace
the wheel valve stems when the
road tires are replaced on your
vehicle.
It is recommended that the two
front tires or two rear tires
generally be replaced as a pair.

WARNING: To reduce the
risk of serious injury, when
mounting replacement tires and
wheels, you should not exceed the
maximum pressure indicated on
the sidewall of the tire to set the
beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the
beads do not seat at the
maximum pressure indicated,
re-lubricate and try again.

329

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
*Avoid potholes and objects on
the road
*Do not run over curbs or hit the
tire against a curb when parking

The tire pressure sensors mounted
in the wheels (originally installed
on your vehicle) are not designed
to be used in aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor
Company may affect the
operation of your tire pressure
monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring
system indicator is flashing, your
system is malfunctioning. Your
replacement tire might be
incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or
some component of the system
may be damaged.

Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive,
there is always the possibility that
you may eventually have a flat tire
on the highway. Drive slowly to the
closest safe area out of traffic.
This may further damage the flat
tire, but your safety is more
important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or
ride disturbance while driving, or
you suspect your tire or vehicle
has been damaged, immediately
reduce your speed. Drive with
caution until you can safely pull
off the road. Stop and inspect the
tires for damage. If a tire is
under-inflated or damaged,
deflate it, remove wheel and
replace it with your spare tire and
wheel. If you cannot detect a
cause, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest repair facility or tire
dealer to have the vehicle
inspected.

Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is
stuck in snow, mud or sand, do not
rapidly spin the tires; spinning the
tires can tear the tire and cause
an explosion. A tire can explode in
as little as three to five seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the
wheels at over 34 mph (55 km/h).
The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
Driving habits have a great deal
to do with your tire mileage and
safety.
*Observe posted speed limits
*Avoid fast starts, stops and turns

330

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
Tire and Wheel Alignment

Note: Your vehicle may be
equipped with a dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly. A
dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is
different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and
wheels. If you have a dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, it is
intended for temporary use only
and should not be used in a tire
rotation.
Note: After having your tires
rotated, inflation pressure must be
checked and adjusted to the
vehicle requirements.
Rotating your tires at the
recommended interval will help
your tires wear more evenly,
providing better tire performance
and longer tire life. Sometimes
irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page
499).

A bad jolt from hitting a curb or
pothole can cause the front end
of your vehicle to become
misaligned or cause damage to
your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you are
driving, the wheels may be out of
alignment. Have an authorized
dealer check the wheel alignment
periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front
or the rear can cause uneven and
rapid treadwear of your tires and
should be corrected by an
authorized dealer. Front-wheel
drive vehicles and those with an
independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment
of all four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire
and wheel assembly may result in
irregular tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven
wear, ask an authorized dealer to
check for and correct any wheel
misalignment, tire imbalance or
mechanical problem involved
before tire rotation.

E142547

331

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS

USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior
performance on wet and dry roads.
Summer tires do not have the Mud and
Snow (M+S or M/S) tire traction rating on
the tire side wall. Since summer tires do
not have the same traction performance
as All-season or Snow tires, we do not
recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear
and environmental conditions) or in snow
and ice conditions. Like any tire, summer
tire performance is affected by tire wear
and environmental conditions. If you must
drive in those conditions, we recommend
using Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S),
All-season or Snow tires.

WARNING: Snow tires must be the
same size, load index, and speed rating as
those originally provided by Ford. Use of
any tire or wheel not recommended by
Ford can affect the safety and
performance of your vehicle, which could
result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover, personal injury,
and death. Additionally, the use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case, or power transfer unit failure. It is also
strongly advised to follow the Ford
recommended tire inflation pressure found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver’s seating position), or Tire Label
which is located on the B-Pillar or the edge
of the driver door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and adversely
affect the way your vehicle handles.

Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The
rubber compounds used in these tires lose
flexibility and may develop surface cracks
in the tread area at temperatures below
19°F (-7°C). If the tires have been
subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or less, warm
them in a heated space to at least 41°F
(5°C) for at least 24 hours before installing
them on a vehicle, or moving the vehicle
with the tires installed, or checking tire
inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply
heat or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage
periods and before use.

The tires on your vehicle (excluding the
265/45ZR20 Sport Tire) may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in
rain and snow. However, in some climates
you may need to use snow chains.
Your vehicle may not be compatible with
snow chain or cable usage with the
factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only
certain chains or snow cables have been
approved by Ford as safe for use on your
vehicle with the following wheel and tire
combination(s): 18”x8”x44mm Wheel and
P245/60 R18 Tire. You should only install
chains or cables that have been rated as
10 mm or less in dimension as measured
on the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-class
snow chains meet these restrictions.
Chains of this size restriction will include a

332

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
tensioning device. The chains should be
mounted in pairs on the front tires only. If
you need to use chains, it is recommended
that steel wheels (of the same size and
specification) be used, as chains may chip
aluminum wheels.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You
should periodically check tire pressures
using a pressure gauge. Failure to correctly
maintain tire pressures could increase the
risk of tire failure, loss of control, vehicle
rollover and personal injury.

Follow these guidelines when using snow
tires and traction devices
•
•

•

If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body
to tire dimension restrictions.
When driving with tire cables do not
exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer, whichever is less.
Drive cautiously. If you hear the cables
rub or bang against the vehicle, stop
and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the cables to prevent
vehicle damage.
Remove the cables when they are no
longer needed. Do not use cables on
dry roads.
If a temporary spare wheel is mounted
on your vehicle, do not use snow chains
on the axle with the temporary spare
tire.

Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated
to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different size
than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires).

If you have any questions regarding snow
chains or cables, please contact your
authorized dealer.

As an added safety feature, your vehicle
has been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

333

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
significantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

2. This device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.

Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance, and
it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.

Changing Tires With a Tire
Pressure Monitoring System

Your vehicle has also been equipped with
a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
when the system is not operating properly.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure
telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence
will continue upon subsequent vehicle
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able
to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alternate
tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.

E142549

Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and is
not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at
least monthly) using an accurate tire
gauge. See When Inflating Your Tires in
this chapter.

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation
is subject to the following two conditions:
1.

This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

334

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System

When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly

E250820

The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 105). The
low tire pressure warning light will turn on
if the tire pressure is significantly low. Once
the light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to
the manufacturer’s recommended tire
pressure. Even if the light turns on and a
short time later turns off, your tire pressure
still needs to be checked.

The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when
your tires need air. It can also warn you in
the event the system is no longer capable
of functioning as intended. See the
following chart for information concerning
your tire pressure monitoring system:

335

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires

Low tire pressure
warning light

Possible cause

Customer action required

Tire(s) under-inflated

Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires in this
chapter. After inflating your tires to the
manufacturer’s recommended pressure
as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar),
the vehicle must be driven for at least
two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h)
before the light turns off.

Spare tire in use

Repair the damaged road wheel and tire
assembly and reinstall it on the vehicle
to restore system function. For a
description on how the system functions,
see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Spare tire in use

TPMS malfunction

If the tires are properly inflated and the
spare tire is not in use but the light
remains on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.

Solid warning light

Flashing warning
light

When putting air into your tires (such as at
a gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not
respond immediately to the air added to
your tires.

When Inflating Your Tires

WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information
display as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.

It may take up to two minutes of driving
over 20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn
off after you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.

336

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
heavily apply the brake. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe
place on the side of the road.

How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system
monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic
tire. While driving in a normal manner, a
typical passenger tire inflation pressure
may increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa)
from a cold start situation. If the vehicle is
stationary overnight with the outside
temperature significantly lower than the
daytime temperature, the tire pressure may
decrease about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of
30°F (17°C) in ambient temperature. This
lower pressure value may be detected by
the tire pressure monitoring system as
being significantly lower than the
recommended inflation pressure and
activate the system warning light for low
tire pressure. If the low tire pressure
warning light is on, visually check each tire
to verify that no tire is flat. If one or more
tires are flat, repair as necessary. Check
the air pressure in the road tires. If any tire
is under-inflated, carefully drive the vehicle
to the nearest location where air can be
added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.

Have a flat serviced by an authorized
dealer in order to prevent damage to the
tire pressure monitoring system sensors.
See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 333). Replace the spare tire with a
road tire as soon as possible. During
repairing or replacing of the flat tire, have
the authorized dealer inspect the tire
pressure monitoring system sensor for
damage.

Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and
tire, then it is intended for temporary use
only. This means that if you need to use it,
you should replace it as soon as possible
with a road wheel and tire assembly that
is the same size and type as the road tires
and wheels that were originally provided
by Ford. If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel
is damaged, it should be replaced rather
than repaired.

CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL
WARNING: If the tire pressure
monitor sensor becomes damaged it may
not function.

A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
is defined as a spare wheel and tire
assembly that is different in brand, size or
appearance from the road tires and wheels
and can be one of three types:

Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.

1. T-type mini-spare: This spare tire
begins with the letter T for tire size and
may have Temporary Use Only molded in
the sidewall.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.

337

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
The usage of a full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.

2. Full-size dissimilar spare with label
on wheel: This spare tire has a label on
the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND
TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE
ONLY.
When driving with one of the dissimilar
spare tires listed above, do not:
•
•

•
•
•
•
•

Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
Tow a trailer.
Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
Use commercial car washing
equipment.
Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly additional
caution should be given to:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a
camper body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the
cargo rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
and seek service as soon as possible.

Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires
listed above at any one wheel location can
lead to impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.

Tire Change Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front
wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).

3. Full-size dissimilar spare without
label on wheel

WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a
wheel, shift the transmission into park (P),
set the parking brake and use an
appropriate block or wheel chock to secure
the wheel diagonally opposite to the wheel
being changed. For example, when
changing the front left wheel, place an
appropriate block or wheel chock on the
right rear wheel.

When driving with the full-size dissimilar
spare wheel and tire assembly, do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing
equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
338

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires

WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support.
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to
change a tire on the side of the vehicle
close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.

E194295

4. Turn the two knobs on the floor filler
counterclockwise, then remove the
floor filler and carpeted floor panel
located in the rear of the vehicle.

WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you
are unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
Note: Jack at the specified locations to
avoid damage to the vehicle.
1.

Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off.

E226763

5. Remove the wing nut securing the
spare tire by turning it
counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare
tire well.
7. Remove the wing nut bolt that secures
the jack kit by turning it
counterclockwise.
8. Remove the jack kit, which includes the
jack, lug wrench, L-shaped bolt and
tow recovery hook.

E142551

3. Block the diagonally opposite wheel.

339

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires
15.

9. Turn the lead screw, where the lug
wrench attaches, of the jack by hand
to release the lug wrench from the jack.
Press the button on the wrench to
extend the handle. Fold down the
wrench socket.
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is off
the ground.

Replace the flat tire with the spare
tire, marking sure the valve stem is
facing outward. Reinstall the lug nuts
until the wheel is snug against the
hub. Do not fully tighten the lug nuts
until the wheel has been lowered.
Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.

16.

1
4

E145908

11.

12.

The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and are depicted on the warning
label on the jack.
Small arrow-shaped marks on the
sills show the location of the jacking
points.

E75442

17.

Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page
341).

Stowing the flat tire
1.

E201156

13.
14.

Raise the wheel by turning the jack
handle clockwise.
Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.

340

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Stand the flat tire vertically in the
mini-spare tub with the tire's valve
stem facing rearward toward the
luggage compartment.

Wheels and Tires
Stowing the jack

E194296

2. Fasten the flat tire to the luggage
compartment back panel by inserting
the L-shaped bolt through one of the
lug bolt holes in the wheel.
3. Turn the L-shaped bolt clockwise into
the threaded hole in the luggage
compartment back panel until the tire
is secured.
4. Unblock the diagonally opposite wheel.

E194297

With the road wheel in the vertical position
in the spare tire tub, the jack assembly
does not fit in its standard position. Secure
the jack in the alternate position by
inserting the wing bolt through the jack as
shown.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign
materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub,
brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that
attach the rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the
wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at the wheel mounting
surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle
is in motion, resulting in loss of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
Bolt size

Ib-ft (Nm)

1/2-20 x 1.5

100 (135)

Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford
recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any
wheel disturbance (such as tire rotation, changing a flat tire, wheel removal).

341

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Wheels and Tires

E145950

Wheel pilot bore

Inspect the wheel pilot bore and
mounting surface prior to installation.
Remove any visible corrosion or loose
particles.

342

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Engine

2.3L EcoBoost

Cubic inches

138

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-3-4-2

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.027 - 0.031 in (0.70 - 0.80 mm)

Compression ratio

10:1

Drivebelt Routing
2.3L EcoBoost Engine

B
E161383

Long drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine.

Short drivebelt is on second
pulley groove farthest from
engine.

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC

343

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Engine

3.5L V6

Cubic inches

214

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.049 - 0.053 in (1.25 mm - 1.35 mm)

Compression ratio

10.8:1

Drivebelt Routing
3.5L Engine

E191904

ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Engine

3.5L EcoBoost

Cubic inches

214

Required fuel

Minimum 87 octane

Firing order

1-4-2-5-3-6

Ignition system

Coil on plug

Spark plug gap

0.033 - 0.037 in (0.75 mm - 0.85 mm)

Compression ratio

10.0:1

344

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing

3.5L EcoBoost Engine

E191904

MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Component

Part Number

Air filter element

FA-1884

Oil filter

FL-910-S

Battery

BXT-59
*

BXT-65-650
Spark plugs

SP-537

Cabin air filter

FP-68

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2600 (driver side)
WW-2206 (passenger side)

Rear window wiper blade
*

WW-1106

This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.

We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Ford dealer or at
fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts meet or exceed Ford Motor
Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may
impact vehicle performance, emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any
damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance
specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the
appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance (page 499).

345

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L DURATEC
Component

Part Number

Air filter element

FA-1884

Oil filter

FL-500-S

Battery

BXT-59
*

BXT-65-650
Spark plugs

SP-520

Cabin air filter

FP-68

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2600 (driver side)
WW-2206 (passenger side)

Rear window wiper blade
*

WW-1106

This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.

346

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™
Component

Part Number

Air filter element

FA-1884

Oil filter

FL-500-S

Battery

BXT-59
*

BXT-65-650
Spark plugs

SP-534

Cabin air filter

FP-68

Windshield wiper blade

WW-2600 (driver side)
WW-2206 (passenger side)

Rear window wiper blade
*

WW-1106

This Motorcraft part is designed for vehicles with Intelligent Access.

347

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is
located on the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.

E142477

E142476

Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:

348

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

World manufacturer identifier

Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations

Make, vehicle line, series, body
type

Engine type

Check digit

Model year

Assembly plant

Production sequence number

Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL

TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION

E167469
E167814

The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
may be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post,
or the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.

The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission
code along with the transmission
description.

Description

Code

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F35

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F55

Six-speed automatic transmission 6F50

349

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.3L ECOBOOST™
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (with oil filter)

5.7 qt (5.4 L)

Engine coolant
Brake fluid

11.6 qt (11 L)
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive)

2.11 pt (1.0 L)

Automatic transmission fluid

9.0 qt (8.5 L)

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (fourwheel drive)

23.7 fl oz (700 ml)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel tank

18.6 gal (70.4 L)

A/C refrigerant

2.81 lb (1.276 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil

7.3 fl oz (215 ml)

1 Approximate

dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

350

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-B1

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear axle fluid (U.S.)
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Canada)
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S.):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S.) WSL-M2C192-A
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)
WSL-M2C192-A
(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant

351

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

CXY-75W140-1L
Windshield washer fluid (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

•
•
•

If you use oil and fluids that do not meet
the defined specification and viscosity
grade, this may lead to:
• Component damage which is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
352

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Reduced engine performance.
Reduced fuel economy.
Degraded brake performance.

Capacities and Specifications
We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.

Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates

E142732

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.

To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP

WSS-M2C953-A1

353

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications

E240523

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L DURATEC
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (with oil filter)

6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant (without trailer tow)

13.1 qt (12.4 L)

Engine coolant (with trailer tow)

13.4 qt (12.7 L)

Brake fluid

Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive)

2.11 pt (1.0 L)

Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)

10.9 qt (10.3 L)

Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)

11.6 qt (11 L)

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (fourwheel drive)

17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

354

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Item

Capacity

Fuel tank

18.6 gal (70.4 L)

A/C refrigerant (front wheel drive)

2.56 lb (1.16 kg)

A/C refrigerant (four-wheel drive)

2.38 lb (1.08 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil (front wheel
drive)

6.6 fl oz (195 ml)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil (four-wheel
drive)

7.3 fl oz (215 ml)

1 Approximate

dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C945-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W20-QSP
Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W20-LSP12

WSS-M2C945-B1

Motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-20 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W20-QSP

WSS-M2C945-B1

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20

355

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Rear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Canada)
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S. WSL-M2C192-A
and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)
WSL-M2C192-A
(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil

WSH-M1C231-B

356

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

YN-12-D
Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1

E142732

We recommend Motorcraft® motor oil for
your vehicle. If Motorcraft® oil is not
available, use motor oils of the
recommended viscosity grade that meet
API SN requirements and display the API
Certification Mark for gasoline engines.

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.

357

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

Alternative Engine Oil for
Extremely Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.

Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-20 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-20
XO-0W20-QSP

WSS-M2C947-B1

E240522

CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.5L ECOBOOST™

358

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high
pressure. Only qualified personnel should service the air conditioning refrigerant system.
Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item

Capacity

Engine oil (with oil filter)

6.0 qt (5.7 L)

Engine coolant
Brake fluid

13.1 qt (12.4 L)
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoir

Rear axle fluid (four-wheel drive)

2.11 pt (1.0 L)

Automatic transmission fluid (6F50)

10.9 qt (10.3 L)

Automatic transmission fluid (6F55)

11.6 qt (11 L)

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (fourwheel drive)

17.9 fl oz (0.53 L)

Windshield washer fluid

Fill as required

Fuel tank

18.6 gal (70.4 L)

A/C refrigerant

2.8 lb (1.28 kg)

A/C refrigerant compressor oil
1 Approximate

7.3 fl oz (215 ml)

dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.

359

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
Name

Specification

Motor oil (U.S.):
WSS-M2C946-B1
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor
Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12

WSS-M2C946-B1

Motor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Synthetic Motor Oil
MXO-5W30-QSP

WSS-M2C946-B1

Engine coolant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
CVC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Engine coolant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® Antifreeze/Coolant Prediluted
VC-3DIL-B

WSS-M97B44-D2

Brake fluid:
WSS-M6C65-A2
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance
Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
Rear axle fluid (U.S. and Mexico)
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
Rear axle fluid (Canada)
WSP-M2C197-A
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
Automatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
XT-10-QLVC
Automatic transmission fluid (Canada):
WSS-M2C938-A
Motorcraft® MERCON® LV Automatic Transmission Fluid MERCON® LV
CXT-10-LV12

360

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive) (U.S. WSL-M2C192-A
and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) fluid (four-wheel drive)
WSL-M2C192-A
(Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
Windshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate
with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2

WSS-M14P19-A

Windshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)

WSS-M14P19-A

A/C refrigerant (U.S.):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
YN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Canada):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
CYN-16-R

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19

WSH-M17B19-A

A/C refrigerant compressor oil:
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D

WSH-M1C231-B

Transmission, parking brake linkage and pivots and brake ESA-M1C75-B
pedal shift grease:
Premium Long-Life Grease
XG-1-E1
Multi-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A

ESB-M1C93-B

361

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications
Name

Specification

Lock cylinders (U.S.):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1

Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A

Lock cylinders (Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
MXL-1

An oil that displays this symbol conforms
to current engine, emission system and
fuel economy performance standards of
ILSAC.

Do not use supplemental engine oil
additives because they are unnecessary
and could lead to engine damage that may
not be covered by your vehicle warranty.
Note: Ford recommends using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet the Ford
performance standards. Keep brake fluid
clean and dry. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other
materials may result in brake system
damage and possible failure.

Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should
only use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.

E142732

362

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Capacities and Specifications

Name

Specification

Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium
Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP

WSS-M2C953-A1

E240523

363

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors

GENERAL INFORMATION

AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530-1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz

WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.

Radio Reception Factors

Distance and strength

The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the
weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.

CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in the
vehicle’s CD player.

Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD
cleaner only. Wipe it from the center of
the disc toward the edge. Do not clean in
a circular motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or
heat sources for extended periods.

Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.

364

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure

extension are played; other files are
ignored by the system. This enables you to
use the same MP3 and WMA disc for a
variety of tasks on your work computer,
home computer and your in-vehicle
system.

Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks
and folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and
WMA track mode (system default) and
MP3 and WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3
and WMA track on the disc (noted by
the MP3 or WMA file extension) from
T001 to a maximum of T255. The
maximum number of playable MP3 and
WMA files may be less depending on
the structure of the CD and exact
model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one
level of folders. The CD player numbers
all MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc
(noted by the MP3 or WMA file
extension) and all folders containing
MP3 and WMA files, from F001 (folder)
T001 (track) to F253 T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through
the disc files.

In track mode, the system displays and
plays the structure as if it were only one
level deep (all MP3 and WMA files play,
regardless of being in a specific folder). In
folder mode, the system only plays the
MP3 and WMA files in the current folder.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
PREMIUM AM/FM/CD
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how
the system reads the structures you create.
While various files may be present (files
with extensions other than MP3 and
WMA), only files with the MP3 and WMA

Note: The touchscreen system controls
most of the audio features. See your SYNC
information.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
your audio system may not be equipped
with a CD player.

365

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System

E194336

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

CD slot: Insert a CD.

MEDIA and TUNE: Press to
access or switch between
devices you plug into your
vehicle. Turn to search through
the radio frequency band.

as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
E

366

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

Audio System
AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
SONY AM/FM/CD

against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: The touchscreen controls most of
the audio features. See your SYNC
information.

E194337

SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade or Balance.

CD slot: Insert a CD.

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

367

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

Audio System
E

TUNE: In radio mode, press to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
press to find the next or previous
available satellite radio station.

Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.

AUDIO UNIT - VEHICLES WITH:
AM/FM/CD/SYNC
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.
Note: You can operate your audio system
for up to one hour after you switch the
ignition off. Press VOL to operate the
system with the ignition turned off. The
system turns off after one hour.
Note: Some features, such as SIRIUS
satellite radio, may not be available in your
location. Check with an authorized dealer.
Note: Depending on your vehicle options,
your audio system may not be equipped
with a CD player.

368

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System

E194335

SOUND: Press to access
settings for Treble, Midrange,
Bass, Fade and Balance. Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.
Sound settings can be set for
each audio source
independently.
MUTE: Press to mute the
playing audio.

369

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Clock: Press to access the clock
setting. Use the center arrow
controls to change the hours and
minutes. You can also set the
clock by pressing MENU and
scrolling to Clock Settings. If not
in phone mode, press to display
the clock.

MENU: Press to access different
audio system features. See
Menu Structure.

Number block: In radio mode,
store and recall your favorite
radio stations. To store a radio
station, tune to the station, then
press and hold a preset button
until sound returns. In CD mode,
select a track. In phone mode,
enter a phone number.

Audio System
F

Function buttons: Select
different functions of the audio
system depending on which
mode you are in (such as Radio
mode or CD mode).
Seek, Fast Forward and
Reverse: In radio mode, select
a frequency band and press
either button. The system stops
at the first station it finds in that
direction. In SIRIUS mode, press
to select the next or previous
satellite radio station. If you
select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to
find the next or previous station
in the category you select. In CD
mode, press to select the next or
previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or
backward through the current
track.
TUNE: In radio mode, turn to
search through the radio
frequency band. In SIRIUS mode,
turn to find the previous or next
available satellite radio station.

End phone call: Press to end a
phone call.

Eject: Press to eject a CD.

OK and cursor arrows: Use the
up and down arrow buttons to
select the various settings. When
you make your selection, press
the left and right arrow buttons
to change the settings. Press OK
to set or press MENU to exit.

CD Slot: Insert a CD.

Play/Pause: Press to either
play or pause a track when
listening to a CD.

Answer or make phone call:
Press to either answer or make
a phone call.

Vol and Power: Turn to adjust
the volume. Press to switch the
system on and off.

PHONE: Press to access the
phone features of the SYNC
system. See your SYNC
information.

MEDIA: Press to open the media
source menu. You can press this
multiple times to change to CD
or to a SYNC-Media device or
scroll through the media sources
using the arrow buttons. Press
OK to select a source.

RADIO: Press to listen to the
radio or change radio stations.
Press the function buttons
below the radio screen to select
different radio functions.

CD: Press to listen to a CD. Press
the function buttons below the
radio screen to select on-screen
options of Repeat or Shuffle.

Menu Structure
Note: Depending on your system, some
options may appear slightly different.
Press MENU.
Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through the options.
Press the right arrow to enter a menu.
Press the left arrow to exit a menu.
Press OK to confirm a selection.

370

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System

Radio

Manual Tune

Use the left and right arrows to go up or down the
frequency band.

Scan

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

AST

Select to store the six strongest local stations on the AMAST and FM-AST frequency bands.

Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to have the system search by certain music
categories (such as Rock, Pop or Country).
RDS Text Display

Select to view additional broadcast data, if available. This
feature defaults to off. RBDS must be on for you to set a
category.

SIRIUS

Scan

Select for a brief sampling of all available channels.

Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)

Select to view your satellite radio electronic serial number
(ESN). You need this number when communicating with
SIRIUS to activate, modify or track your account.

Check Channel Guide

Select to view available satellite radio channels. Press OK
to open a list of the following options for this channel.
Once you skip or lock a channel, you can only access it by
pressing Direct Tune and entering the channel number.
Locking or unlocking a channel requires your PIN.

Set Category for Seek/Scan Select to view channel categories (such as Pop, Rock or
News). If you select a category, seek and scan functions
only stop on channels in that category.
Alerts

Select to switch alerts on or off for songs, artists or teams.
The system alerts you when the selection is playing on
another channel. Save up to 20 alerts.

Unlock All Stations

Use your PIN to unlock previously locked stations.

Skip No Stations

Use to restore any channels you previously skipped.

Parental Lockout

Select to create a PIN, which allows you to lock or unlock
channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

371

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System

Audio Settings

Speed Compensated
Volume

Adjusts the volume to compensate for speed and wind
noise. You can set the system between 0 and +7.

Sound

Select to adjust settings for Treble, Midrange, Bass, Fade
or Balance.

Occupancy Mode

Select to optimize sound quality for the chosen seating
position.

DSP

Choose between the stereo modes.

CD Settings

Scan All

Select to scan all disc selections.

Scan Folder

Select to scan all music in the current MP3 folder.

CD Compression

Select to bring soft and loud passages together for a more
consistent listening level.

Clock Settings

Set Date and Time

Select to set the time and calendar date.

24 Hour

Select to view clock time in a 12-hour mode or 24-hour
mode.

Display Settings

Brightness

Select to change display brightness.

Language

Select to display the language in English, French or
Spanish.

Temp. Setting

Select to display the outside temperature in Fahrenheit
or Celsius.
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital

DIGITAL RADIO (If Equipped)
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.

372

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit
www.hdradio.com.

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you
can access the following functions:
• Scan allows you to hear a brief
sampling of all available stations. This
feature still works when HD Radio
reception is on, although it does not
scan for HD2-HD7 channels. You may
see the HD logo appear if the station
has a digital broadcast.
• Memory presets allow you to save an
active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief
mute while the radio saves the station.
Sound returns when finished. When
switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory
preset, the sound mutes before the
digital audio plays, because the system
has to reacquire the digital signal.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the HD Radio logo on your
screen. When this logo is available, you
may also see Title and Artist fields
on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

Note: As with any saved radio station, you
cannot access a station you save if your
vehicle is outside the station’s reception
area.

HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential Reception Issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on
the fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due
to weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system switches back to
the analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available
again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible
HD2-HD7 multicast channels, the station mutes and stays
muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal
again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the
analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an
HD Radio station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending
on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change
when the station changes from analog to digital. Blending
is the shift from analog to digital sound or digital back to
analog sound.

373

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio

technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.

Potential Station Issues
Issues

Echo, stutter, skip or repeat
in audio.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.

Cause

Action

This is poor time alignment No action required. This is a
by the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.

Sound fading or blending in The radio is shifting between No action required. The
and out.
analog and digital audio.
reception issue may clear up
as you continue to drive.
There is an audio mute
delay when selecting HD2 or
HD3, multicast preset or
Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio normal behavior. Wait until
broadcast is decoded. Once the audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

Cannot access HD2 or HD3
multicast channel when
recalling a preset or from a
direct tune.

The previously stored
No action required. The
multicast preset or direct
station is not available in
tune is not available in your your current location.
current reception area.

Text information does not
match currently playing
audio.

Data service issue by the
radio broadcaster.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed
below.

There is no text information Data service issue by the
shown for currently selected radio broadcaster.
frequency.

Fill out the station issue
form at website listed

HD2-HD7 stations not found Pressing Scan disables
when Scan is pressed.
HD2-HD7 channel search.

No action required. This is
normal behavior.

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

374

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

below.

Audio System
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.

SATELLITE RADIO (If Equipped)
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio broadcasts a
variety of music, news, sports, weather,
traffic and entertainment satellite radio
channels. For more information and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, visit www.siriusxm.com in the
United States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada,
or call SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

Satellite Radio Reception Factors
Potential satellite radio reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna
clear of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
material as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating
tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
the audio system may mute.

Satellite radio signal interfer- Your display may show ACQUIRING . . . to indicate the
ence
interference and the audio system may mute.

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming including canceling, moving
or adding particular channels, and its prices,
at any time, with or without notice to you.
Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
E208625

375

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term,
which begins on the date of sale or lease
of your vehicle. See an authorized dealer
for availability.

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
complete list of SiriusXM satellite radio
channels, and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. When in
satellite radio mode, tune to channel 0.

Troubleshooting
Message

Condition

Action

Acquiring…

Radio requires more than
two seconds to produce
audio for the selected
channel.

Satellite antenna fault

There is an internal module If this message does not
clear shortly, or with an ignior system failure present.
tion key cycle, your receiver
may have a fault. See an
authorized dealer for service.

SIRIUS system failure

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.

Invalid Channel

The channel is no longer
available.

Tune to another channel or
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel

Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to
the channel, or tune to
another channel.

No Signal

The signal is lost from the
SiriusXM satellite or SiriusXM tower to your vehicle
antenna.

The signal is blocked. When
you move into an open area,
the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel
programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to
three minutes.

376

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Audio System
Message

Questions? Call
1-888-539-7474
None found
Check Channel Guide
Subscription Updated

Condition

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Action

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.

All the channels in the
Use the channel guide to
selected category are either turn off the Lock or Skip
skipped or locked.
function on that station.
SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

No action required.

The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices (if supported). See your SYNC
information.

USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

E201595

377

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION

E198355

SYNC is an in-vehicle communications
system that works with your
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone and
portable media player.

•

This allows you to:
• Make and receive calls.
• Access and play music from your
portable music player.
• Use 911 Assist and applications, via
*
SYNC Applink .

•

Support

•
•

•

Use the advanced voice recognition
system.
Charge your USB device (if your device
supports this).

These features are not available in all
markets and may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.
Make sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC.

Access phonebook contacts and music
using voice commands.
Stream music from your connected
phone.
Text message.

The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you cannot
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-9:00pm EST.

378

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
When using SYNC:
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's manual for further information.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. See an authorized dealer.

Sunday, 10:30am-7:30pm EST.
In the United States, call 1-800-392-3673.
In Canada, call 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•

•

Essential for keeping up with the latest
software downloads available for
SYNC.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.

Privacy Information

Driving Restrictions

When a cellular phone is connected to
SYNC, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that is linked to that cellular
phone. This profile is created in order to
offer you more cellular features and to
operate more efficiently. Among other
things, this profile may contain data about
your cellular phone book, text messages
(read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cellular
phone was not connected to the system.
In addition, if you connect a media device,
the system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short development log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent
system activity. The log profile and other
system data may be used to improve the
system and help diagnose any problems
that may occur.

For your safety, certain features are
speed-dependent and restricted when your
vehicle is traveling over 3 mph (5 km/h).

Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and development log will remain in the
vehicle unless you delete them and are
generally accessible only in the vehicle
when the cellular phone or media player
is connected. If you no longer plan to use
the system or the vehicle, we recommend
you perform a Master Reset to erase all
stored information.

379

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System data cannot be accessed without
special equipment and access to the
vehicle's SYNC module. Ford Motor
Company and Ford of Canada will not
access the system data for any purpose
other than as described absent consent, a
court order, or where required by law
enforcement, other government
authorities, or other third parties acting
with lawful authority. Other parties may
seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada. For further privacy
information, see the section on 911 Assist.
See SYNC™ Applications and Services
(page 394).

USING VOICE RECOGNITION
This system helps you control many
features using voice commands. This
allows you to keep your hands on the
wheel and focus on what is around you.

Initiating a Voice Session

E142599

Press the voice button. A list of
available voice commands
appears in the display.

Global Voice Commands
These voice commands are always
available. You can say them at any time.

Global voice commands

(cancel | exit)

This command ends the voice session. You
can also cancel a session by holding the
voice button for two or more seconds.

help

This command provides you with hints,
examples and instructions.

(main menu | start again)

This command restarts the voice session
from the initial starting point.

You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (cancel | exit) appears you say; cancel or exit.
•

Helpful Hints
•

•

Make sure the interior of your vehicle is
as quiet as possible. Wind noise from
open windows and road vibrations may
prevent the system from correctly
recognizing spoken commands.
Before giving a voice command, wait
for the system announcement to finish,
followed by a single tone. Any
command spoken before this does not
register with the system.

•

380

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Speak naturally, without long pauses
between words.
You can interrupt the system at any
time while it is speaking by pressing the
voice button. You can cancel a voice
session by pressing and holding the
voice button.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
System Interaction and Feedback

The default setting is to a higher level of
interaction in order to help you learn to use
the system. You can change these settings
at any time.

The system provides feedback through
audible tones, prompts, questions and
spoken confirmations depending on the
situation and the chosen level of
interaction. You can customize the voice
recognition system to provide more or less
instruction and feedback.

Adjusting the Interaction Level
Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:
E142599

Voice Command

Action and Description

voice settings
Then either of the following:
interaction mode novice

Provides more detailed interaction and
guidance. (Recommended for first time
users.)

interaction mode advanced

Provides less audible interaction and guidance.

Confirmation Prompts
Confirmation prompts are short questions
the system asks when it is not sure of your
request or when there is more than one
possible response to your request.
To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

voice settings
Then either of the following:
confirmation prompts off

Make a best guess from the command; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.

confirmation prompts on

Clarify your voice command with a short
question.

Phone Confirmation
Using phone confirmations the system
asks you to verify before placing any calls.
381

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

To adjust this setting press the voice button, when prompted say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

voice settings
Then any of the following:
phone confirmation on

When enabled, this feature will prompt you
to confirm any voice initiated call command
prior to the call being placed.

phone confirmation off

The system will make a best guess; you
may still occasionally be asked to confirm
settings.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.

Changing the Voice Settings
In addition to using voice commands to
change the voice settings, you can also use
the menu in the audio display.
To change the voice settings press the
Menu button then select:

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
PHONE

Menu Item

SYNC-Settings

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of SYNC. While the system
supports a variety of features, many are
dependent on your cellular phone's
functionality. At a minimum, most cellular
phones with Bluetooth wireless technology
support the following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Using privacy mode.
• Dialing a number.
• Redialing.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller ID.

Voice settings
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. Fan
speed can also be adjusted normally during
a voice session, simply press fan buttons (or
turn fan knob) to increase or decrease fan
speed to desired setting.

382

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
4. When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone's compatibility, see
your phone's manual and visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

Pairing a Phone for the First Time

Depending on your phone's capability and
your market, the system may prompt you
with questions, such as setting the current
phone as the primary phone (the phone
SYNC automatically tries to connect with
first upon vehicle start-up) and
downloading your phonebook.

Wirelessly pairing your phone with SYNC
allows you to make and receive hands-free
calls.
Note: SYNC can support downloading up
to approximately 4000 entries per
Bluetooth-enabled cellular phone.
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.

Using Voice Commands
Make sure to switch on your
phone's Bluetooth feature
E142599
before starting the search. See
your device's manual if necessary.

Using the Audio System
Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.

Press the voice and when prompted
say:

Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
2. Press the PHONE button. When the
audio display indicates there is no
paired phone, select the option to add.
3. When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your phone to start the pairing
process.

Voice Command

Action and Description

(pair ([Bluetooth]
device | phone |
Bluetooth audio) |
add phone)

Follow the instructions on the audio
display.

You can say any of the voice commands
that appear within open and close brackets
that are separated by |. For example,
where; (what's | what is) appears you say;
what's or what is.
The commands that have [ ] around the
word means that the word is optional.

383

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
SYNC may prompt you with more cell
phone options. Your cell phone may also
prompt you to give SYNC permission to
access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your
cell phone’s manual and visit the website.

Phone Voice Commands

Pairing Subsequent Phones
Note: Make sure to switch on the ignition
and the radio. Shift the transmission into
park (P) for automatic transmission or first
gear for manual transmission.

E142599

Voice Command

Note: To scroll through the menus, press
the up and down arrows on your audio
system.
1.

2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Press the voice button. When
prompted, say any of the
following:

(phone | Blackberry | iPhone)
Then say any of the following:

Make sure to switch on your phone's
Bluetooth feature before starting the
search. See your device's manual if
necessary.
Press the PHONE button.
Select the option for Bluetooth
Devices.
Press the OK button.
Select the option to add. This starts
the pairing process.
When a message to begin pairing
appears in the audio display, search for
SYNC on your device.
When prompted on your cell phone’s
display, confirm that the PIN provided
by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Your phone is now
paired and the display indicates that
the pairing was successful. If you are
prompted to enter a PIN on your device,
enter the PIN displayed on the screen.
The display indicates when the pairing
is successful.

join (calls | call)

mute call [on]

(mute call off | un-mute call)

(turn ringer off | silent mode [on])

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

(hold call [on] | place call on hold)

(turn ringer on | silent mode off)

384

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command

[text] (messages | message)

To access text messages say:
3

Voice Command

help

[text] (messages | message)

___ is a dynamic listing that should be the
name of a contact in your phonebook. For
example you could say "Call Home".

Then say any of the following:

forward (text | [text] message)

(listen to | read) ([text] message)

See Dial table below.

These commands are only valid while in
a phone call.
3

reply to (text | [text] message)
call [sender]

See the text message table below.

Phonebook Hints

Dial Commands

To hear how the SYNC system speaks a
name browse phonebook, select a contact
and press:

Press the voice button and when prompted
say any of the following commands:
Voice Commands

Menu Item

411 (four-one-one), 911 (nine-one-one)

Hear it

700 (seven hundred)
Changing Devices Using Voice
Commands

800 (eight hundred)
900 (nine hundred)

Using SYNC, you can easily access multiple
phones, ipods, or USB devices. to switch
devices say:

Clear (deletes all entered digits)
Delete (deletes last set of digits entered)
Number <0-9>
Plus
Pound (#)
Star (*)
Note: To exit dial mode, press and hold the
phone button or press any button on the
audio system.

385

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
on the steering wheel or select the end call
option in the audio display.

Voice Command

(connect |
device) ___

Receiving Calls

You can state the name of
the desired device, such as
“My iPhone”,“My Galaxy”
or“My iPod”. SYNC may
ask you to confirm the type
of device (Phone, USB, or
Bluetooth Audio).

Accepting calls
When receiving a call, you can answer the
call by pressing the accept call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.
To use the screen to accept a call
select:

Making Calls

Menu Item

E142599

Press the voice button. When
prompted, say:

Rejecting Calls
When receiving a call, you can reject the
call by pressing the reject call button on
the steering wheel or use the screen.

Voice Command

call [[a] name]
dial [[a]
number]

To use the screen to reject a call select:

SYNC prompts you to say
the numbers that you wish
to dial. After you say the
numbers, the system
confirms it. You can then
say:

Menu Item

Reject
Ignore the call by doing nothing.

Phone Options during an Active
Call

When the system has stated the
number, you say any of the following:

During an active call, you have more menu
features that become available, such as
putting a call on hold or joining calls.

Voice Command

(dial | send) This initiates the call.
(delete |
correct)

To access this menu, choose one of the
options available at the bottom of the
audio display or select More to choose
from the following options:

This erases the spoken
digits.

To end the call, press the end call button

386

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Description and action

Mic. off

Switch your vehicle's microphone off. To switch the
microphone on, select the option again.

Privacy

Switch a call from an active hands-free environment to
your cellular phone for a more private conversation. When
selected, the audio display indicates the call is private.

Hold

Put an active call on hold. When selected, the audio display
indicates the call is on hold.

Dial a number

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad
(for example, numbers for passwords).

Join calls

Join two separate calls. The system supports a maximum
of three callers on a multiparty or conference call.
1. Select the More option.
2. Access the desired contact through the system or use
voice commands to place the second call. Once actively
in the second call, select the More option.
3. Scroll to the option to join calls and press the OK button.

Phonebook

Access your phonebook contacts.
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for phonebook and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
4. Press the OK button again when the desired contact
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Call History

Access your call history log.
1. Select the More option.
2. Scroll to the option for call history and press the OK
button.
3. Scroll through your call history options (incoming,
outgoing or missed).
4. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
5. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.
1.

Press the PHONE button to enter the
phone menu.
2. Select one of the options available.

Accessing Features through the
Phone Menu
You can access your call history,
phonebook, sent text messages, as well
as access phone and system settings.

387

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Display

Description and action

Dial a number

Enter numbers using the audio system's numeric keypad.

Phonebook

Access your downloaded phonebook.
1. Press the OK button to confirm and enter. You can use
the options at the bottom of the screen to access an
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters
on the audio system's numeric keypad to jump in the list.
2. Scroll through your phonebook contacts.
3. Press the OK button again when the desired selection
appears in the audio display.
4. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Call History

Access any previously dialed, received or missed calls.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select incoming, outgoing or missed calls. Press
the OK button to make your selection.
3. Press the OK button or dial button to call the selection.

Speed Dial

Select 1 of 10 speed dial entries. To set a speed dial entry,
go to the phonebook and then press and hold one of the
numbers on the audio system's numeric keypad.

Text messaging

Send, download and delete text messages.

BT Devices

Access the option for Bluetooth Device menu listings (add,
connect, set as primary, on or off, delete).

Phone settings

View various settings and features on your phone.
Note: This is a speed-dependent feature
and is only available when your vehicle is
traveling at 3 mph (5 km/h) or less.

Text Messaging
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.

When a new message arrives, an audible
tone sounds and the audio display
indicates you have a new message.

SYNC allows you to receive, send,
download and delete text messages. The
system can also read incoming text
messages to you so that you do not have
to take your eyes off the road.

To hear the message you can say:
Voice command

Receiving a Text Message
Note: This is a phone-dependent feature.
Your phone must support downloading text
messages using Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.

(listen to | read)
([text] message)

388

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Description and
action

Select this option
to have the system
read the message
to you.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Using the screen you also have the following options:
Menu
Item

Description and action

Ignore

Select this option, or do nothing, and the message goes into your text message
inbox.

View

Select the view option to open the text message. Once selected, you have
the ability to have the message read to you, to view other messages. For
additional options select:
More...

If you select this option, use the arrow button to scroll through the
following options:
Reply to
sender

Press the OK button to access, and then scroll
through a list of pre-defined messages to send.

Call sender

Press the OK button to call the sender of the
message.

Forward
msg.

Press the OK button to forward the message to
anyone in your phonebook or call history. You can
also choose to enter a number.
2. Select the text messaging option, and
then press the OK button.

Sending, Downloading and Deleting
Your Text Messages
1.

Press the PHONE button.

Choose from the following options:
Menu
Item

Description and action

New

Allows you to send a new text message based on a pre-defined set of 15
messages.

View

Allows you to read the full message and, in addition, provides the option to
have the system read the message to you. To go to the next message, select
the More option. This allows you to reply to the sender, call the sender or
forward the message.

Delete

Allows you to delete current text messages from the system (not your cellular
phone). The audio display indicates when the system has deleted all your
text messages.

More...

Allows you to delete all messages or manually trigger a download of all
unread messages from your cellular phone.

389

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Sending a Text Message

Note: You can send text messages either
by choosing a contact from the phonebook
and selecting the text option from the audio
display or by replying to a received message
in the inbox.

Note: You can only send a text message to
one recipient at a time.
1.

Select the send option when the
desired selection highlights in the audio
display.
2. Select the confirmation option when
the contact appears.
3. Press the OK button again to confirm
when the system asks if you want to
send the message. A pre-defined
signature appears on each text
message.

Accessing Your Phone Settings
These are phone-dependent features. Your
phone settings allow you to access and
adjust features such as your ring tone and
text message notification, modify your
phonebook, and set up automatic
download.
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until the phone settings option
appears, and then press the OK button.

Scroll to select from the following options:
Menu Item

Description and action

Set as master

If this option is checked, the system uses the cellular phone
as the master when there is more than one cellular phone
paired to the system. This option can be changed for all
cellular phones (not only the active phone) using the
Bluetooth Devices menu.

Phone status

See the cellular phone name, provider name, cellular
phone number, and signal level. When done, press the left
arrow buttons to return to the phone status menu.

Set ringtone

Select which ringtone sounds during an incoming call (one
of the system's tones or your cellular phone's). If your
phone supports in-band ringing, your phone's ringtone
sounds when you choose the cellular phone ringtone
option.
1. Press the OK button to select and scroll to hear each
ringtone.
2. Press the OK button to select a ringtone.

Text msg notify

Have the option of hearing an audible tone to notify you
when a text message arrives. Press the OK button to
switch the audible tone off or on.

Phonebook pref.

Modify the contents of your phonebook (such as add,
delete or download). Press the OK button to select and
scroll between the choices in the phonebook preferences
table below.

390

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Menu Item

Phonebook preferences

Add contacts

Push the desired contacts on your cellular phone. See your
device's manual on how to push contacts. Press the OK
button to add more contacts from your phonebook.

Delete

When a message asking you to delete appears, select the
option to confirm. Press the OK button to delete the
current phonebook and call history. The system takes you
back to the menu for phone settings.

Download now

Press the OK button to select and download your phonebook to the system.

Auto-download

When automatic download is on, the system deletes any
changes (additions or deletions) saved in the system since
your last download.
When automatic download is off, the system does not
download your phonebook when your cellular phone
connects to SYNC.
You can only access your phonebook, call history and text
messages when your paired cellular phone connects to
the system. Check or uncheck this option to download
your phonebook automatically each time your phone
connects to the system. Download times are phonedependent and quantity-dependent.

Sorting Pref.

Enabling this feature allows you to select how your
contacts are displayed. You can select:
First/Last name

Last/First name
1. Press the PHONE button.
2. Scroll until Bluetooth Devices appears,
and then press the OK button.

Bluetooth Devices
The Bluetooth Devices menu allows you
to add, connect and delete devices as well
as set a phone as primary.
Select from the following options:
Menu Item

Add

Description and action

Pair additional phones to the system.
1. Select the option to add to start the pairing process.

391

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Menu Item

Description and action

2. When a message to begin pairing appears in the audio
display, search for SYNC on your phone. See your phone's
manual if necessary.
3. When prompted on your cell phone’s display, confirm
that the PIN provided by SYNC matches the PIN displayed
on your cell phone. Skip the next step. If you are prompted
to enter a PIN on your device, it does not support Secure
Simple Pairing. To pair, enter the PIN displayed on the
screen. The display indicates when the pairing is
successful.
4. When the option to set the phone as primary appears,
select either yes or no.
5. SYNC may prompt you with more cell phone options.
Your cell phone may also prompt you to give SYNC
permission to access information. For more information
on your cell phone’s capability, see your cell phone’s
manual and visit the website.
Delete

Select the delete option and confirm when the system
asks to delete the selected device. After deleting a phone
from the list, you have to repeat the pairing process to pair
it again.

Master

The system attempts to connect with the primary cellular
phone each time you switch on the ignition. When you
select a cellular phone as primary, it appears first in the
list, marked with an asterisk. Set a previously paired phone
as master by selecting the master option and confirming
it as the primary.

Conn.

Connect a previously connected phone. You can only have
one phone connected at a time to use the phone's functionality. When you connect another phone, the previous
phone disconnects from the telephone services. The
system allows you to use different Bluetooth devices for
the cellular phone functionality and the Bluetooth audio
music playback feature at the same time.

Discon.

Disconnects the selected cellular phone. Select this option
and confirm when asked. After disconnecting a phone,
you can reconnect it again without repeating the full pairing
process.
2. Select the SYNC settings option, and
then press the OK button.

System Settings
1.

Press the MENU button.

392

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Scroll to select from the following options:
Display

Description and action

Bluetooth on

Check or uncheck this option to switch the system's
Bluetooth interface off or on. Select this option, and then
press the OK button to change the option's status.

Set defaults

Return to the factory default settings without erasing your
indexed information (such as phonebook, call history, text
messages and paired devices). Select this option and
confirm when prompted in the audio display.

Master reset

Completely erase all information stored in the system
(such as phonebook, call history, text messages and paired
devices) and return to factory default settings.

Install on SYNC

Install downloaded applications or software updates.
Select this option and confirm when prompted in the audio
display. There must be a valid SYNC application or update
available on the USB drive in order to finish an installation
successfully.

System info

Display the system's version numbers as well as its serial
number. Press the OK button to select.

Voice settings

The voice settings submenu contains various options. See
Using Voice Recognition (page 380).

Browse USB

Browse the actual menu structure of the connected USB
device. Press the OK button and use the up and down
arrow buttons to scroll through the folders and files. Use
the left or right arrow buttons to enter or leave a folder.
You can select media content for playback from this menu.

393

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.

SYNC™ APPLICATIONS AND
SERVICES (If Equipped)

Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.

In order for the following features to work,
your cellular phone must be compatible
with SYNC. To check your phone's
compatibility, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.
• 911 Assist: Can alert 911 in the event of
an emergency.
• SYNC AppLink: Allows you to connect
to and use certain applications such as
Spotify and Glympse (if your phone is
compatible).

Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user switches 911 Assist to on
or off, that setting applies for all paired
phones. If 911 Assist is switched off, either
a voice message plays or a display message
or an icon comes on when your vehicle is
started and after a previously paired phone
connects.

These features may require activation.
Available AppLink enabled apps vary by
market.

Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

911 Assist

If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding
knee airbags and rear inflatable safety
belts [if equipped]) or activates the fuel
pump shut-off, your SYNC-equipped
vehicle may be able to contact emergency
services by dialing 911 through a paired and
connected Bluetooth-enabled phone. You
can learn more about the 911 Assist
feature, visit www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca.

WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the
risk of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response
time which could increase the risk of
serious injury or death after a crash. If you
do not hear 911 Assist within five seconds
of the crash, the system or phone may be
damaged or non-functional.

See Supplementary Restraints System
(page 44). Important information about
airbag deployment is in this chapter.
See Roadside Emergencies (page 260).
Important information about the fuel pump
shut-off is in this chapter.

394

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Setting 911 Assist On or Off

•

Press Menu then select
Menu
Item

•

Action and Description

SYNC-Applications
911 Assist Select the desired option, on
or off.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes deploy an airbag or activate
the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers for 911
Assist). If a connected cell phone sustains
damage or loses its connection to SYNC
during a crash, SYNC searches for and tries
to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC then attempts to call the
emergency services.

If you choose not to activate this
feature you will have the following
options:
Menu
Item

A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

Action and Description

Voice
Provides a display and voice
Reminder reminder at phone connection
ON
at vehicle start.

Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel".

Voice
Provides a display reminder
Reminder only without a voice reminder
OFF
at phone connection.
To make sure that 911 Assist works
properly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.

If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and
then the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able
to talk with the operator. Be prepared to
provide your name, phone number and
location immediately, because not all 911
systems are capable of receiving this
information electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

395

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
The vehicle's battery or the SYNC
system has no power.
The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
911 Assist Privacy Notice

Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps work automatically with no
setup. Other apps want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or favorites.
We recommend you do this at home or
outside of your vehicle.

When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

Note: AppLink is not available if your
vehicle is equipped with the MyFordTouch
system.
To Access Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the
menu on-screen. Then select:

SYNC Mobile Apps

Menu
Item

The system enables voice and steering
wheel control of SYNC AppLink enabled
smartphone apps. When an app is running
through AppLink, you can control main
features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.

Action and Description

SYNC-Apps
Mobile
Apps

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone to SYNC to access AppLink.

Scroll through the list of
available applications and
select a particular app or
select:
Find New Apps

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.

Note: If you cannot find a compatible SYNC
AppLink app, make sure the required app is
running on the mobile device.

Note: Android users need to connect the
phone to SYNC using Bluetooth.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit the Ford
website.

Accessing an App's Menu
When an app is running through SYNC,
press the right arrow button on the steering
wheel control to access the app menu.

Availability of SYNC AppLink enabled Apps
will vary by region.

You can access various app features from
here, for example thumbs up and thumbs
down.
Press the left arrow button on the steering
wheel control to exit the app menu.

396

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Access Using Voice Commands
Press the voice button then when prompted say:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Say the name of the application after the tone.
The app should start. When an app is running through SYNC, you
can press the voice button and speak commands specific to the
app, for example "Play Playlist Road Trip".

mobile (apps |
applications)

help

Use this command to discover the available voice commands.

SYNC Mobile App Voice Commands
The following voice commands are always available:
Menu Item

Action and Description

mobile (apps | applications)

SYNC prompts you to say the name of an
app to start it on SYNC.

list [mobile] (apps | applications)

SYNC lists all of the currently available
mobile apps.

find [new] [mobile] (apps | applications)

Searches your connected mobile device for
SYNC-compatible mobile apps.

help
You can say the name of a mobile app at any time to start the mobile app on SYNC.
When you launch an app using SYNC, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example:
• To allow your vehicle to provide vehicle
information to the app such as, but not
limited to: Fuel level, fuel economy, fuel
consumption, engine speed, rain
sensor, odometer, VIN, external
temperature, gear position, tire
pressure, and head lamp status.
• To allow your vehicle to provide driving
characteristic information such as, but
not limited to: MyKey, seat belt status,
engine revolutions per minute, gear
position, braking events, steering wheel
angle, and accelerator pedal position.

App Permissions
App permissions are organized by groups.
You can grant these group permissions
individually. You can change a permission
group status any time when not driving, by
using the settings menu.

397

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
•

•

To allow your vehicle to provide
location information, including: GPS
and speed.
To allow the app to send push
notifications using the vehicle display
and voice capabilities while running in
a background state. Push notifications
may be particularly useful for news or

location based apps.
Note: You only need to grant permissions
the first time you use an app with SYNC.
Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.

Enabling and Disabling App Permissions Using the SYNC Menu
Press the MENU button to access the SYNC menu then select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

SYNC-Apps
Mobile Apps
All Apps

You can also select a specific app.
If the app supports push notifications, this
setting is listed. Select to enable or disable
the feature as required.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.

Enabling SYNC Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Data is sent to Ford in the United States
through the connected device. The
information is encrypted and includes your
VIN, SYNC module number, anonymous
usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place
automatically.

App Status
You can view the current status of an app
in the settings menu.

398

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

There are three possible statuses:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Update Needed

The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.

Up-To-Date

No update is required.

Updating...

The system is trying to receive an update.

Update settings
Menu Item

Action and Description

Request Update

Select this option from the settings menu
to manually preform a needed update.

Disable Updates

Select this option from the settings menu
to disable automatic updates.
Doing so also disables the use of Mobile
Apps on SYNC.
Confirm that the USB device has been
formatted correctly and has the following
specifications:
• USB 2.0.
• File format must be FAT16/32.

USING SYNC™ WITH YOUR
MEDIA PLAYER
You can access and play music from your
digital music player over your vehicle's
speaker system using the system's media
menu or voice commands. You can also
sort and play your music by specific
categories, such as artist and album.

The format of the audio files on the USB
device must be:
• MP3.
• Non DRM protected WMA.
• WAV.
• AAC.

Note: The system is capable of indexing up
to 15,000 songs.
SYNC is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player including: iPod, Zune,
plays from device players, and most USB
drives. SYNC also supports audio formats,
such as MP3, WMA, WAV and ACC.

Connecting Your Digital Media
Player to the USB Port
Note: If your digital media player has a
power switch, make sure you switch it on
before plugging it in.

399

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
To Connect Using Voice Commands

To Connect Using the System Menu

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.

Plug the device into one of the vehicle's
USB ports.
2. Press the MEDIA button and select
either USB 1 or USB 2 from the media
source list in the audio display.

Press the voice button and when
prompted, say:
Voice Command

Action and Description

(USB [stick] | iPod
| MP3 [player])

You can now play
music by saying any
of the appropriate
voice commands.
See the media
voice commands.

Words in brackets [ ] are optional and do
not have to be spoken for the system to
understand the command. For example,
for where (USB [stick] | iPOD | MP3
[player]) appears, you can say USB or USB
stick.
To view USB content select:
Message

Browse USB

Description and Action

Depending on how many media files are on your connected
device, an indexing message may appear in the display. When
indexing is complete, the selected source starts to playback
audio automatically.
Message

You can browse the files on the USB
device in categories. Select BROWSE
from the buttons at the bottom of the
audio display and choose from the
following:

Albums
Genres
Browse USB

Message

Reset USB

Play all

Media Voice Commands

Playlists

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

Songs
E142599

Artists

400

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Voice Command

Description and Action

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 You can now play music by saying any of the appropriate
[player])
voice commands.
You can say any of the voice commands that appear within open and close brackets that
are separated by |. For example, where; (what's | what is) appears you say; what's or
what is.
You must say any of the voice commands that appear outside of open and close brackets.
For example, where; (what's | what is) playing, you must say either "what's playing" or
"what is playing".

Command

pause
play

Description and Action

Pauses device playback.
Resumes device playback.

play [album] ___
play all

Play all media on the device from the first
track to the last.

Plays the next track on the current media.

Plays the previous track on current media.

[play] (similar music | more like this)

Creates a playlist with a similar genre to the
one currently playing.

play [song | track | title | file] ___
repeat off
repeat (one | track) [on]

Repeats the current track.

401

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Command

Description and Action

shuffle [all] [on]

Plays the current playlist in a random order.
(Not all devices support this command.)

At any time during playback, you can press
the voice button and ask the system what is
playing. The system reads the metadata tags
(if populated) of the current track.

•
•

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it
could be the name of anything, such as a
group, artist or song. For example you
could say "Play artist The Beatles".

Bluetooth Audio
The system is also capable of playing
music from your cellular phone through
Bluetooth.

Examples of USB Commands
SYNC provides the user with many intuitive
ways to find and play a song using voice.
For example, if we have a song called
"Penny Lane" from the album "Magical
Mystery Tour" we can say the following to
play this song:
•
•

Play album "Magical Mystery Tour".
Play "Magical Mystery Tour".

To switch the Bluetooth Audio on, press
the MEDIA button and select:
Menu Item

BT audio

Play song "Penny Lane".
Play "Penny Lane".

Then any of the following:

If we wanted to play the entire album, we
can say:

Voice Command

Media Menu Features
The media menu allows you to select how
to play your music (such as by artist, genre,
shuffle or repeat), find similar music or
reset the index of your USB devices.

402

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

Message

Options

Description and Action

This will enter the media menu.

Then any of the following:
Message

Description and Action

Shuffle

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Repeat track

Choose to shuffle or repeat your music. Once you make your
choice, it remains on until you switch it off.

Similar music

You can play similar types of music to the current playlist
from the USB port. The system uses the metadata information of each track to compile a playlist. The system then
creates a new list of similar tracks and then begins playing.
Each track must have the metadata tags populated for this
feature. With certain playing devices, if your metadata tags
are not populated, the tracks will not be available in voice
recognition, the play menu or this option. However, if you
place these tracks onto your playing device in mass storage
device mode they are available in voice recognition, the play
menu or this option. The system places unknowns into any
unpopulated metadata tag.

Reset USB

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.
2. Press the MEDIA button (next to the
audio display) to select USB playback.

Accessing Your USB Song Library
1.

Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Message

Browse USB

Description and Action

This menu allows you to select and play your media files by
artist, album, genre, playlist or track.

If there are no media files to access, the
display indicates there is no media.

403

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)

If there are media files, you have the following options:
Display

Play all

Description and Action

Play all indexed media files from your device one at a time
*

in numerical order.
Press the OK button to select. The first track title appears
in the display.
Playlists

Access your playlists (from formats like ASX, M3U, WPL,
*

or MTP).
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired playlist, and then press the
OK button.
Songs

Search for and play a specific indexed track.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired track, and then press the OK
button.

Artists

Sort all indexed media files by artist. The system then lists

and plays all artists and tracks alphabetically.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired artist, and then press the OK
button.
Albums

Sort all indexed media files by album.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired album, and then press the
OK button.

Genres

Sort all indexed media files by genre (category) type.
1. Press the OK button to select.
2. Scroll to select the desired genre, and then press the
OK button.

Browse USB

Browse all supported media files on your media player
connected to the USB port. You can only view media files
that are compatible with SYNC. (Other files are not
visible.)
1. Press the OK button to select.

404

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Display

Description and Action

2. Scroll to browse indexed media files on the device, and
then press the OK button.
Reset USB

Resets the USB index. After the new indexing is complete,
you can choose what to play from the USB song library.

You can use the buttons at the bottom of the audio display to jump to a certain
alphabetical category quickly. You can also use the letters on the audio system's numeric
keypad to jump in the list.

USB 2 (If Equipped)

Using Voice Commands

Your vehicle may come equipped with an
additional USB port. If so, USB 1 is located
at the front of the vehicle at the bottom of
the instrument panel. USB 2 is located
inside the storage compartment of the
vehicle's center console.

You can access and view your USB songs
using voice commands.
Plug the device into your vehicle's USB
port.
Press the voice button and when
prompted, say any of the following
commands:

You can plug in an additional USB device
into the second USB port.
You can access both USB devices by using
voice commands.

Accessing and Viewing USB Media

(browse | search | show) all (album |
albums)

To access a USB device press the voice
button and when prompted say:

(browse | search | show) all (artist |
artists)

Voice command

USB 1

(browse | search | show) all (genre |
genres)

USB 2

(browse | search | show) all (playlist |
playlists)

Note: SYNC only supports one connected
iOS (Apple) devices at a time (whichever
one you plug in first). When you connect a
second iOS device, the systems charges it,
but does not support playback from it.

Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings

(browse | search | show) artist ___
(browse | search | show) genre ___

You can access these menus using the
audio display. See Using SYNC™ With
Your Phone (page 382).

(browse | search | show) playlist ___

405

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Commands for Audio
Sources

Voice Command

Your voice system allows you to change
audio sources with a simple voice
command.

help

E142599
*

Press the voice button and when
prompted say:

If equipped.

Radio Voice Commands

Voice Command

If you are listening to the radio,
press the voice button, and then
E142599
say any of the commands in the
following table.

(music | audio | entertainment) [system]
Below are a few examples of voice
commands you can use.

If you are not listening to the radio,
press the voice button and, after the
tone, say:

[tune [to]] AM
[tune [to]] AM1
[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)

Voice Command

Radio

[tune [to]] AM 2
Bluetooth (audio | stereo)

You can then say any of the following
commands.

(disc | CD [player]) play

[tune [to]] AM

[tune [to]] FM

[tune [to]] AM1

[tune [to]] FM1

[tune [to]] AM (autostore | AST |
autoset)

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset)

[tune [to]] AM 2

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] (AM ___ | ___ [AM])

Radio

[tune [to]] AM preset ___

tune [to] SAT

[tune [to]] AM1 preset ___

Sirius

[tune [to]] FM
[tune [to]] FM1

(USB [stick] | iPod | MP3 [player])

[tune [to]] FM (autostore | AST |
autoset) preset ___

406

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice Command

Voice Commands

[tune [to]] FM 2

[tune [to]] SAT 2 preset ___

[tune [to]] (FM ___ | ___ [FM])

[tune [to]] SAT 3 preset ___

[tune [to]] FM preset ___
FM ___ HD ___

tune [to] [Sirius]
Help

[tune [to]] Sirius
[channel] ___

[tune [to]] FM 2 preset ___
HD ___

You can say the
channel number (0233) to listen to that
Sirius station.

[tune [to]] preset ___
CD Voice Commands

Tune

If you are listening to a CD, press
the voice button, and then say
any of the commands in the
following table.

help
*

E142599

If equipped.

Sirius Satellite Radio Voice Commands
(If equipped)

E142599

If you are not listening to a CD, press
the voice button and, after the tone,
say:

To listen to Sirius satellite radio,
press the voice button and, after
the tone, say:

Voice Command

(disc | CD [player]) play
Voice Commands

You can then say any of the following
commands.

Sirius

pause

When you are listening to Sirius
satellite radio, you can press the voice
button, and say any of the commands
in the following table.

play
[play] next track
[play] previous track

Voice Commands

tune [to] SAT

[play | change to] track [number] ___

[tune [to]] SAT 1

repeat (track | song) [on]

[tune [to]] SAT 2

repeat folder [on]

[tune [to]] SAT 3

repeat off

[tune [to]] preset ___

(shuffle | random | mix) [on | (tracks |
songs) [on]]

[tune [to]] SAT 1 preset ___

407

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Use the website at any time to check your
phone's compatibility, register your
account and set preferences as well as
access a customer representative via an
online chat (during certain hours). Visit
www.SYNCMyRide.com,
www.SYNCMyRide.ca or
www.syncmaroute.ca for more
information.

Voice Command

SYNC™ TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC system is easy to use. However,
should questions arise, see the tables
below.
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

There is excessive background noise during a phone
call.

The audio control settings
on your phone may be
affecting SYNC performance.

Review your phone's manual
about audio adjustments.

During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.
SYNC is not able to download my phonebook.
This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try pushing your phonebook
contacts to SYNC by using
the Add Contacts feature.
Use the SYNCmyphone
feature available on the
website.

The system says Phonebook
Try pushing your phonebook
Downloaded but the
This may be a limitation on contacts to SYNC by using
phonebook in SYNC is
your phone's capability.
the Add Contacts feature.
empty or missing contacts.

408

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

If the missing contacts are
stored on your SIM card, try
moving them to the device
memory.
Remove any pictures or
special ring tones associated with the missing
contact.
Depending upon your phone,
you may have to grant SYNC
permission to access your
phonebook contacts. Make
sure to confirm when
prompted by your phone
during the phonebook
download.
Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.
Try deleting your device
from SYNC, deleting SYNC
from your device and trying
again.

I am having trouble
connecting my phone to
SYNC.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Check the security and auto
accept and prompt always
settings relative to the SYNC
Bluetooth connection on
your phone.
Update your device's firmware.

409

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Phone issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Turn off the Auto phonebook download setting.

Text messaging is not
working on SYNC.

This is a phone-dependent
feature.

Go to the website to review
your phone's compatibility.

This may be a possible
phone malfunction.

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device or
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

USB and media issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Try turning off the device,
resetting the device,
removing the device's
battery, then trying again.

I am having trouble
connecting my device.

This may be a possible
device malfunction.

Make sure you are using the
manufacturer's cable.
Make sure you insert the
USB cable correctly into the
device and the USB port.
Make sure that the device
does not have an autoinstall program or active
security settings.

SYNC does not recognize
my device when I turn on the
car.

Bluetooth audio does not
stream.

This is a device limitation.

Make sure you are not
leaving the device in your
vehicle during very hot or
cold temperatures.

Review the device compatibility chart on the SYNC
This is a phone-dependent
website to confirm your
feature.
phone supports the
Bluetooth audio streaming
function.

410

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
USB and media issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The device is not connected.

Make sure you correctly
connect the device to SYNC,
and that you have pressed
play on your device.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist,
song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC does not recognize
music that is on my device.

Make sure that all song
details are populated.

The file may be corrupted.
The song may have copyright protection, which does
not allow it to play.

Some devices require you to
change the USB settings
from mass storage to MTP
class.

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Review the phone voice
commands and the media
You may be using the wrong
voice commands at the
voice commands.
beginning of their respective
sections.
SYNC does not understand
what I am saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong time.

After pressing the voice icon,
wait until after the tone
sounds and Listening
appears before saying a
command. Any command
spoken before this does not
register with the system.

Review the media voice
SYNC does not understand You may be using the wrong
commands at the beginning
the name of a song or artist.
voice commands.
of the media section.

411

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You may be saying the
name differently than the
way you saved it.

Say the song or artist
exactly as listed. If you say
"Play Artist Prince", the
system does not play music
by Prince and the Revolution
or Prince and the New
Power Generation.
Make sure you are saying the
complete title, such as
"California remix featuring
Jennifer Nettles".

If the song titles are in all
CAPS, you have to spell
them. LOLA requires you to
The system may not be
say "L-O-L-A".
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.
Do not use special characters in the title. The system
does not recognize them.
Review the Phone voice
commands at the beginning
of the phone section.
You may be using the wrong Make sure you are saying the
contacts exactly as they are
voice commands.
listed. For example, if you
save a contact as Joe
SYNC does not understand
Wilson, say "Call Joe
or is calling the wrong
Wilson".
contact when I want to
Using
the
SYNC phone
make a call.
menu, open the phonebook
and scroll to the name
You may be saying the
SYNC is having trouble
name differently than the
understanding. SYNC will
way you saved it.
read the name to you, giving
you some idea of the
pronunciation SYNC is
expecting.

412

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

The system may not be
reading the name the same
way you are saying it.

The system works better if
you list full names, such as
"Joe Wilson" rather than
"Joe".

Contacts in your phonebook Do not use special characters, such as 123 or ICE, as
may be very short and
similar, or they may contain the system does not recognize them.
special characters.
Your phonebook contacts
may be in CAPS.

If a contact is in CAPS, you
have to spell it. JAKE
requires you to say "Call JA-K-E".

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Ensure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android
with OS 2.3 or higher or an
iPhone 3GS or newer with
iOS 5.0 or higher. AdditionAppLink Mobile Applicaally, ensure your phone is
tions: When I select "Find An AppLink capable phone
paired and connected to
New Apps," SYNC does not is not connected to SYNC.
SYNC in order to find
find any applications.
AppLink-capable apps on
your device. iPhone users
must also connect to
SYNC's USB port with an
Apple USB cable.
Ensure you have downloaded and installed the
AppLink-enabled apps are
latest version of the app
My phone is connected, but
not installed and running on from your phone's app store.
I still cannot find any apps.
your mobile device.
Ensure the app is running on
your phone. Some apps
require you to register or

413

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

login on the app on the
phone before using them
with AppLink. Also, some
may have a "Ford SYNC"
setting, so check the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Closing and restarting apps
may help SYNC find the
application if you cannot
discover it inside the vehicle.
On an Android device, if
apps have an "Exit' or 'Quit'
option, select that then
restart the app. If the app
does not have that option,
you can also manually
"Force Close" the app by
going to the phone's settings
Sometime apps do not
menu, selecting 'Apps.' then
My phone is connected, my properly close and re-open
finding the particular app
app(s) are running, but I still their connection to SYNC,
and choosing 'Force stop.'
over ignition cycles, for
cannot find any apps.
Don't forget to restart the
example.
app afterwards, then select
"Find New Apps" on SYNC.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to
force close an app, double
tab the home button then
swipe up on the app to close
it. Tab the home button
again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a
few seconds, the app should
then appear in SYNC's
Mobile App's Menu.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.

There is a Bluetooth bug on
some older versions of the
Android operating system
that may cause apps that
were found on your previous
vehicle drive to not be found
again if you have not turned
off Bluetooth.

414

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Reset the Bluetooth on your
phone by turning it off and
then turning Bluetooth back
on. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC should be able to
automatically re-connect to
your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

SYNC™ (If Equipped)
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

Unplug the USB cable from
the phone, wait a moment,
and plug the USB cable
My iPhone phone is
back in to the phone. After a
connected, my app is
The USB connection to
few seconds, the app should
running, I restarted the app
SYNC may need to be reset.
appear in SYNC's Mobile
but I still cannot find it on
Apps Menu. If not, "Force
SYNC.
Close" the application and
restart it.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my media
app on SYNC, but there is no
sound or the sound is very
low.

The bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.

Some Android devices have
a limited number of
bluetooth ports apps can
I can only see some of the use to connect. If you have
AppLink apps running on my more AppLink apps on your
phone than the number of
phone listed in SYNC's
available Bluetooth ports,
Mobile Apps Menu.
you will not see all of your
apps listed in SYNC's mobile
apps menu.

Try increasing the Bluetooth
volume of the device by
using the device's volume
control buttons which are
most often found on the
side of the device.
Force close or uninstall the
apps you do not want SYNC
to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that
setting in the app's settings
menu on the phone.

SYNC System Reset

The SYNC system in your vehicle has System Reset feature that can be performed if
the function of a SYNC feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and
will not erase any information previously stored in the system (Such as paired devices,
phonebook, call history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset,
press and hold the Seek Up (>>) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power
button. Release both buttons after 2-3 seconds. Please allow a few minutes for the
reset to complete. After a few minutes has passed you can resume using the SYNC
system.

415

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Getting to Know Your System

GENERAL INFORMATION

The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth-enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.

Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can
simply touch the item or option that you
want to select. The button changes color
when you select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.

E205444

416

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Item

Menu Item

Action and Description

Status Bar

This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current
system activities including climate settings, voice
commands and phone functions such as text messages.

Home

This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it
takes you to the home screen view.

Clock

This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually
or have it controlled by the vehicle's GPS location. See
Settings (page 467).

Outside
Temperature

This displays the current outside temperature.

Feature Bar

You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a
feature.
The Status Bar

The touchscreen allows you quick access
to all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment
options. Using the status and feature bar
you can quickly select the feature you want
to use.

Additional icons also display in the status
bar depending on market, vehicle options
and current operation. If a feature is not
active, the icon does not display. Certain
icons may move to the left or right
depending on what options are active.

Note: Your system is equipped with a
feature that allows you to access and
control audio features for 10 minutes after
you switch the ignition off (and no doors
open).

417

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

E223130

Callout

Item

Description

Driver Temperature

This shows the temperature the driver selects through
the climate control system.

Heated steering
wheel
(If equipped)

When you activate the heated steering wheel option
on the touch screen, this icon displays. It only displays
when there is not a physical button for the heated
steering wheel.

Passenger
Temperature

When the passenger's temperature has been
adjusted and is no longer linked to the driver's
temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and
the temperatures are linked, the passenger's
temperature does not display.

Microphone Mute

This icon displays when your phone's microphone is
muted. A caller cannot hear you.

Mute

This icon displays when the audio system is muted.

418

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Callout

Item

Description

Download

This icon appears when SYNC 3 has received a software update. Pressing the icon shows more details
about the new software.

Wi-Fi

This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.

Wi-Fi in Range

An available Wi-Fi network is within range.

Roaming

This icon displays when your cell phone is roaming.

Text Message

This icon displays when you receive a text message
on your phone.

911 Assist Off

This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and
your phone is connected to SYNC.

Bluetooth Alert

The Bluetooth alert icon displays when there is an
active Bluetooth alert.

Bluetooth

This icon displays to show an active Bluetooth
connection.

Messages may also appear in the status
bar to provide you with notifications. You
can select the message to view the
associated feature.
Feature Bar
Feature Bar Item

Functions

Audio

Allows you to control the media playing in
your vehicle. You can control all audio
features including AM, FM and satellite
radio, CDs, and media streaming over a
Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.

Climate

Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan
speed and airflow within the vehicle.

Phone

Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and
access the phonebook of your connected
device.

419

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Feature Bar Item

Navigation
(If equipped)

Functions

Allows you to see your vehicle's location on
a virtual road map, get driving directions to
your destination and find points of interest
along your route.

Apps

Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible
apps running on your iphone or android
device. Also, access built-in additional
features such as SiriusXM Traffic and Travel
Link (if equipped).

Settings

You can customize your system with
various settings for the touchscreen display,
feature preferences, and how you want to
interact with your vehicle.
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure
of your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.

Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.

When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar
indicating the status of the voice command
session. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 431).

If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the
cloth and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.

Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)

Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.

Using Voice Recognition

Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some
of the SYNC 3 features on your information
display. The features are visible either in
the right hand display (A) or in the center
of the display (B).

Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on
what is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).

420

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

E208626

421

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

E208634

You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3
screen:
Option

Audio

Information

Information for current audio playing.
Select source.

Navigation

View current road and speed limit (if information is available).
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster
level), distance to destination (depending on cluster level), and ability to
cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is
shown.

Phone

If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *

422

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Option

Information

Quick
dial

All calls

Incoming calls Outgoing calls Missed calls

If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand
steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and
hold to end a voice session.

Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll
through the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.

SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.

Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle
is traveling, not true direction (for example,
if the vehicle is traveling west, the middle
of the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).

PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call
or switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or
reject an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may
be combined with PHONE REJECT and
SEEK PREVIOUS may be combined with
PHONE ACCEPT.

Using the Steering Wheel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.

M:Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).

VOL: Control the volume of audio output.

Using Your Bezel Controls

Mute: Mute the audio output.

Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:

See Steering Wheel (page 76).

423

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
•
•
•
•
•

•

Power: Switch the audio system on
and off.
VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
Seek and Tune: se as you normally
would in audio modes.
Eject: Eject a CD from the audio
system.
SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly
to advance through available media
modes.
SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 364).
DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
Temperature, fan and climate
control buttons: Control the
temperature, fan speed or settings of
the climate control system. See
Climate Control (page 133).

WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it
does not become a projectile or get
damaged in a crash. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury to someone or damage
the phone which could prevent 911 Assist
from working properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.

911 Assist

Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca

424

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call.
If you fail to cancel the call, SYNC
attempts to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call
911, to cancel the call, press Cancel on
your screen or press and hold the
phone button on your steering wheel."

Website

www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains
and Roadside Emergencies sections of
your owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings
(page 467).

To make sure that 911 Assist works
correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a
Bluetooth-enabled and compatible
cell phone to SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time
of the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth-enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power
and be located in the U.S., Canada or
in a territory in which 911 is the
emergency number.

911 Assist May Not Work If
•
•
•

911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of
the fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
of electronically or verbally disclosing to
911 operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not switch the feature on.

In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the
triggers for 911 Assist). If a connected cell
phone sustains damage or loses its
connection to SYNC during a crash, SYNC
will search for and try to connect to a
previously paired cell phone; SYNC will
then attempt to call the emergency
services.

425

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Safety Information

•

Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is
limited to when your vehicle is traveling
at speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make
sure that you review your device's
manual before using it with SYNC 3.

Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.

Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables
out of the way, so they do not interfere
with the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.

•

Screens crowded with information,
such as Point of Interest reviews and
ratings, SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
sports scores, movie times or ski
conditions.
Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts
or recent phone call entries).

See the following table for more specific
examples.
Restricted features

Cellular Phone

Pairing a Bluetooth phone.
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and
recent phone calls.

System Functionality

Editing the keypad code.
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park
assist are active.

426

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Restricted features

Wi-Fi

Editing Wi-Fi settings.
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.

Text Messages

Viewing received text messages.

Navigation

Using the keyboard to enter a destination.
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid
Areas.

Updating Your System

Creating a SYNC Owner Account

You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.

Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
•
•
•

Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
Maintain account permissions.

USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log
into your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.

Visit the website to sign up and register.

Website

www.owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.

SYNC Connect with Ford Pass
With a SYNC Connect-equipped vehicle,
you can use Ford Pass to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel
level and approximate mileage. You can
also schedule specific times to remotely
start your vehicle so it’s ready to hit the
road as soon as you are. Ford Pass is
available through a free download via the
Apple App Store® or Google Play™.
Message and data rates may apply.
Services may be limited by mobile phone
network coverage area.

You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to
start the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your
use of the system. Navigation updates
cannot be installed in the background,
because the files are too large.

427

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
To install the update in your vehicle,
remove anything that is plugged in the USB
ports on the media hub and plug in the
USB drive containing the update. When
the USB drive is plugged in, the installation
should begin immediately. After a
successful installation, the update is
available the next time the vehicle is
started.

If you would like to switch this feature
on later, select:
Menu Item

Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates

Please refer to the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.

When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time.
Software downloads can take place for up
to 30 minutes after you have switched your
vehicle off. The updates do not interrupt
the normal use of your SYNC 3 system. If
a download does not complete for any
reason, the download continues where it
left off at the next Wi-Fi connected
opportunity. Upon activation of an update,
a banner displays on the touchscreen
indicating the system update. Select the
icon to see more detail. This icon displays
for two ignition cycles.

To connect your system to Wi-Fi,
select:
Menu Item

Settings
Wi-Fi
Available
Wi-Fi
Networks

From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system
prompts you to set up a
Wi-Fi connection when you
enable this feature.

You can then select your
Wi-Fi network. You may
have to enter the security
code if the network is
secured. The system
confirms when it has
connected to the network.

You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature.
If you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 467). You can also perform
a master reset. See SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting (page 481).

To switch this feature off:
Menu Item

Settings
General
Automatic
System
Updates

428

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

In this menu selection, you
can change the selection
for automatic updates to
OFF.

SYNC™ 3
Support

media content. The system also records a
short diagnostic log of approximately 10
minutes of all recent system activity. The
log profile and other system data may be
used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.

The SYNC support team is available to
help you with any questions you are not
able to answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.

The cellular profile, media device index,
and diagnostic log remain in your vehicle
unless you delete them and are generally
accessible only in your vehicle when the
cellular phone or media player is
connected.

United States: 1-800-392-3673.
Canada: 1-800-565-3673.
Times are subject to change due to
holidays.

Privacy Information

If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform
a Master Reset to erase all stored
information. You can find more information
about the Master Reset in General
Settings. See Settings (page 467). System
data cannot be accessed without special
equipment and access to your vehicle's
SYNC 3 module. Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada do not access the system
data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order,
or where required by law enforcement,
other government authorities, or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.

When you connect a cellular phone to
SYNC 3, the system creates a profile within
your vehicle that links to that cellular
phone. This profile helps in offering you
more cellular features and operating more
efficiently. Among other things, this profile
may contain data about your cellular
phone book, text messages (read and
unread), and call history, including history
of calls when your cell phone was not
connected to the system. In addition, if you
connect a media device, the system
creates and retains an index of supported

HOME SCREEN

429

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

E205446

Item

Home screen display

Audio

Shows the active media source.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the compass.

Phone

The name of the connected phone appears on the
screen. The status of the phone features also
appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge,
911 assist setting state (On or Off), text messaging
and roaming.

Tile

Navigation

This map displays your current location or current
route in real time.
When you have navigation active, you also see the
next turn and the length of time and distance to
your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space
contains the audio information.

If equipped.

430

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
You can touch any of the feature displays
to access that feature.

You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.

Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.

To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice
E142599
button on the steering wheel and
wait for the prompt.

USING VOICE RECOGNITION

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context
and the description of the command tell
you what to say for this dynamic option.

The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio
and climate controls. By using voice
commands, you can keep your hands on
the wheel and your eyes on the road.

Voice Command

There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
Action and Description

Main Menu

Brings you to the main menu.

Go back

Returns you to the previous screen.

Cancel

Ends the voice session.

List of Commands

Gives you a list of possible voice commands.

___ List of Commands You can name any feature and the system gives a list of
commands available for the feature. For example, you could
say:
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
Next Page

You can use this command to view the next page of options on
any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

You can use this command to view the previous page of options
on any screen where multiple pages of choices are given.

Help

Gives you available commands you can use on the current
screen.

Audio Voice Commands

Included here are some of the most
popular commands for each SYNC 3
feature.

___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.

431

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Sirius Channel ___

Description
1

You can say the Sirius channel name or number
such as "Sirius channel 16".

You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
AM ___

Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM
frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM 1580".

FM ___
FM ___ HD ___

Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency
such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.

Bluetooth Audio

Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth
connected device.

USB

Allows you to listen to music on your USB
connected device.

Play Genre ___

For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre to listen to that
selection. Your system must finish indexing
before this option is available. For example, you
could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".

Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
Browse ___

1 This

For USB audio only, you can say the name of an
artist, album, or a genre to browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this
option is available. For example you can say
"Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".

option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature
setting.

Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.

432

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

To adjust the temperature, say:
Voice command

Description

Set Temperature ___

Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F
(15.5–29.5°C).

Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the
system.
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
Voice command

Pair Phone

Description

Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing
process. See Settings (page 467).

Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
Voice command

Description

Call ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
such as "Call Jenny".

Call ___ at ___

Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook
at a specific location such as "Call Jenny at Home".

Dial ___

Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.

Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.

433

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following
commands:
Voice Command

Description

<0-9>

If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you
can continue saying the number.

Dial

Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.

Delete

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.

Clear

Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.

Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
Voice command

Description

Listen to Message
Listen to text message ___

You can say the number of the message you
would like to hear.

Reply to Message
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more
than 20 locations

Navigation Voice Commands (If
Equipped)

Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following
commands to set a destination or find a
point of interest.

You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest
by category:
Voice command

Description

Find an Address

Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can
also search for an address in a specific state or province.

Find a ___

State the name of the POI category or major brand name you
would like to search for such as "Find restaurants".

Find a POI

Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.

434

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command

Description

Find an Intersection

Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.

Find the Nearest

State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would
like to search for.

Show Previous
Destinations

Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.

Show Favorites

Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.

Drive Home

Allows you to route to your home address.

Drive to Work

Allows you to route to your work address.

In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
Voice command

Description

Cancel Route

Cancels the current route.

Detour

Allows you to select an alternate route.

Repeat Instruction

Repeats the last guidance prompt.

Show Route

Displays the active route.

Route Summary

Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.

Where Am I

Provides current location.

Zoom in

Allows you to zoom in on the map.

Zoom out

Allows you to zoom out from the map.

Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
Voice command

Description

Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on
SYNC 3.

List Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.

Find Mobile Apps

SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on
your mobile device.

435

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to
SYNC 3:
Voice command

Description

Say the name of an At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the
app
mobile app on SYNC 3.
Say the name of an SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified
app, followed by
app if the app is running on SYNC 3.
help

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link
Voice Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not
be available in all markets. Activation and
a subscription are required.
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
Voice command

Show Traffic

Description

Displays a list of traffic incidents.

Show Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Show Fuel Prices

Displays a list of fuel prices.

Show 5 Day Forecast

Displays the 5 day weather forecast.

Help

Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
Voice command

Description

Voice Settings

Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.

Interaction Mode
Standard

Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.

Interaction Mode
Advanced

Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.

Call Confirmation On

Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.

436

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command

Call Confirmation Off

Description

The system does not confirm before placing a call.

Voice Command Lists On The system displays a short list of available commands.
Voice Command Lists Off The system does not display the list of commands.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.

You can use the volume control to adjust
the volume of the system voice prompts.
While prompt is active, adjust the volume
control up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or
turn the fan knob) to increase or decrease
the fan speed to the setting you prefer.

ENTERTAINMENT

437

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

E242502

Message

Message and description

Sources

Direct Tune

Presets

Note: Your vehicle may allow you to save
presets from different audio sources on the
same page.

Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.

You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.

438

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu item

AM
FM
SIRIUS

USB

The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.

Bluetooth Stereo
Apps
1 This

If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they
display here as individual source selections.

feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
Once you have entered the station's
call numbers, you can select:

AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station

Menu item

You can use the tune or seek controls on
the radio bezel to select a station.

Action and description

Enter

Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.

Menu item

Cancel

Press to exit
without changing
the station.

A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only
enter a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.

Presets

To tune a station using the
touchscreen, select:

Direct Tune

To set a new preset, tune to the station
and then press and hold one of the
memory preset buttons. The audio mutes
briefly while the system saves the station
and then returns.

You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.

There are two preset banks available for
AM and three banks for FM. To access
additional presets, tap the preset button.
The indicator on the preset button shows
which bank of presets you are currently
viewing.

439

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated)

For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is
required), the online media player and a
list of SiriusXM satellite radio channels,
and other features, please visit
www.siriusxm.com in the United States,
www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.

Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.

E234451

SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service
that broadcasts a variety of music, sports,
news, weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed
SiriusXM satellite radio system includes
hardware and a limited subscription term
that begins on the date of sale or lease of
your vehicle. See an authorized dealer for
availability.

Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.

The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Menu item

Action and description

Browse

Touch this button to see a list of available stations.

Direct Tune

A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of
a station.
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
Enter

The system tunes to the station you select.

Cancel

You exit the pop-up and the current station
continues to play.

You can press the backspace button to delete the previous
number.

440

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu item

Replay

Action and description

Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as you remain tuned to
the current station. Changing stations erases the previous
audio.
When you are in replay mode, you are not
able to select a different preset until you
return to live audio. Pressing this button
returns you to the live broadcast.

Live

ALERT

Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system
alerts you when it plays again on any channel.
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See
Settings (page 467).
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the
preset button shows which bank of presets
you are currently viewing.

Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then
press and hold one of the memory preset
buttons. The audio mutes briefly while the
system saves the station and returns once
the station is stored.

Satellite Radio Electronic Serial
Number (ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 467).

SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Antenna obstructions

For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear
of snow and ice build-up and keep luggage and other
materials as far away from the antenna as possible.

Terrain

Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway
overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.

Station overload

When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower,
a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and the audio
system may mute.

Satellite radio signal
interference

Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.

441

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Troubleshooting tips
Message

Acquiring Signal

Cause

Action

Radio requires more than two
seconds to produce audio for
the selected channel.

Satellite antenna fault There is an internal module or
system failure present.
SIRIUS system failure

Invalid Channel

No action required. This
message should disappear
shortly.
If this message does not clear
shortly, or with an ignition key
cycle, your receiver may have
a fault. See an authorized
dealer for service.

The channel is no longer avail- Tune to another channel or
able.
choose another preset.

Unsubscribed Channel Your subscription does not
include this channel.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to subscribe to the
channel, or tune to another
channel.

Satellite acquiring
signal…

The signal is lost from the Siri- The signal is blocked. When
usXM satellite or SiriusXM
you move into an open area,
tower to your vehicle antenna. the signal should return.

Updating…

Update of channel programming in progress.

No action required. The
process may take up to three
minutes.

Questions? Call 1888-539-7474

Your satellite service is no
longer available.

Contact SiriusXM at 1-888539-7474 to resolve subscription issues.

None found. Check
channel guide.

All the channels in the selected Use the channel guide to turn
category are either skipped or off the Lock or Skip function on
locked.
that station.

SIRIUS Subscription
updated

SiriusXM has updated the
channels available for your
vehicle.

No action required.

HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)

To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 467).

Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.

Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not
available in all markets.

442

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital
evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Your
system has a special receiver that allows
it to receive digital broadcasts (where
available) in addition to the analog
broadcasts, it already receives. Digital
broadcasts provide a better sound quality
than analog broadcasts with free,
crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a
guide to available stations and
programming, please visit:

The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM
mode (only) if the current station is
broadcasting multiple digital broadcasts.
The highlighted numbers signify available
digital channels where new or different
content is available. HD1 signifies the main
programming status and is available in
analog and digital broadcasts. Other
multicast stations (HD2 through HD7) are
only available digitally.

Website

www.hdradio.com

Note: There is also an additional feature
for stations that have more than 1 HD
multicast (For example, HD1 or HD2). The
HD logo and Radio text appears as a button.
Pressing this button allows you cycle
through all of the HD stations on that
specific frequency. For example, if you are
on 101.1 and it has HD1, HD2, HD3, pressing
the button repeatedly causes the radio to
cycle through the HD stations in a cyclic
increasing order.

When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:

E142616

When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Message

Presets

Action and description

Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset.
Touch and hold a memory preset slot until the sound returns.
There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound
returns when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2
or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes before the digital
audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital
signal.

Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is
outside the station’s reception area.

443

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues

Reception area

If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the
fringe of the reception area, the station may mute due to
weak signal strength.
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the
analog broadcast until the digital broadcast is available again.
However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7
multicast channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless
it is able to connect to the digital signal again.

Station blending

When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the station in the analog
version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio
station, it shifts to the digital version. Depending on the station
quality, you may hear a slight sound change when the station
changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from
analog to digital sound or digital back to analog sound.

In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to
a station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
Issues

Cause

Action

Echo, stutter, skip or
This is poor time alignment by No action required. This is a
repeat in audio.
the radio broadcaster.
broadcast issue.
Increase or decrease in
audio volume.
Sound fading or
blending in and out.

The radio is shifting between
analog and digital audio.

There is an audio mute
delay when selecting
HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.

The digital multicast is not
No action required. This is
available until the HD Radio
normal behavior. Wait until the
broadcast is decoded. Once
audio is available.
decoded, the audio is available.

444

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

No action required. The reception issue may clear up as you
continue to drive.

SYNC™ 3
Potential station issues
Issues

Cannot access HD2 or
HD3 multicast channel
when recalling a preset
or from a direct tune.

Cause

Action

The previously stored multicast No action required. The station
preset or direct tune is not
is not available in your current
available in your current recep- location.
tion area.

1
Text information does Data service issue by the radio
Fill out the station issue form.
not match currently
broadcaster.
playing audio.

There is no text
Data service issue by the radio Fill out the station issue form.
1
information shown for broadcaster.
currently selected
frequency.
1

You can find the form here:

Website

http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback

CD (If equipped)

HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation
and foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD
and HD Radio logos are proprietary
trademarks of DTS. Ford Motor Company
and DTS are not responsible for the
content sent using HD Radio technology.
Content may be changed, added or deleted
at any time at the station owner's
discretion.

Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.

The following buttons are also available:
Button

Function

Browse

You can use the browse button to select a track.

Repeat

Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate
the track is set to repeat.

445

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

Function

For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat
off, repeat one track (a small number one displays), and repeat
current folder (a small folder displays).
Shuffle

Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play
in random order.

Bluetooth Stereo or USB

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.

Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.

The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
Button

Function

Repeat

Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through
three modes: repeat off (button not highlighted), repeat all
(button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with
a small number one).

Shuffle

Play the tracks in random order.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to
provide 30-second skip buttons when you
listen to audio books or podcasts. These
buttons allow you to skip forward or
backward within a track.

You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the
currently playing track, press the cover art
or Info button.

While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:

Button

Function

Browse

If available, displays the list of tracks in the
Now Playing playlist.

New Search

This option, which is available under
browse, allows you to play all tracks or to
filter the available media into one of the
below categories.
Play All

446

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

Function

Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
A-Z Jump

This button allows you to choose a specific
letter to view within the category you are
browsing.

Explore Device

If available, this allows you to browse the
folders and files on your USB device.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.

USB Ports

Apps
The system supports the use of certain
audio apps such as iHeartRadio through a
USB or Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 464).

Supported Media Players, Formats
and Metadata Information
E211463

The system is capable of hosting nearly
any digital media player, including iPod,
iPhone, and most USB drives.

The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the
instrument panel.

Supported audio formats include MP3,
WMA, WAV, AAC, and FLAC.

This feature allows you to plug in USB
media devices, memory sticks, flash drives
or thumb drives, and charge devices if they
support this feature.

Supported audio file extensions include
MP3, WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and
FLAC.

447

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.

CLIMATE

SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the
media files, provide information about the
file.

Touch the climate button on the
touchscreen to access your climate control
features. Depending on your vehicle line
and option package, your climate screen
may look different from one of the screens
shown below. Your screen may not contain
all of the features shown.

If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.

Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 467).

SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to
50,000 songs per USB device, for up to 10
devices.

E223958

448

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
A

Driver temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the
temperature.

Heated steering wheel:

MAX Defrost: Touch the button
to maximize defrosting. Air flows
through the windshield vents,
the fan automatically adjusts to
the highest speed and the driver
and passenger temperatures are
set to HI. You can use this setting
to defog or clear a thin covering
of ice from the windshield. The
heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you
select MAX Defrost.

Note: This feature only
functions when you switch the
engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the
heated steering wheel on and
off. It takes about 5 minutes to
warm the steering wheel to 74°F
(23°C) in temperatures as low
as -4°F (-20°C). The wheel
maintains an approximate
temperature of 90°F (32°C) and
operates independently from the
heated seats and other
climate-control functions. The
heating element is in between
the leather covering and foam
core to help provide maximum
heat without adversely affecting
the feel of the steering wheel.

Defrost: Distributes air through
the windshield defroster vents
and demister vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the
heated rear window on and off.
See Heated Windows and
Mirrors (page 141).
D

Note: The heated steering wheel
may remain on after remote
starting the vehicle, based on
your remote start settings. The
heated steering wheel may also
turn on when you start your
vehicle, if it was on when you
switched your vehicle off.

AUTO: Touch the button to
switch on automatic operation.
Select the desired temperature
using the temperature control.
The system adjusts fan speed,
air distribution, air conditioning
operation, and selects outside
air or recirculated air to heat or
cool the vehicle in order to
maintain the desired
temperature.

Note: For steering wheels with
wood trim, the heating feature
will not heat the wheel between
the 10 o'clock and 2 o'clock
positions.

Power: Touch the button to
switch the system on and off.
Switching off the climate control
system prevents outside air from
entering the vehicle.

DUAL: This button lights up
when the passenger controls are
active. To switch the off and link
the passenger temperature to
the driver temperature, touch the
DUAL button.

Defrost: A pop up appears on
the screen to display the defrost
options.

449

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Panel: Distributes air through
the instrument panel vents.

Note: the passenger side
temperature and the DUAL
indication automatically turn on
when you or your passenger
adjust the passenger
temperature.
G

Passenger temperature:
Touch up or down to adjust the
temperature.

Fan speed: Touch up or down
to increase or decrease the
volume of air that circulates in
your vehicle.

Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and
rear seat floor vents.
K

MAX A/C: Touch the button to
activate and maximize cooling.
The driver and passenger
temperatures are set to LO,
recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel vents, air
conditioning automatically turns
on and the fan automatically
adjusts to the highest speed.

Note: You cannot adjust the fan
speed when the system is set to
AUTO or MAX A/C.
I

Rear: A pop up appears on the
screen to display the rear control
options.

A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.

Touch Rear Lock to switch the
rear climate control functions off
and on.

Note: In certain conditions (for
example, Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even when
you switch the air conditioning
A/C button off.

Touch Rear Control to allow
the rear seat passengers to
adjust the rear climate settings.
Touch it again to prevent the rear
seat passengers from adjusting
the settings. Rear Control
automatically turns off when you
use the touchscreen to adjust
the rear climate settings.
If your vehicle has automatic
climate controls, select Auto to
connect the rear climate settings
to the Auto settings of the driver.
Touch the up and down arrows
to adjust the temperature.
J

A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.

Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually, together, or with
Defrost to direct the air flow to
the area you desire.

450

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the
First Time

Recirculated air: Touch to
switch the recirculated air on or
off. When recirculated air is on,
it may reduce the amount of
time needed to cool down the
interior (when used with A/C)
and help reduce odors from
reaching the interior.

Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.

Note: Recirculated air may turn
off automatically (or the system
may prevent it from turning on)
in all airflow modes except MAX
A/C to reduce risk of fogging. It
may also turn on and off
automatically in Panel or
Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to
improve cooling efficiency.

To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model
as it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that
you use extreme caution when using any
device that may take your focus off the
road. Your primary responsibility is the safe
operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone
Then select:

Hands-free calling is one of the main
features of the system. Once you pair your
cell phone, you can access many options
using the touchscreen or voice commands.
While the system supports a variety of
features, many are dependent on your cell
phone’s functionality.

Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.

451

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

•
•

Call waiting notification.
Caller identification.

Other features, such as text messaging
using Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
To check your phone’s compatibility,
see your phone’s manual or visit the
website:
Websites

At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.

G
E251249

452

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Item

Menu Item

Recent
Call List

Contacts

Action and Description

Displays your recent calls.
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down
menu at the top of the screen. You can choose:
All

Incoming

Outgoing

Missed

All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.
A-Z Jump

Selecting this button allows
you to choose a specific letter
to view.

Phone
Settings

Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the
phone settings options.
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring
tones and alerts.

Change
Device

Gives you access to the list of paired or connected
Bluetooth devices allowing you to change or select a
device.

Text
Messages

Displays all recent text messages.

Phone
Keypad

Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Call

Do Not
Disturb

Press this button to begin a
call.

Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do not display on the
screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.

Making Calls

Users with phones having voice services
may see a button to access the feature.
For example, iPhone users see a Siri button.
A press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.

There are many ways to make calls from
the SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice
Recognition (page 431). You can use the
touchscreen to place calls as well.

453

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

To accept the call, select:

To call a number in your contacts,
select:
Menu Item

Contacts

Menu Item

Action and Description

You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the
number that you want to
call. The system begins the
call.

Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item

Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.

To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Recent Call
List

You can then select an
entry that you want to call.
The system begins the call.

Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.

During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name
and number display on the screen along
with the call duration.

To call a number that is not stored in
your phone, select:
Menu Item

The phone status items are also visible:
•
•
•

Action and Description

Phone
Keypad

Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.

Call

The system begins the call.

Signal Strength.
Battery.
911 Assist (United States and Canada
only). See Settings (page 467).

You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:

Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.

Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.

454

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Item
Item

End Call

Privacy
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the
button on the
steering wheel.

Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.

Text Messaging

Keypad

Press this to access
the phone keypad.

Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.

Mute

You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.

Note: Certain features in text messaging
are speed-dependent and not available
when your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).

Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a
pop-up with the caller name and ID, if supported by your cell phone. You can select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Hear It

Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.

View

View the text on the touchscreen.

Call

To call the sender.

You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message
that you would like to use and confirm to send the message.
SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.

To exit the screen.

Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.

SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay
and Android Auto to access your phone.

Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.

When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.

Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or
newer with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to
the latest iOS version is recommended.
1.

455

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 377).

SYNC™ 3
2. Follow the prompts on the
touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on
your phone to allow access to Apple
CarPlay.

Menu Item

Android Auto Preferences
Enable Android Auto

After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.

Note: Android Auto must be switched on
after plugging in your device.

To disable this feature from the
Settings screen, select:

Menu Item

Apple CarPlay Preferences

Android Auto Preferences

Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Apple CarPlay. Select the name of your
device and select:

Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and select:

Disable

To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple
CarPlay home screen and select the SYNC
app.

Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.

Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.

To return to SYNC 3, select the
speedometer icon in the Android Auto
menu bar at the bottom of the
touchscreen, and then touch the option to
return to SYNC.

Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.

Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.

Download the Android Auto app to
your device from Google Play to
prepare your device (this may require
mobile data usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.

NAVIGATION (If Equipped)
Your navigation system is comprised of
two main features, destination mode and
map mode.

2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 377).
3. To switch this feature on from the
Settings screen, scroll left on the
screen and select:

456

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Map Mode

North up (2D map) always
shows the northern direction to
be upward on the screen.

Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D
city maps show detailed outlines of
buildings, visible land use, landscape
features, and detailed railroad
infrastructure for the most essential cities
around the globe.

E207749

3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
E207748
touching the map twice, and
then dragging your finger along the shaded
bar with arrows at the bottom of the map.

3D landmarks appear as clear, visible
objects that are typically recognizable and
have a certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models
of entire city areas including navigable
roads, parks, rivers and rendered buildings.
3D landmarks and city models appear in
3D map mode only. Coverage of these
varies and improves with updated map
releases.

E207751

E251780

Re-center the map by pressing
this icon whenever you scroll the
map away from your vehicle’s
current location.
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.

Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E251779

E207752

Points of Interest (POI)
grouping icon: You can choose
up to three POI icons to display
E207754 on the map. If the chosen POIs
are located close together or are
at the same location a box is used to
display a single category icon instead of
repeating the same icon, in order to reduce
clutter. When you select the box on the
map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the
pop up to see a list of the available POIs.
You can scroll through and select POIs
from this list.

Select the zoom out icon to see
a farther away view of the map.
E207753

You can adjust the view in preset
increments. You can also pinch to zoom in
or out of the map.
The information bar tells you the names
of streets, cities or landmarks as you hover
over them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on
the right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:

E207750

If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.

Heading up (2D map) This
always shows the direction of
forward travel to be upward on
the screen. This view is available
for map scales up to 3 mi (5 km).

457

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic
flow will be indicated on the map by green
(clear), yellow (slowing), and red
(stopped) road highlights. Traffic flow is
indicated where the information is
available and varies across the US.

You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different
types of incidents. See Settings (page
467).
You can set a destination by hovering
above a location and selecting:
Button

Start

Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
Menu Item

Description

Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Search

Street Address
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching
out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes
with or without the prefix. For example, you could enter "6N340
Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)

458

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Description

Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are
accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select
as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your
possible selections.
Previous Destina- Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.
tions
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Delete
All
Home

Select this option to remove all previous destinations.

Select to navigate to your set Home destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
Home

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for home. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Work

Select to navigate to your set Work destination.
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
Work

A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a
favorite for work. Select:

Yes

Enter a location into the search bar and press:

Save
Favorites

Favorites include any location you have previously saved.
To add Favorites:
Add a
Select this button and enter a location into the destination
Favorite bar.
Search

Select this option to have the system locate the address
you have entered.

Save

Select this button when the address you have entered
appears on the screen.

459

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Description

The address saves as a favorite and you see the favorites screen. You
can now select this address from the favorites screen.
Point of Interest POI categories that may display (based on market and vehicle
(POI) Categories configuration):
Food
Fuel
Hotel
ATM
See All

Press to view additional categories. Once you have selected
a category, follow the menus to find what you are looking
for.

Inside of these categories you can search by:
Nearby
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City

Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Save

This saves the destination to your favorites.

Start

This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your
route from three different options.
Fastest

Uses the fastest moving roads
possible.

Shortest

Uses the shortest distance possible.

Economical Route

Uses the most fuel-efficient route.

The time and distance for each route also displays.
Cancel

On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation.
The system asks for confirmation then returns you to the map mode
screen.

460

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Menu Item

Start

Action and Description

The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your
destination.
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the
map if you want the system to repeat route guidance instructions.
When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the
distance to the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the
vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining
travel time and the distance to your destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point
of your destination and you may have to cancel a route manually.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.

Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
To access the Navigation menu, press:

Button

Menu
You can then select:
Screen View

Full Map

A full screen map displays during navigation.

Highway
Exit Info

Highway exit information displays on the right hand side
of the screen during navigation.
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels,
fuel stations and ATMs when they are present at the
exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of
specific locations. You can select the POI location as a
waypoint or destination if desired.

Turn List

Only available during an active route. Displays all of the
turns on the current route.
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by
selecting the road from the list. A screen then appears
and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new
turn list.

461

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Button

Traffic List

You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by
pressing this button. This information requires an active subscription
to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays
(if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby
or on the route.

Navigation
Settings

Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 467).

Where Am I?

Provides your current location city and the nearest road.

The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
Cancel Route

The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map
mode screen.

View Route

Press this to see a map of the full route.

Detour

An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.

Edit Waypoints

Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See
Waypoints later in this section for information on how to set
waypoints.
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
You can
also have
the system
set the
order for
you by
pressing:

Optimize Order

To return to Go
your route
press:
1.

Select the search icon (magnifying
glass) while on an active route. This
brings up the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination
has been selected, the screen allows
you to set the destination as a
waypoint by selecting:

Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation
route as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:

462

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Add Waypoint

The waypoint list then appears and you are
able to re-order all of your waypoints by
selecting the menu icon on the right hand
side of the location. You can select up to
five waypoints.

You can also have the system set the order Optimize Order
for you by pressing:
To return to your route, press:

SYNC AppLink

cityseeker (If Equipped)

The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.

Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).

First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and
sent to your SYNC AppLink app. The
location of your vehicle can be viewed
within the app. You can also view walking
directions to your vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation

E225487

When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search

cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants,
hotels and attractions.

Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.

When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such
as address, phone number and a star
rating.

Send To Car

Press More Information to see a photo,
a review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.

You can send destinations to your
navigation system using a computer or
phone using AppLink.

463

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
The system calculates a reasonable
efficient route based on available speed
limits, traffic, and road conditions. You may
know a local short cut that is more efficient
at a given time than the route provided by
SYNC 3, but you should expect a slight
difference in minutes or miles with the
SYNC 3 route.

For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average
cost, review, handicap access, hours of
operation, and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Navigation Map Updates

Restaurant
Business center
Handicap facilities
Laundry
Refrigerator
24 hour room service
Fitness center
Internet access
Pool
Wi-Fi

Annual navigation map updates are
available for purchase through your
dealership, by calling 1-866-462-8837 in
the United States and Canada or
01-800-557-5539 in Mexico. You can also
visit:
Website

www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model
of your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.

Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of
operation and admission price.

HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to
HERE by going to
www.here.com/mapcreator. HERE
evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their
investigation by e-mail.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate
and subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link information. It helps you
locate the best gas prices, find movie
listings, get current traffic alerts, view the
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see current sports scores. See Apps
(page 464).

Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.

APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3
AppLink enabled smartphone apps.
Once an app is running through AppLink,
you can control main features of the app
through voice commands and steering
wheel controls.

464

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.

Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.

Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.

Menu Item

Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.

Find Mobile Apps

Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites

Action and Description

SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.

Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.

Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded.
Some apps will work automatically with no
setup. Other apps will want you to configure
your personal settings and personalize your
experience by creating stations or
favorites.We recommend you do this at
home or outside of your vehicle.

The connected device sends data to Ford
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage
statistics and debugging information. We
retain this data for only as long as
necessary to provide this service,
troubleshoot, and improve products and
services and to offer you products and
services that may interest you where
allowed by law.

Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Ford is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.

Note: You must enable mobile apps for
each connected device the first time you
select a mobile app using the system.
Note: Ford reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Ford is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.

Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.

465

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 467).

operation of your vehicle. We recommend
against the use of any hand-held device
while driving and encourage the use of
voice-operated systems when possible.
Make sure you are aware of all applicable
local laws that may affect the use of
electronic devices while driving.

App Permissions
The system organizes the App permissions
into groups. You can grant these group
permissions individually. You can change
a permission group status any time when
not driving, by using the settings menu.
While in the settings menu, you can also
see the data included in each group.

Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.

When you launch an app using SYNC 3,
the system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle
information, Driving characteristics, GPS
and Speed, and/or Push notifications. You
can enable all groups or none of them
during the initial app permissions prompts.
The settings menu offers individual group
permission control.

Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and
click on Coverage map and details for a
complete listing of all traffic areas covered
by SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.

Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.

Note: Neither Sirius nor Ford is responsible
for any errors or inaccuracies in the SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link services or its use in
vehicles.

Note: If you disable group permissions,
apps will still be enabled to work with SYNC
3 unless you deactivate All Apps in the
settings menu.

When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link, it can help you locate the
best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the current
weather map, get accurate ski conditions
and see scores to current sports games.

SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)

466

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby

Action and Description

Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route,
near your vehicle’s current location or near any of your favorite
places, if programmed.

Fuel Prices

Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your
vehicle’s location or on an active navigation route.

Movie Listings

Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their
show times, if available.

Weather

Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather,
or the five-day forecast for the chosen area.
Map

Select to see the weather map,
which can show storms, radar
information, charts and winds.

Area

Select to choose from a listing of
weather locations.

Sports Info

Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety
of sports. You can also save up to 10 favorite teams for easier
access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in
progress.

Ski Conditions

Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.

Sound

SETTINGS

Pressing this button allows you to adjust
the following:

Under this menu, you can access and
adjust the settings for many of the system
features. To access additional settings,
swipe the screen left or right.

Sound Settings

Reset All

Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.

Treble

Adjusts the high frequency level.

Midrange

Adjusts the middle frequency level.

Bass

Adjusts the low frequency level.

Balance / Fade

Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.

467

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings

Speed
Compensated
Vol.

Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed,
or turns the feature off.

Occupancy Mode Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.
Sound Settings

Stereo
Surround

Your vehicle might not have all of these features.

Media Player
This button is available when a media
device such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB
device is the active audio source. Pressing
the button allows you to access the
following options for active devices only.
Menu Item

Podcast Speed

Action and Description

For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you can choose:
Slower

Normal

Faster

Audiobook Speed For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of
audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing, you can choose:

Cover Art Priority

Gracenote®
Management

Slower

Normal

Faster

Media Player

Cover art displays from your device’s music
files. If no cover art for the files exists on the
device, then the Gracenote Database provides
cover art.

Gracenote®

The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is
used for your music files. This overrides any
cover art from your device.

Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information
such as genre, artist, album.

468

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Gracenote® Data- This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.
base Info
Device Information

This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your
media device.

Update Media
Index

Erase the stored in media information in order to re-index.

You can adjust the following features:

Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and
arrows on the right adjust the minute. You
can then select AM or PM.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Clock Format

Select how time displays.

Auto Time Zone
Update

When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.

Reset Clock to
GPS Time

When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.

Bluetooth

The system automatically saves any
updates you make to the settings.

Pressing this button allows you to access
the following:

Menu Item

Bluetooth

Action

Turning Bluetooth off disconnects all devices and does not permit
new connections.

Phone

You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth-enabled device.

Pair your Bluetooth-enabled phone with
the system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.

The processes of pairing a Bluetooth
device is the same as pairing a phone. See
Pairing a Device in Phone settings for how
to pair a device and the available options.

Switch on Bluetooth on your device to
begin pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.

469

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give
the system permission to access
information. To check your phone’s
compatibility, see your phone’s manual
or visit the website.

To add a phone, select:
Menu Item

owner.ford.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca

Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item

Add Phone

Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.

Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
Menu Item

Action and Description

View Devices
You can then select:
Add a Bluetooth
Device

You can add a Bluetooth-enabled device by following the steps in
the previous table.

You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then
have the following options:
Connect

Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these
options to interact with the selected device.

470

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Disconnect
Make Primary

Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.

Delete

Removes the selected device from the system.

Pressing the info icon next to the device
name allows you to see phone and device
information
Menu Item

Action and Description

Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Auto-Download
Contacts

Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your
phonebook to keep your contact list up to date.

Sort By:

Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You
can choose:
First Name

Last Name

Re-download
Contacts

Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.

Delete Contacts

Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the
in vehicle list does not erase the contact list on the connected phone.

Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No Ringtone

No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.

Use Phone Ring- The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive
tone
a call. This option may not be available for all phones. If this option
is available, it is the default setting.
You can also select one of the three available ringers.

471

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Action and Description

Text Messaging
You can then select:
No Alert
(Silence)

No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.

You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
Voice Readout

When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new
message.

You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Mute Audio in
Privacy

When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the
duration of the phone call even when the phone call is in privacy.

Roaming
Warning

When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when
you attempt to place a call.

Low Battery
Notification

When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone
is running low.
Select this button to modify the on or off
setting for this feature. If the mobile
phone’s contacts have been downloaded,
you can adjust the following option:

911 Assist
Note: This service is only available in the
United States and Canada.
Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Emergency
Contacts

You can select up to two numbers from your mobile device's phonebook as emergency contacts for quick access at the end of the 911
Assist call process.

Radio
This button is available if a Radio source
such as AM or FM is the active media
source. Pressing the button allows you to
access the following features:

472

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

FM HD Radio

Action and Description

Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.

AM HD Radio
(Dependent on
current radio
source, If Available)
Radio Text

This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source.
Activate this feature to have the system display radio text.

Autoset Presets Refresh
(AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current
location to the last preset bank of the currently tuned source.

Sirius XM (If equipped)
Menu Item

Action and Description

Set Category for After selecting a category, seek function only stops on channels which
Seek
are inside that selected category.
Parental
Lockout

Select to create a personal identification number (PIN). This allows
you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial PIN is 1234.

Edit Alerts

Select to switch on, off or delete alerts.

The Electronic Serial Number can also be found on this screen. This number is necessary
to activate, modify or track your account through Sirius XM.

Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.

473

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Map Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
3D City Model

When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.

Breadcrumbs

When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with
white dots.

POI Icons

Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map.
A rest area POI icon may display on the map regardless of this setting.
Once this feature is activated you can select
the icons you want displayed by selecting:

Incident Map
Icons

Select POIs

This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like
to have displayed on the navigation map.

Route Preferences
Menu Item

Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions

Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Preferred Route Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.
Shortest
Always Use ___
Route

Fastest

Eco

Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only
calculates one route based on your preferred route setting.
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate
only one route to the desired destination.

Use HOV Lanes The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when
providing route guidance.
Automatically
Find Parking

The system searches for and displays available parking locations as
you approach your destination.

Eco Time
Penalty

Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the
setting, the longer the time allotment is for the route.

474

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Second Level Messages, Actions and Descriptions

Dynamic Route Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a
route. The system can find a faster route based on heavy traffic flow
Guidance
information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route
if possible.
Avoid Freeways If selected, SYNC 3 avoids freeways when computing a navigation
route.
Avoid Toll
Roads

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids Toll Roads when computing a navigation
route.

Avoid
Ferries/Car
Trains

If selected, SYNC 3 avoids the use of Ferries or Trains when computing
a navigation route.

Navigation Preferences
Menu Item

Action and Description

Navigation Preferences
Guidance
Prompts

You can adjust how the system provides prompts.

Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones A tone sounds followed by voice instructions.
Voice Only

Only voice instructions are given.

Tones Only

Only a tone sounds to prompt you.
The connected devices sends data to Ford
in the United States. The encrypted
information includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, anonymous usage
statistics and debugging information.
Updates may take place automatically.

Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data
plan associated with the connected device.

Note: All Mobile Apps may not be
compatible with the system.

475

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Note: Standard data rates will apply. Ford
is not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
Menu Item

Mobile Apps

Action and Description

Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu disables automatic
updates and the use of mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings
menu.

Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
Update Mobile
Apps

This provides information on the current state of available app
updates.
There are three possible statuses:
Update Needed

Up-To-Date

Updating Mobile Apps…

The system has
No update is
detected a new app
required.
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is
required.

The system is trying to receive
an update.

Request Update

Select this button if an
update is required and you
want to request this update
manually. For example, when
your mobile device is
connected to a Wi-Fi hotspot,
select:

476

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Menu Item

Action and Description

Request Update
All Apps

Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.

There may also
be SYNC 3
enabled apps
listed under
these options.

Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing the info book icon, you
can see which signals are included in each group.

Note: Ford is not responsible or liable for
any damages or loss of privacy relating to
usage of an app, or dissemination of any
vehicle data that you approve Ford to
provide to an app.

General
Access and adjust the system settings,
voice features, as well as phone, navigation
and wireless settings.

Menu Item

Language

Select to have the touchscreen display in English,
Spanish or French.

Distance

Select to display units in kilometers or miles.

Temperature

Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.

Touch Panel Beep

Select to have the system beep to confirm choices
made through the touchscreen.

Automatic System Updates

When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have an available Internet
connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile
connection.

About SYNC

Information pertaining to the system and its software.

Software Licenses

Documentation of the software license for the system.

Master Reset

Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all
personal settings and personal data.
System Wi-Fi

Wi-Fi & Hotspot

You can access the following:

Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.

477

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Menu Item

Action and Description

Wi-Fi

Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software
updates.

Available
Networks

This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect
from that network. The system may require a security code to
connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more
information about the network displays such as the signal strength,
connection status and security type.

Wi-Fi Available
Notifications

The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi
network is within range if SYNC is not already connected.

Vehicle Hotspot (If Equipped)
You can access the following:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Wi-Fi Hotspot
On/Off

Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.

Settings

Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and
password.

Data Usage

Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.

Manage Devices

Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.

Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.

Note: It is the account owner’s
responsibility to remove the vehicle from
the vehicle network carrier account when
ownership of the vehicle is transferred. If the
owner would like to remove the vehicle from
the account for any reason, please contact
your vehicle network carrier for more
information.

Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.

478

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)

Note: : Data, e.g. the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between Ford and the
vehicle network carrier to provide the
Vehicle Hotspot service in accordance with
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability, and may be used
to enable a seamless transition from an old
to new embedded modem and to confirm
any updates are successfully delivered.

Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color
all the way down to zero intensity.

Note: : For your convenience data usage
may be available for monitoring under
Settings but may not reflect actual or
current usage. The vehicle network carrier
is responsible for providing information
about your account. Please contact the
vehicle network carrier for more information.

Vehicle

Note: : Ford may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.

Door Keypad Code (If equipped)

Note: Your vehicle may not have all of
these features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.

Select this button to add or erase a
personal door keypad code. To add or
erase a personal code, you first need to
enter the five-digit factory set code. You
can find this code on the owner's wallet
card in the glove box or from your
authorized dealer.

Note: If you do not have an active vehicle
hotspot data plan, open your web browser
and go to a website using the HTTP protocol
to be automatically redirected to the vehicle
network carrier landing page where you can
purchase data. Websites using HTTPS will
not automatically redirect.
Camera Settings

To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Message

Action and Description

Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
Enhanced Park
Aids

When the reverse sensing system detects an object, it displays red,
yellow and green highlights at the top of the image.

Rear Camera
Delay

You can enable or disable this option using the slider.

You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter
of your owner manual.

479

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)

shows you the ESN number for your
system. You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.

Selecting this button on the settings menu

Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Menu Item

Action and Description

Brightness

Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.

Mode

You can select:

Auto Dim

Auto

The screen automatically switches between day and
night modes based on the outside light level.

Day

The screen displays with a light background to enhance
daytime viewing.

Night

The screen displays with a darker background to make
nighttime viewing easier.

Off

The screen goes black and does not display anything.
To switch the screen back on, simply tap the screen.

Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based
on ambient lighting conditions.

Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings
by selecting the following options.
Menu Item

Advanced Mode

Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts
and confirmations.

Phone Confirmation

Enable this option to have the system confirm a contacts
name with you before making a call.

Voice Command List

Enable this option to have the system display a list of
available voice commands when the voice button is
pressed.

480

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Valet Mode

To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.

Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the
system is unlocked with the correct PIN.

To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.

When you select valet mode a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit
code must be entered to enable and
disable valet mode. You can use any PIN
you chose but you must use the same PIN
to disable valet mode. The system asks
you to input the code.

SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.

Note: If the system is locked and you
cannot remember the PIN, please contact
the Customer Relationship Center.

To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln
website.

United States: 1-800-392-3673
Canada: 1-800-565-3673

Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

There is background noise
during a phone
call.

The audio control
settings on your cell
phone may be affecting
SYNC 3 performance.

Refer to your device's manual about audio
adjustments.

During a call, I
can hear the
Possible cell phone
other person
malfunction.
but they cannot
hear me.

Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

During a call, I
cannot hear the
The system may need to
other person
be restarted.
and they cannot
hear me.

To restart your system, shut down the
engine, open and close the door, and then
lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes.
Make sure that your SYNC 3 screen is black
and the lighted USB port is off.

This is a cell phoneSYNC 3 is not
dependent feature.
able to download my phone- Possible cell phone
book.
malfunction.

Make sure that the microphone for SYNC
3 is not set to off. Look for the microphone
icon on the phone screen.

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.

481

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
The system
says "Phonebook downloaded" but my Limitations on your cell
SYNC 3 phone- phone's capability.
book is empty or
is missing
contacts.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.

Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve
contacts from your phone. Refer to your
cell manual.
If the missing contacts are stored on your
SIM card, move them to your cell phone's
memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and
the automatic phonebook download
feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.

I am having
trouble
connecting my
cell phone to
SYNC 3.

Possible cell phone
malfunction.

Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and
deleting SYNC from your device, then trying
again.
Always check the security and auto accept
prompt settings relative to the SYNC 3
Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.

This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Text messaging Possible cell phone
is not working
malfunction.
on SYNC 3.
iPhone

Check your cell phone's compatibility.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting
it or removing the battery, then try again.
•
•

482

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Go to your cell phone's Settings.
Go to the Bluetooth Menu.

SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

•

•
•

Press the blue circle to the right of the
device named with your vehicle make
and model to enter the next menu.
Turn Show Notifications on.
Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone
from the SYNC 3 system to activate this
settings update.

Your iPhone is now set up to forward
incoming text messages to SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3
vehicle that you connect. Your iPhone will
only forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3 if the iPhone is not unlocked in the
messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is
not supported by iPhone.
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not supported.
This is a cell phonedependent feature.
Audible text
messages do
not work on my
This is a cell phone limitacell phone.
tion.

Your cell phone must support downloading
text messages through Bluetooth to receive
incoming text messages.
Because each cell phone is different, refer
to your device's manual for the specific cell
phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to
brand, model, service provider and software
version.

483

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.
I am having
trouble
connecting my
device.

Make sure you are using the manufacturer's
Possible device malfunc- cable.
tion.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable
into the device and your vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have
an auto-install program or active security
settings.
The device has a lock
screen enabled.

Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.

SYNC 3 does
not recognize
Make sure you are not leaving the device in
my device when This is a device limitation. your vehicle during very hot or cold
I start my
temperatures.
vehicle.
This is a devicedependent feature.

Make sure you connect the device to SYNC
3 and that you have started the media
player on your device.

Bluetooth audio The device is not
does not
connected.
stream.
The device is in a bad
state.

Try switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then reconnect it to
SYNC 3.

Your music files may not
contain the correct artist, Make sure that all song details are popusong title, album or genre lated.
information.

SYNC 3 does
not recognize
The file may be
music that is on
corrupted.
my device.
The song may have
copyright protection that
does not allow it to play.

Try replacing the corrupt file with a new
version.
Some devices require you to change the
USB settings from mass storage to media
transfer protocol class.

484

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

The file format is not
supported by SYNC 3.

Convert the file to a supported format. See
Entertainment (page 437).

The device needs to be
re-indexed.

Update media index. See Settings (page
467).

The device has a lock
screen enabled.

Make sure your device is unlocked before
connecting it to SYNC 3.
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try
switching your device off, resetting it or
removing the battery, then connect it back
to SYNC 3.

When I connect
my device, I
To listen to Apple devices through USB,
sometimes do
This is a device limitation.
select AirPlay from the devices Control
not hear any
Center, then select Dock Connector.
sound.
To listen to Apple devices through
Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay from the
devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
SYNC 3 does
not display the
The device or media
song informaplayer is incompatible.
tion, repeat, or
shuffle buttons.

Connect a compatible device or media
player.

Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Failed connection.

Possible cause

Possible solution

Password error.

Verify password.

Weak signal.

Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.

Multiple Access points
within range with the
same SSID.

Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use
the default name unless it contains a
unique identifier, such as part of the MAC
address.

485

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

Weak signal probably
Disconnecting
after successful due to distance from the
hotspot, obstruction or
connection.
high interference.

Position the vehicle close to the hotspot
with the front of the vehicle facing the
hotspot direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave
and cordless phones may cause interference.

Poor signal seen There may be an
by SYNC 3
obstruction between
despite being
SYNC 3 and the hotspot.
near a hotspot.

If the vehicle is equipped with heated
windshield, try positioning the vehicle so
that the windshield is not facing the
hotspot. If you have metallic window tinting
but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the hotspot. If all windows
are tinted, you can open the windows in the
direction of the hotspot if that is feasible.
Try to remove other obstructions that may
impact signal quality such as opening the
garage door.

A hotspot is not The hotspot was defined Please set the network to visible and try
listed in the list as a hidden network.
again.
of available
networks.

486

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 is not
SYNC 3 does not
seen when
currently provide a
searching for
hotspot.
Wi-Fi networks
from your phone
or other devices.

SYNC 3 currently does not provide a
hotspot.

Software down- Poor signal strength, too
far from the hotspot,
load takes too
hotspot is supporting
long.
multiple connections,
slow Internet connection
or other problems.

Check the signal quality (under network
details), if SYNC 3 indicates good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped
hotspot where the environment is more
predictable.

SYNC 3 seems
to connect with
a hotspot and
the signal
strength is
excellent but
the software is
not being
updated.

It is possible that there is Test the connection with another device, if
no new software. The
the hotspot requires a subscription, you
connected hotspot may may contact the service provider.
be a managed one and it
requires either a
subscription or agreeing
to the terms and conditions.

487

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

You did not connect an
Applink Compatible
phone to SYNC 3.

Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS 2.3 or higher or
an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or
higher. Additionally, make sure you pair and
connect your phone to SYNC 3 in order to
find AppLink-capable apps on your device.
iPhone users must also connect to a USB
port with an Apple USB cable.

My phone is
connected, but I
still cannot find
any apps.

AppLink-enabled apps
are not installed and
running on your mobile
device.

Make sure you have downloaded and
installed the latest version of the app from
your phone's app store. Make sure the app
is running on your phone. Some apps
require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with
AppLink. Also, some may have a "Ford
SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings
menu on the phone.

My phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, but I
still cannot find
any apps.

Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC
3 find the application if you cannot discover
it inside the vehicle. On an Android device,
if apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then
select it and restart the app. If the app does
not have that option, select the phone's
Sometimes apps do not settings menu and select 'Apps', then find
the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
properly close and reopen their connection to Do not forget to restart the app afterward,
then select "Find Mobile Apps" on SYNC 3.
SYNC 3, over ignition
cycles, for example.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an
app, double tap the home button then
swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the
home button again, then select the app
again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile
App's Menu.

AppLink Mobile
Applications:
When I select
"Find Mobile
Apps," SYNC 3
does not find
any applications.

488

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
AppLink issues
Issue

Possible cause(s)

Possible solution(s)

My Android
phone is
connected, my
app(s) are
running, I
restarted them,
but I still cannot
find any apps.

There is a Bluetooth issue
on some older versions
of the Android operating
system that may cause
apps that were found on
your previous vehicle
drive to not be found
again if you did not
switch Bluetooth off.

Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset
it on your phone. If you are in your vehicle,
SYNC 3 should be able to automatically reconnect to your phone if you press the
"Phone" button.

My iPhone is
connected, my
app is running, I You may need to reset
the USB connection to
restarted the
SYNC 3.
app but I still
cannot find it on
SYNC 3.

Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait
a moment, and plug the USB cable back in
to the phone. After a few seconds, the app
should appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps
Menu. If not, "Force Close" the application
and restart it.

I have an
Android phone.
I found and
started my
media app on
SYNC 3, but
there is no
sound or the
sound is very
low.

Increase the Bluetooth volume of the
device by using the device's volume control
buttons which are most often found on the
side of the device.
The Bluetooth volume on
the phone may be low.

I can only see
some of the
AppLink apps
running on my
phone listed in
the SYNC 3
Mobile Apps
Menu.

Some Android devices
have a limited number of
Bluetooth ports that
apps can use to connect.
If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than
the number of available
Bluetooth ports, you will
not see all of your apps
listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.

Force close or uninstall the apps you do not
want SYNC 3 to find. If the app has a "Ford
SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the
app's settings menu on the phone.

489

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

You may be using the
SYNC 3 does
wrong voice commands.
not understand
what I am
saying.
You may be speaking too
soon or at the wrong
time.

Review the cell phone voice commands
and the media voice commands at the
beginning of their respective sections.
Refer to the audio display during an active
voice session to find a list of voice
commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before
you state your command.

You may be using the
Review the media voice commands at the
wrong voice commands. beginning of the media section.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is
displayed on your device. For example, say
"Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple
Rain".
You may not be saying
SYNC 3 does
the name exactly as it
not understand appears on your device.
the name of a
song or artist.

SYNC 3 does
not understand
or is calling the
wrong contact
when I want to
make a call.

Make sure you are saying the complete title
such as "California remix featuring Jennifer
Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name,
like ESPN or CNN, you have to spell those:
"E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".

The song or artist name
may have some special
characters that are not
being recognized by
SYNC 3.

Make sure that song titles, artists, album,
and playlists names do not have any special
characters like *, - or +.

You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.

Make sure that you are saying the name
exactly as it appears on your phone. For
example, if your contact is "Joe Wilson",
say "Call Joe Wilson". If your contact name
is "Mom", say "Call Mom".

The contact name may
contain special characters.

Make sure that your contact names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.

490

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Issue

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the
contact names stored on your cell phone.

The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
names stored
on my cell
phone.

You may not be saying
the name exactly as it
appears on your phonebook.

The SYNC 3
voice control
system is having
trouble recognizing foreign
tracks, artists,
albums, genres
and playlist
names from my
media player or
USB flash drive.

You may be saying the
foreign names using the
currently selected
language for SYNC 3.

The system
generates voice
prompts and
SYNC 3 uses text-tothe pronuncispeech voice prompt
ation of some
technology.
words may not
be accurate for
my language.

Helpful Hint: You can select your contact
manually. Press PHONE. Select the option
for phonebook and then contact name.
Press the soft-key option to hear it. SYNC
3 will read the contact name to you, giving
you some idea of the pronunciation it is
expecting.

SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation
rules of the selected language to the names
stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions
for very popular artist names (for example,
U2) such that you can always use the
English pronunciation for these artists.

SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated
voice rather than pre-recorded human
voice.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
features for a wide range of languages.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").

491

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

Personal Profiles
Issue

Possible cause and solution

Personal Profiles have not been set up.
An invalid profile name was entered.

I cannot create a profile.

A memory button was not selected when
prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park or was shifted out of Run or Park while
creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a
keyfob when prompted.
The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and an overwrite
was declined.

I cannot link a keyfob.

A profile recall was performed while linking
a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in
Park, or was shifted out of Run or Park while
linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by
Personal Profiles.

My personalized settings do not save.

A different Personal Profile is active than
expected.
Another user has changed settings for the
wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
Personal Profiles is turned off.

My profile will not recall.

The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked
to a profile.

492

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Issue

Possible cause and solution

The keyfob being used is not linked to a
profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start
is being pressed on a linked keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
My preset positions recall but my profile
does not.
My profile recalls but my preset positions
do not.

I lost a keyfob.

I lost all profiles.

Personal Profiles is turned off.
The vehicle is in motion.
The preset positions are the same as the
Guest or previously active profile.
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the
Personal Profiles menu. You may need to
see your authorized dealer.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed.
This could happen if you let dealership add
a new keyfob to replace lost one.
Master Reset had been performed without
your acknowledgement.

493

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

SYNC™ 3

General
Issue

The language
selected for the
instrument
cluster and
information and
entertainment
display does not
match the
SYNC 3
language
(phone, USB,
Bluetooth
audio, voice
control and
voice prompts).

Possible cause

Possible solution

SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a
single module for text display, voice control
and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four
languages based on the most popular
SYNC 3 does not support languages spoken. If the selected language
is not available, SYNC 3 remains in the
the currently selected
language for the instru- current active language.
ment cluster and inform- SYNC 3 offers several new voice control
ation and entertainment features for a wide range of languages.
display.
Dialing a contact name directly from the
phonebook without pre-recording (for
example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly
from your media player (for example, "play
artist Madonna").

SYNC 3 System Reset

The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC
3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore functionality and will not erase any
information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call
history, text messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold
the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio Power button. After
approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system
reset to complete. You may then resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.

494

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Accessories
For a complete listing of the accessories
that are available for your vehicle, please
contact your authorized dealer or visit the
online store web site:

•
•

Lifestyle
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Web Address (United States)

www.Accessories.Ford.com
Web Address (Canada)

www.Accessories.Ford.ca
Ford Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Ford Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period,
as well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Contact an authorized dealer for details
and a copy of the warranty.

Cargo shade.
In-vehicle safe*.
Keyless entry keypad.
Parking sensors*.
Remote start.
Roadside assistance kits*.
Vehicle security systems.
Wheel locks.

*Ford Licensed Accessories. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Ford Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Ford Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Ford dealer for the
manufacturer’s limited warranty details,
and request a copy of the Ford Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.

Exterior Style
Bumper protector.
Hood deflectors.
Running boards.
Side window deflectors*.
Splash guards.

Interior Style
•
•
•

Ash cup or smoker's package.
Camping tent*.
Car covers*.
Cargo organization and management.
Rear seat entertainment*.
Roof crossbars.
Roof racks and carriers*.
Trailer hitch balls.
Trailer hitch drawbars and towing
accessories.

Peace of Mind

Ford Motor Company will warrant your
Ford Original Accessory through the
warranty that provides the greatest
benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.

•
•
•
•
•

Rear console.
Seat covers*.

Ambient lighting.
Cargo area protector.
Floor mats.

495

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep
the following information in mind when
adding accessories or equipment to your
vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR or GAWR as
indicated on the Safety Compliance
Certification label). Ask an authorized
dealer for specific weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian
Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulate the use
of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio
transmitters, for example two-way
radios, telephones and theft alarms.
Any such equipment installed in your
vehicle should comply with Federal
Communications Commission (FCC)
and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission
(CRTC) regulations and should be
installed only by an authorized dealer.
• An authorized dealer needs to install
mobile communications systems.
Improper installation may harm the
operation of your vehicle, particularly
if the manufacturer did not design the
mobile communication system
specifically for automotive use.
• If you or an authorized Ford dealer add
any non-Ford electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect
battery performance and durability. In
addition, you may also adversely affect
the performance of other electrical
systems in the vehicle.

496

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Ford Protect
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH A FORD
PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE PLAN.

That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Ford or
Lincoln dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.

Ford Protect Extended Service
Plans (U.S. Only)

Rental Car Reimbursement

Ford Protect extended service plan means
peace of mind. It’s the extended service
plan backed by Ford Motor Company, and
provides more protection beyond the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage. When
you visit your Ford Dealer, Insist on Ford
Protect extended service plans!

1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for
the day.
Extended Rental Benefits

Ford Protect Can Quickly Pay for Itself

If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including warranty repairs, and
Field Service Actions.

One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Ford Protect
extended service plan. With Ford Protect
extended service plan you minimize your
risk for unexpected repair bills and rising
repair costs.

Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance,
including:

Up to 1,000+ Covered Vehicle
Components

•

There are four mechanical Ford Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.

•
•

•

PremiumCARE - Our most
comprehensive coverage. With over
1,000 covered components, this plan
is so complete it’s probably easier to
list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components,
and includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.

Towing, flat-tire change and battery
jump starts.
Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage or other transportation.

Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Ford
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.

Ford Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Ford dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.

497

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Ford Protect
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your
Vehicle

Ford Protect Extended Service
Plan (CANADA ONLY)

Ford Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.

You can get more protection for your
vehicle by purchasing a Ford Protect
extended service plan. Ford Protect
extended service plan is the only service
contract backed by Ford Motor Company
of Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan
you purchase, Ford Protect extended
service plan provides benefits such as:

Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers.
• Struts.
• Engine Belts.
• Engine coolant hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
• Cabin air filter replacement every
20,000 mi (32,000 km) (electric
vehicles only).

•
•
•

•

Rental reimbursement.
Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
Protection against repair costs after
your New Vehicle Limited Warranty
Coverage expires.
Roadside Assistance benefits.

There are several Ford Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations.
Each plan is tailored to fit your own driving
needs, including reimbursement for towing
and rental. When you purchase Ford
Protect extended service plan, you receive
added peace-of-mind protection
throughout Canada, the United States and
Mexico, provided by a network of
participating authorized Ford Motor
Company dealers.

Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Ford Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved
with no credit check or hassles. To learn
more, call our Ford Protect extended
service plan specialists at 800-367-3377.

Note: Repairs performed outside of
Canada, the United States and Mexico are
not eligible for Ford Protect extended
service plan coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information; visit your local Ford of
Canada dealer or www.ford.ca to find the
Ford Protect extended service plan that is
right for you.

Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232

498

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft®
Replacement Parts

GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION

Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed
at your dealership carry a nationwide
24-month or unlimited mile (kilometer)
parts and labor limited warranty.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when
you sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.

If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.

We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you
have your vehicle serviced at the proper
times. These intervals serve two purposes;
one is to maintain the reliability of your
vehicle and the second is to keep your cost
of owning your vehicle down.

Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one
stop shopping. They can perform any
services that are required on your vehicle,
from general maintenance to collision
repairs.

It is your responsibility to have all
scheduled maintenance performed and to
make sure that the materials used meet
the specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 343).

Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.

Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.

Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved
reliability, durability and resale value. To
maintain the proper performance of your
vehicle and its emission control systems,
make sure you have scheduled
maintenance performed at the designated
intervals.

Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the
operation of your vehicle. Ask your
dealership about the training and
certification their technicians have
received.

Your vehicle is equipped with the
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor system, which
displays a message in the information
display at the proper oil change interval.
This interval may be up to one year or
10,000 mi (16,000 km).

499

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi
(800 km) of the message appearing. Make
sure you reset the Intelligent Oil-Life
Monitor after each oil change. See Oil
Change Indicator Reset (page 290).

Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford
Workshop Manual list the recommended
additives and chemicals for your vehicle.
We do not recommend using chemicals or
additives not approved by us as part of
your vehicle’s normal maintenance. Please
consult your warranty information.

If your information display resets
prematurely or becomes inoperative, you
should perform the oil change interval at
six months or 5,000 mi (8,000 km) from
your last oil change. Never exceed one year
or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between oil
change intervals.

Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a
normal operating characteristic and, by
itself, does not necessarily indicate a
concern or that the fluid needs to be
changed. However, a qualified expert, such
as the factory-trained technicians at your
dealership, should inspect discolored fluids
that also show signs of overheating or
foreign material contamination
immediately.

Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance
systems. Every manufacturer develops
these systems using different
specifications and performance features.
That is why it is important to rely upon your
dealership to properly diagnose and repair
your vehicle.

Make sure to change your vehicle’s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a
viable way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled
maintenance. It is critical that systems are
flushed only with new fluid that is the same
as that required to fill and operate the
system or using a Ford-approved flushing
chemical.

Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts
and component systems based upon
engineering testing. Ford Motor Company
relies upon this testing to determine the
most appropriate mileage for replacement
of oils and fluids to protect your vehicle at
the lowest overall cost to you and
recommends against maintenance
schedules that deviate from the scheduled
maintenance information.

Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.

We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or
Ford-authorized re-manufactured
replacement parts engineered for your
vehicle.

500

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Check Every Month

Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.

Check Every Six Months

Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.

Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval
to help make sure your vehicle keeps
running great.

501

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Multi-Point Inspection

Accessory drive belt(s)

Hazard warning system operation

Battery performance

Horn operation

Engine air filter

Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning
hoses

Exhaust system

Suspension components for leaks or
damage

Exterior lamps operation
1

Fluid levels ; fill if necessary

Steering and linkage
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper
2

pressure

For oil and fluid leaks

Windshield for cracks, chips or pits

Half-shaft dust boots

Washer spray and wiper operation

Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer

If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration
Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
This means you do not have to remember
to change the oil on a mileage-based
schedule. Your vehicle lets you know when
an oil change is due by displaying a
message in the information display.

Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive
way to perform a thorough inspection of
your vehicle. Your checklist gives you
immediate feedback on the overall
condition of your vehicle.

The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of
use.

NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning
your vehicle and reduces environmental
waste at the same time.

502

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

When to Expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Interval

Vehicle Use and Example

Normal
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling

7,500–10,000 mi
(12,000–16,000 km)

Severe
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation

5,000–7,500 mi
(8,000–12,000 km)

Extreme

3,000–5,000 mi
(5,000–8,000 km)

Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation

Normal Maintenance Intervals
1

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
2

Change engine oil and filter.
Rotate the tires.

Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (four wheel drive only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tire-rod ends, driveshaft and Ujoints.

503

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
1

At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display

Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or
drag.
1

Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.

Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil
Check (page 289).

Other Maintenance Items

Every 3 Years

Replace brake fluid.

Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)

Replace cabin air filter.

Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)

Replace engine air filter.

At 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)

Change engine coolant.

Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.
Inspect accessory drive belt or belts.

Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace accessory drive belt or belts.

Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and
filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance for the interval.
2

Should be performed by an authorized dealer.

Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or
50,000 mi (80,000 km).
4

After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.

If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).

504

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Perform the services shown in the
following tables when specified or within
3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the message
appearing in the information display
prompting you to change your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not
come on, but the odometer reads
30,000 mi (48,000 km) (for example,
the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor was
reset at 25,000 mi (40,000 km).
Perform the engine air filter
replacement.

SPECIAL OPERATING
CONDITIONS SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated.
If you operate your vehicle occasionally
under any of these conditions, it is not
necessary to perform the extra
maintenance. For specific
recommendations, see your dealership
service advisor or technician.

Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Inspect rear axle and U-joints (four wheel drive only).
Inspect half-shaft boots.
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.

Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.

505

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use

As required

Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the information
display and perform services listed in the Normal Scheduled Maintenance chart.

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace cabin air filter.

Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)

Replace spark plugs.

Replace engine air filter.

Operating in Dusty or Sandy Conditions (Such as Unpaved or Dusty Roads)

Inspect frequently, service
as required

Replace cabin air filter.
Replace engine air filter.

Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal
noise, wear, looseness or drag.
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread
depth.
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km) Change engine oil and filter.1
or six months
Perform multi-point inspection.
Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)

Change automatic transmission fluid.

Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change
Indicator Reset (page 290).

Exclusive use of E85 (Flex Fuel Vehicles Only)

Every oil change

If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular
unleaded fuel.

Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
506

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance
Axle and PTU maintenance: The Power
Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle (four
wheel drive only) in your vehicle does not
require any normal scheduled
maintenance. Vehicles are electronically
monitored and notify the driver required
service by displaying a message in the
information display. The PTU lubricant will
be more likely to require a change if the
vehicle has experienced extended periods
of extreme/severe duty cycle driving.
Changing or checking the PTU lubricant is
not necessary unless the unit has been
submerged in water, shows signs of
leakage or a message indicating required
service is displayed. Contact your
authorized dealer for service.

Hot climate oil change intervals:
Vehicles operating in the Middle East,
North Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or
locations with similar climates using an
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Certified for Gasoline Engines (Certification
mark) oil of SM or SN quality, the normal
oil change interval is 5,000 mi (8,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
3,000 mi (4,800 km).
Engine air filter and cabin air filter
replacement: The life of the engine air
filter and cabin air filter is dependent on
exposure to dusty and dirty conditions.
Vehicles operated in these conditions
require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and
cabin air filter.

California fuel filter replacement: If you
register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

507

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

508

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Repair Order #:

Dealer stamp

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

509

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

510

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

511

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

512

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

513

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

514

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

515

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

516

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Scheduled Maintenance

Dealer stamp

Repair Order #:

Distance:

Engine hours (optional):

Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:

E146852

517

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY

WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.

WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.

Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.

WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes
and brake pipes.

Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the
following table. We do not provide special
provisions or conditions for installations or
use.

Car

E239120

518

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Van

E239122

Truck

E239121

519

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices

Frequency Band Maximum output power Watt (Peak
MHz
RMS)

Antenna Positions

1-30

50-54

2, 3

68-88

2, 3

142-176

2, 3

380-512

2, 3

806-870

2, 3

Note: After the installation of radio
frequency transmitters, check for
disturbances from and to all electrical
equipment in your vehicle, both in the
standby and transmit modes.

END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT

Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.

•

VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)

Check that electromagnetic fields
generated inside your vehicle cabin by the
transmitter installed do not exceed
applicable human exposure requirements.

•

520

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

You (“You” or “Your” as applicable)
have acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that
include software licensed or owned by
Ford Motor Company and its affiliates
("FORD MOTOR COMPANY"). Those
software products of FORD MOTOR
COMPANY origin, as well as associated
media, printed materials, and "online"
or electronic documentation
("SOFTWARE") are protected by
international intellectual property laws
and treaties. The SOFTWARE is
licensed, not sold. All rights reserved.
The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be
later upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.

Appendices
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA")
DO NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY
THE SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE
SOFTWARE, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO USE ON THE DEVICES,
WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR AGREEMENT
TO THIS EULA (OR RATIFICATION OF
ANY PREVIOUS CONSENT).

•

GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This
EULA grants you the following license:
•

You may use the SOFTWARE as
installed on the DEVICES and as
otherwise interfacing with systems
and/or services provide by or through
FORD MOTOR COMPANY or its third
party software and service providers.

Description of Other Rights and
Limitations
•

Speech Recognition: If the
SOFTWARE includes speech
recognition component(s), you should
understand that speech recognition is
an inherently statistical process and
that recognition errors are inherent in
the process. Neither FORD MOTOR

•

521

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

COMPANY nor its suppliers shall be
liable for any damages arising out of
errors in the speech recognition
process. It is your responsibility to
monitor any speech recognition
functions included in the system.
Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly:
You may not reverse engineer,
decompile, translate, disassemble or
attempt to discover any source code
or underlying ideas or algorithms of the
SOFTWARE nor permit others to
reverse engineer, decompile or
disassemble the SOFTWARE, except
and only to the extent that such activity
is expressly permitted by applicable
law notwithstanding this limitation or
to the extent as may be permitted by
the licensing terms governing use of
any open source components included
with the SOFTWARE.
Limitations on Distributing,
Copying, Modifying and Creating
Derivative Works: You may not
distribute, copy, make modifications
to or create derivative works based on
the SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to
the extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may
contain multiple EULAs, such as
multiple translations and/or multiple
media versions (e.g., in the user
documentation and in the software).
Even if you receive multiple EULAs, you
are licensed to use only one (1) copy of
the SOFTWARE.

Appendices
•

•

SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or
transfer of the DEVICES, provided you
retain no copies, you transfer all of the
SOFTWARE (including all component
parts, the media and printed materials,
any upgrades, and, if applicable, the
Certificate(s) of Authenticity), and the
recipient agrees to the terms of this
EULA. If the SOFTWARE is an upgrade,
any transfer must include all prior
versions of the SOFTWARE.
Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions
of this EULA.
Internet-Based Services
Components: The SOFTWARE may
contain components that enable and
facilitate the use of certain
Internet-based services. You
acknowledge and agree that FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, third party
software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent
may automatically check the version
of the SOFTWARE and/or its
components that you are utilizing and
may provide upgrades or supplements
to the SOFTWARE that may be
automatically downloaded to your
DEVICES.
Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components
of the SOFTWARE after the date you
obtain your initial copy of the
SOFTWARE ("Supplemental
Components".) SOFTWARE updates
may cause you to incur additional

•

522

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

charges from your wireless service
provider. If FORD MOTOR COMPANY
or third party software and services
suppliers provide or make available to
you Supplemental Components and
no other EULA terms are provided
along with the Supplemental
Components, then the terms of this
EULA shall apply. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to
you or made available to you through
the use of the SOFTWARE.
Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The
third party sites are not under the
control of FORD MOTOR COMPANY,
its affiliates and/or its designated
agent. Neither FORD MOTOR
COMPANY nor its affiliates nor its
designated agent are responsible for
(I) the contents of any third party sites,
any links contained in third party sites,
or any changes or updates to third
party sites, or (ii) webcasting or any
other form of transmission received
from any third party sites. If the
SOFTWARE provides links to third
party sites, those links are provided to
you only as a convenience, and the
inclusion of any link does not imply an
endorsement of the third party site by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent.
Obligation to Drive Responsibly:
You recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety
and you agree to assume any risk
associated with the use of the
DEVICES.

Appendices
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA:
If the SOFTWARE is provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY separate from the
DEVICES on media such as a ROM chip,
CD ROM disk(s) or via web download or
other means, and is labeled "For Upgrade
Purposes Only" or "For Recovery Purposes
Only" you may install one (1) copy of such
SOFTWARE onto the DEVICES as a
replacement copy for the existing
SOFTWARE, and use it in accordance with
this EULA, including any additional EULA
terms accompanying the upgrade
SOFTWARE.

EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You
acknowledge that the SOFTWARE is
subject to U.S. and European Union export
jurisdiction. You agree to comply with all
applicable international and national laws
that apply to the SOFTWARE, including
the U.S. Export Administration Regulations,
as well as end-user, end-use and
destination restrictions issued by U.S. and
other governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.

INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS:
All title and intellectual property rights in
and to the SOFTWARE (including but not
limited to any images, photographs,
animations, video, audio, music, text and
"applets" incorporated into the
SOFTWARE), the accompanying printed
materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials
accompanying the SOFTWARE. All title
and intellectual property rights in and to
the content which may be accessed
through use of the SOFTWARE is the
property of the respective content owner
and may be protected by applicable
copyright or other intellectual property
laws and treaties. This EULA grants you no
rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates,
and third party software and service
providers and suppliers. Use of any on-line
services which may be accessed through
the SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.

PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to
FORD MOTOR COMPANY instructions
provided in the documentation for the
DEVICES product support, such as the
vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages:
EXCEPT AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS,
AND THEIR AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO
LIABILITY FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES ARISING FROM OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.

523

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
•

SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow
instructions:
•

Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not
following precautions found in the
Owner Guide can lead to an accident
or other serious injuries.

•

General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system
may be accomplished using voice
commands. Using voice commands
while driving helps you to operate the
system without removing your hands
from the wheel or eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the
volume excessively. Keep the volume
at a level where you can still hear
outside traffic and emergency signals
while driving. Driving while unable to
hear these sounds could cause an
accident.
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully
read and follow instructions and safety
information fully.

•

524

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual
(non-verbal) setup. Attempting to
perform such set-up or insert data
while driving can distract your attention
and could cause an accident or other
serious injury. Stop the vehicle in a safe
and legal manner before attempting
these operations.
Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only
as an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic
regulations. Any such feature is not a
substitute for your personal judgment.
Any route suggestions made by this
system should never replace any local
traffic regulations or your personal
judgment or knowledge of safe driving
practices.
Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to
follow the suggested directions.
Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps
used by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always
use good judgment and common sense
when following the suggested routes.
Emergency Services: Do not rely on
any navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals
and clinics are likely to be contained in
the map database for such navigation
features.

Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while
driving an automobile or other vehicle
in violation of applicable law or
otherwise driving in an unsafe manner
presents a significant risk of distracted
driving and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(b) Use of
the SOFTWARE at excessive volume
poses a significant risk of hearing
damage and should not be attempted
under any circumstances;(c) The
SOFTWARE may not be compatible
with new or different versions of an
operating system, third party software,
or third party services, and the
SOFTWARE may potentially cause a
critical failure of an operating system,
third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software
used with the SOFTWARE (I) may
charge an additional fee for access, (ii)
may not work correctly, on an
uninterrupted basis, or error free, (iii)
may change streaming formats or
discontinue operation, (iv) may contain
adult, profane or offensive content; and
(v) may contain inaccurate, false or
misleading traffic, weather, financial
or safety information or other content;
and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE may
cause you to incur additional charges
from your wireless service provider
(WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference
only, are not warranted in any way and
should not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in
Section (a) – (e) above.

Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
PERFORMANCE, COMPATIBILITY,
ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU.
TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED
BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE SOFTWARE
AND ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS" AND “AS AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL
FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, AND FORD MOTOR COMPANY
HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, AND THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR
STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN
ARTICULAR PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY,
OF QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY
RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR COMPANY DOES
NOT WARRANT (a) AGAINST
INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES,
(b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS, (c)
THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE, (d)
OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES WILL BE
CORRECTED. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN
INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL

525

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE,
OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OR LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE
STATUTORY RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER,
SO THE ABOVE DISCLAIMER MAY NOT
FULLY APPLY TO YOU. THE SOLE
WARRANTY PROVIDED BY FORD MOTOR
COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND IN THE
WARRANTY INFORMATION INCLUDING
WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO THE
EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY CONFLICT
BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS SECTION
AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET, THE
WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL CONTROL.

Binding Arbitration and Class Action
Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to
any dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT
INCLUDE A DISPUTE RELATING TO
COPYRIGHT INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS.
Dispute means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, other than the
exceptions listed above, concerning the
SOFTWARE (including its price) or this
EULA, whether in contract, warranty, tort,
statute, regulation, ordinance, or any other
legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the
party giving it, the facts giving rise to the
dispute, and the relief requested. You and
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to
resolve any dispute through informal
negotiation within 60 days from the date
the Notice of Dispute is sent. After 60 days,
You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY may
commence arbitration.

Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
•

The laws of the State of Michigan
govern this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the
SOFTWARE may also be subject to
other local, state, national, or
international laws. Any litigation arising
out of or related to this EULA shall be
brought and maintained exclusively in
a court of the State of Michigan
located in Wayne County or in the
United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.

(c) Small claims court. You may also
litigate any dispute in small claims court
in your county of residence or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY’S principal place of
business, if the dispute meets all
requirements to be heard in the small
claims court. You may litigate in small
claims court whether or not You
negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve
the dispute will be conducted exclusively
by binding arbitration. You are giving up

526

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
the right to litigate (or participate in as a
party or class member) all disputes in court
before a judge or jury. Instead, all disputes
will be resolved before a neutral arbitrator,
whose decision will be final except for a
limited right of appeal under the Federal
Arbitration Act. Any court with jurisdiction
over the parties may enforce the
arbitrator’s award.

may award the same damages to You
individually as a court could. The arbitrator
may award declaratory or injunctive relief
only to You individually, and only to the
extent required to satisfy Your individual
claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
•

(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings
to resolve or litigate any dispute in any
forum will be conducted solely on an
individual basis. Neither you nor FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, will seek to have any
dispute heard as a class action, as a private
attorney general action, or in any other
proceeding in which any party acts or
proposes to act in a representative
capacity. No arbitration or proceeding will
be combined with another without the
prior written consent of all parties to all
affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any
arbitration will be conducted by the
American Arbitration Association (the
“AAA”), under its Commercial Arbitration
Rules. If You are an individual and use the
SOFTWARE for personal or vehicle use, or
if the value of the dispute is $75,000 or
less whether or not You are an individual
or how You use the SOFTWARE, the AAA
Supplementary Procedures for
Consumer-Related Disputes will also
apply. To commence arbitration, submit a
Commercial Arbitration Rules Demand for
Arbitration form to the AAA. You may
request a telephonic or in-person hearing
by following the AAA rules. In a dispute
involving $10,000 or less, any hearing will
be telephonic unless the arbitrator finds
good cause to hold an in-person hearing
instead. For more information, see adr.org
or call 1-800-778-7879. You agree to
commence arbitration only in your county
of residence or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S
principal place of business. The arbitrator

•

527

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will
promptly reimburse your filing fees and
pay the AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement
offer made before the arbitrator was
appointed (“last written offer”), your
dispute goes all the way to an
arbitrator’s decision (called an
“award”), and the arbitrator awards
you more than the last written offer,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give you
three incentives: (1) pay the greater of
the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’s fees, if any; and
(3) reimburse any expenses (including
expert witness fees and costs) that
your attorney reasonably accrues for
investigating, preparing, and pursuing
your claim in arbitration. The arbitrator
will determine the amounts.
ii. Disputes involving more than
$75,000. The AAA rules will govern
payment of filing fees and the AAA’s
and arbitrator’s fees and expenses.
iii. Disputes involving any amount. In
any arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA
or arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or
Your filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR
COMPANY commences, it will pay all

Appendices
1. Safe and Lawful Use

filing, AAA, and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. It will not seek its attorney’s
fees or expenses from you in any
arbitration. Fees and expenses are not
counted in determining how much a
dispute involves.

You acknowledge that devoting attention
to the TeleNav Software may pose a risk
of injury or death to you and others in
situations that otherwise require your
undivided attention, and you therefore
agree to comply with the following when
using the TeleNav Software:

(h) Claims or disputes must be filed
within one year. To the extent permitted
by law, any claim or dispute under this
EULA to which this Section applies must
be filed within one year in small claims
court (Section c) or in arbitration (Section
d). The one-year period begins when the
claim or dispute first could be filed. If such
a claim or dispute is not filed within one
year, it is permanently barred.

(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise
drive safely;
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested
by the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;

(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those
parts will be severed and proceed in a court
of law, with the remaining parts proceeding
in arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be
severed with the remainder of Section e
remaining in full force and effect.

(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for
any illegal, unauthorized, unintended,
unsafe, hazardous, or unlawful purposes,
or in any manner inconsistent with this
Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices
and cables necessary for use of the
TeleNav Software in a secure manner in
your vehicle so that they will not interfere
with your driving and will not prevent the
operation of any safety device (such as an
airbag).

Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav
Software indicates that you accept these
terms and conditions. If you do not accept
these terms and conditions, do not break
the seal of the package, launch, or
otherwise use the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav may revise this Agreement and
the privacy policy at any time, with or
without notice to you. You agree to visit
http://www.telenav.com from time to time
to review the then current version of this
Agreement and of the privacy policy.

You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from
any dangerous or otherwise inappropriate
use of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.

528

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
2. Account Information

distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the TeleNav Software to
others, except as part of your
permanent transfer of the TeleNav
Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that

You agree: (a) when registering the
TeleNav Software, to provide TeleNav with
true, accurate, current, and complete
information about yourself, and (b) to
inform TeleNav promptly of any changes
to such information, and to keep it true,
accurate, current and complete.

I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,

3. Software License
•

ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming,
privacy, consumer and child protection,
obscenity or defamation, or

Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav
hereby grants to you a personal,
non-exclusive, non-transferable license
(except as expressly permitted below
in connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software
license), without the right to
sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of
this Agreement. You agree that you will
use the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial
navigation services to other parties.

iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive,
harassing, tortuous, defamatory, vulgar,
obscene, libelous, or otherwise
objectionable; and (f) lease, rent out, or
otherwise permit unauthorized access by
third parties to the TeleNav Software
without advanced written permission of
TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
•

3.1 License Limitations
•

(a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter
or otherwise change the TeleNav
Software or any part thereof; (b)
attempt to derive the source code,
audio library or structure of the
TeleNav Software without the prior
express written consent of TeleNav;
(c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or
its suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d)

529

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

To the fullest extent permissible
pursuant to applicable law, in no event
will TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers,
or agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data
may not always reflect reality due to,
among other things, road closures,
construction, weather, new roads and
other changing conditions. You are
responsible for the entire risk arising
out of your use of the TeleNav
Software. For example but without
limitation, you agree not to rely on the
TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the
well-being or survival of you or others

Appendices

•

is dependent on the accuracy of
navigation, as the maps or functionality
of the TeleNav Software are not
intended to support such high risk
applications, especially in more remote
geographical areas.
TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS
AND EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE
FROM COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM
OR TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS WITH
RESPECT TO THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE.
Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.

REASON WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL
DIRECT OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN
CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE) OR OTHERWISE), THE
ENTIRE LIABILITY OF TELENAV AND
OF ALL OF TELENAV'S SUPPLIERS
SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE AMOUNT
ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME STATES
AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO NOT
ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
•

5. Limitation of Liability
•

TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV
OR ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS
BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT
OR ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA,
LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF
PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION
OR THE LIKE) ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
TELENAV HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY DAMAGES
THAT YOU MIGHT INCUR FOR ANY

530

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav
Software shall be settled by
independent arbitration involving a
neutral arbitrator and administered by
the American Arbitration Association
in the County of Santa Clara, California.
The arbitrator shall apply the
Commercial Arbitration Rules of the
American Arbitration Association, and
the judgment upon the award rendered
by the arbitrator may be entered by any
court having jurisdiction. Note that
there is no judge or jury in an arbitration
proceeding and the decision of the
arbitrator shall be binding upon both
parties. You expressly agree to waive
your right to a jury trial. This Agreement
and performance hereunder will be
governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State
of California, without giving effect to
its conflict of law provisions. To the
extent judicial action is necessary in
connection with the binding arbitration,
both TeleNav and you agree to submit

Appendices
to the exclusive jurisdiction of the
courts of the County of Santa Clara,
California. The United Nations
Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.

conferred by implication, statute,
inducement, estoppel or otherwise, and
TeleNav and its suppliers and licensors
hereby reserve all of their respective rights
other than the licenses explicitly granted
in this Agreement.

7. Assignment

8.3

•

By using the TeleNav Software, you
consent to receive from TeleNav all
communications, including notices,
agreements, legally required disclosures
or other information in connection with the
TeleNav Software (collectively, "Notices")
electronically. TeleNav may provide such
Notices by posting them on TeleNav's
Website or by downloading such Notices
to your wireless device. If you desire to
withdraw your consent to receive Notices
electronically, you must discontinue your
use of the TeleNav Software.

You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent
transfer of the TeleNav Software, and
expressly conditioned upon the new
user of the TeleNav Software agreeing
to be bound by the terms and
conditions of this Agreement. Any such
sale, assignment or transfer that is not
expressly permitted under this
paragraph will result in immediate
termination of this Agreement, without
liability to TeleNav, in which case you
and all other parties shall immediately
cease all use of the TeleNav Software.
Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.

8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not
affect that party's right to require
performance at any time thereafter, nor
shall a waiver of any breach or default of
this Agreement constitute a waiver of any
subsequent breach or default or a waiver
of the provision itself.

8. Miscellaneous
8.1

8.5

This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.

If any provision herein is held
unenforceable, then such provision will be
modified to reflect the intention of the
parties, and the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will remain in full force and
effect.

8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
not expressly granted in this Agreement
are intended to, or shall be, granted or

531

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
8.6

HERE holds a non-exclusive license from
the United States Postal Service® to
publish and sell ZIP+4® information.

The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement,
and will not be referred to in connection
with the construction or interpretation of
this Agreement. As used in this Agreement,
the words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to
be terms of limitation, but rather will be
deemed to be followed by the words
"without limitation".

©United States Postal Service® 2014.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.

9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
•

9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd

The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement
includes end-user terms applicable to
these companies (included at the end
of this Agreement), and thus your use
of the Telenav Software is also subject
to such terms. You agree to comply
with the following additional terms and
conditions, which are applicable to
Telenav’s third party vendor licensors::

9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC

Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or
other similar purposes. Accordingly, but
subject to the restrictions set forth in the
following paragraphs, you agree not to
otherwise reproduce, copy, modify,
decompile, disassemble, create any
derivative works of, or reverse engineer any
portion of this Data, and may not transfer
or distribute it in any form, for any purpose,
except to the extent permitted by
mandatory laws.

The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for
resale. It is protected by copyright, and is
subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by you, on
the one hand, and Telenav (“Telenav”) and
its licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.

532

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow
certain warranty exclusions, so to that
extent the above exclusion may not apply
to you.

Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav,
and without limiting the preceding
paragraph, you may not use this Data (a)
with any products, systems, or applications
installed or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs.

Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFORMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Some
States, Territories and Countries do not
allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.

Warning. The Data may contain
inaccurate or incomplete information due
to the passage of time, changing
circumstances, sources used and the
nature of collecting comprehensive
geographic data, any of which may lead to
incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no
guarantees, representations or warranties
of any kind, express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not limited
to, content, quality, accuracy,
completeness, effectiveness, reliability,
fitness for a particular purpose, usefulness,
use or results to be obtained from this
Data, or that the Data or server will be
uninterrupted or error-free.

Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals
required under, applicable export laws,
rules and regulations, including but not
limited to the laws, rules and regulations
administered by the Office of Foreign
Assets Control of the U.S. Department of
Commerce and the Bureau of Industry and
Security of the U.S. Department of
Commerce. To the extent that any such

Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND
ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

533

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
export laws, rules or regulations prohibit
HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or
distribute Data, such failure shall be
excused and shall not constitute a breach
of this Agreement.

NOTICE OF USE

CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425
West Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois
60606

Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors,
including their licensors and suppliers) and
you pertaining to the subject matter hereof,
and supersedes in their entirety any and
all written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.

Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws
of the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used],
without giving effect to (i) its conflict of
laws provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. You agree to submit to
the jurisdiction of the State of Illinois
[insert “The Netherlands” where European
HERE Data is used] for any and all
disputes, claims and actions arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder.

If the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
refuses to use the legend provided herein,
the Contracting Officer, federal
government agency, or any federal official
must notify HERE prior to seeking
additional or alternative rights in the Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing
Data for the United States shall contain
the following notices:

Government End Users. If the Data is
being acquired by or on behalf of the
United States government or any other
entity seeking or applying rights similar to
those customarily claimed by the United
States government, this Data is a
“commercial item” as that term is defined
at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is licensed in
accordance with these End-User Terms,
and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the
following “Notice of Use,” and shall be
treated in accordance with such Notice:

“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal
Service® to publish and sell ZIP+4®
information.”
“©United States Postal Service®
20XX. Prices are not established,
controlled or approved by the United
States Postal Service®. The following
trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States
Postal Service, USPS, and ZIP+4.”

534

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage
media of the copy; (ii) the packaging
for the copy; or (iii) other materials
packaged with the copy, such as user
manuals or end user license agreements: “This data includes information
taken with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Her Majesty
the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada
Post Corporation, GeoBase®, © The
Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”

B. Canada Data. The following provisions apply to the Data for Canada,
which may include or reflect data from
third party licensors (“Third Party
Data”), including Her Majesty the Queen
in Right of Canada (“Her Majesty”),
Canada Post Corporation (“Canada
Post”) and the Department of Natural
Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provisions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data
is licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations or warranties respecting such
data, either express or implied,
arising by law or otherwise, including
but not limited to, effectiveness,
completeness, accuracy or fitness
for a particular purpose.

3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise agreed by the parties, in connection with the provision of any portion
of the Data for the Territory of Canada
to End-Users as may be authorized
under the Agreement, Client shall
provide such End-Users, in a reasonably conspicuous manner, with terms
(set forth with other end user terms
required to be provided under the
Agreement, or as otherwise may be
provided, by Client) which shall include
the following provisions on behalf of
the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan:

b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of
any claim, demand or action, irrespective of the nature of the cause
of the claim, demand or action
alleging any loss, injury or damages,
direct or indirect, which may result
from the use or possession of such
Data; or (ii) in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the
Data.

The Data may include or reflect
data of licensors, including Her
Majesty the Queen in the Right of
Canada (“Her Majesty”), Canada
Post Corporation (“Canada Post”)
and the Department of Natural
Resources Canada (“NRCan”). Such
data is licensed on an “as is” basis.
The licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, make no
guarantees, representations or
warranties respecting such data,

535

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, completeness, accuracy or fitness for a
particular purpose. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in
respect of any claim, demand or
action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which
may result from the use or possession of the data or the Data. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not
be liable in any way for loss of
revenues or contracts, or any other
consequential loss of any kind
resulting from any defect in the data
or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
and their officers, employees and
agents from and against any claim,
demand or action, irrespective of
the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action, alleging loss,
costs, expenses, damages or injuries
(including injuries resulting in death)
arising out of the use or possession
of the data or the Data.

II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional
de Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice:
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:

4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition to all of the rights and obligations
of the parties under the Agreement.
To the extent that any of the provisions of this Section are inconsistent
with, or conflict with, any other provisions of the Agreement, the provisions
of this Section shall prevail.

Territory

Notice

Argentina

IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”

Ecuador

“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM2011-01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE
ENERO DE 2011”
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”

Guadeloupe,
French
Guiana
and
Martinique
Mexico

“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”

IV. Middle East Territory

536

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country

Notice

Jordan

“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre”. The
foregoing notice requirement
for Jordan Data is a material
term of the Agreement. If
Client or any of its permitted
sublicensees (if any) fail to
meet such requirement,
HERE shall have the right to
terminate Client’s license
with respect to the Jordan
Data.

V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges
and agrees that in certain countries of
the Europe Territory, Client will need
to obtain rights directly from third
party RDS-TMC code providers to
receive and use the Traffic Codes in
the Data and to deliver to End-Users
Transactions in any way derived from
or based on such Traffic Codes. For
such countries, HERE shall deliver the
Data incorporating Traffic Codes to
Client only after receiving certification
from Client of its having obtained such
rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights
Legends for Belgium. Client shall, for
each Transaction that uses Traffic
Codes for Belgium, provide the
following notice to the End-User:
“Traffic Codes for Belgium are
provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”

B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of
Jordan (“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise Applications to (i) non-Jordanian
entities for use of the Jordan Data solely
in Jordan or (ii) Jordan-based customers.
In addition, Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any) and End-Users are
restricted from using the Jordan Data in
Enterprise Applications if such party is
(i) a non-Jordanian entity using the
Jordan Data solely in Jordan or (ii) a
Jordan-based customer. For purposes
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications” shall mean Geomarketing applications, GIS applications, mobile business
asset management applications, call
center applications, telematics applications, public organization Internet
applications or for providing geocoding
services.

B. Paper Maps. With respect to any
license granted to Client relating to
making, selling or distributing paper
maps (i.e., a map fixed on a paper or
paper-like medium): (a) such license
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Great Britain is conditioned on Client’s
entering into and complying with a
separate written agreement with the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to create and
sell paper maps, Client’s paying to the
OS any and all applicable paper map
royalties, and Client’s complying with
the OS copyright notice requirements;
(b) such license for selling or otherwise
distributing for charge with respect to
Data for the Territory of Czech Republic

537

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
is conditioned on Client’s obtaining prior
written consent from Kartografie a.s.;
(c) such license for selling or distributing
with respect to Data for the Territory of
Switzerland is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining a permit from Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland; (d)
Client is restricted from using Data for
the Territory of France to create paper
maps with a scale between 1:5,000 and
1:250,000; and (e) Client is restricted
from using any Data to create, sell or
distribute paper maps that are the same
or substantially similar, in terms of data
content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessungswesen of Austria, and the National
Land Survey of Sweden.

Austria
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine

France

Germany

“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”

Great Britain “Contains Ordnance
Survey data © Crown
copyright and database
right 2010 Contains Royal
Mail data © Royal Mail
copyright and database
right 2010”

C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain,
Client acknowledges and agrees that
the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring
a direct action against Client to enforce
compliance with the OS copyright notice
(see Section IV(D) below) and paper
map requirements (see Section IV(B)
above) contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Country(ies) Notice

538

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Greece

“Copyright Geomatics
Ltd.”

Hungary

Italy

“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed
al tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”

Norway

Portugal

“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”

Appendices
Spain

“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”

Sweden

Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing
RDS-TMC Traffic Codes for Australia
shall contain the following notice:
“Product incorporates traffic location
codes which is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and its licensors.”

Switzerland “Topografische
Grundlage: © Bundesamt
für Landestopographie.
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not
received approvals to distribute map
data for the following countries in such
respective countries: Albania, Belarus,
Kyrgyzstan, Moldova and Uzbekistan.
HERE may update such list from time to
time. The license rights granted to Client
under this TL with respect to the Data
for such countries are contingent upon
Client’s compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations, including, without
limitation, any required licenses or
approvals to distribute the Application
incorporating such Data in such
respective countries.

AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier
Telematics Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS
SERVICE CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS
AFFILIATES AND CONTRACTORS AND
THEIR RESPECTIVE OFFICERS,
DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES, SUCCESSORS
AND ASSIGNS. END USER HAS NO
CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP WITH
THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY
AGREEMENT BETWEEN FORD AND
UNDERLYING CARRIER. END USER
UNDERSTANDS AND AGREES THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HAS NO LEGAL,
EQUITABLE, OR OTHER LIABILITY OF ANY
KIND TO END USER. IN ANY EVENT,
REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF THE
ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH OF
CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR
OTHERWISE, END USER'S EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY
WAY IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT, FOR ANY CAUSE
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR

VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used
as described below corresponding to
the Territory (or portion thereof)
included in such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).

539

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT
OF DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO
EXCEED THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER
FOR THE SERVICES DURING THE
TWO-MONTH PERIOD PRECEDING THE
DATE THE CLAIM AROSE.

MAKES NO WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
SUITABILITY, OR PERFORMANCE
REGARDING ANY SERVICES OR GOODS,
AND IN NO EVENT SHALL AT&T BE
LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE TO ITS
OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A) ACT OR
OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT,
DELAYS, OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE
PROVIDED BY OR THROUGH THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY SUSPENSION OR
TERMINATION BY THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR INJURY
CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY IN
CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END
USER RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND
HOLDS THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HARMLESS FROM AND AGAINST ANY
AND ALL CLAIMS OF ANY PERSON OR
ENTITY FOR DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE
ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM OR RELATING
TO, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, SERVICES
PROVIDED BY THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
OR ANY PERSON’S USE THEREOF,
INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING IN WHOLE
OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.

(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY
AND HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
CLAIMS FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY
PROPERTY DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY
OR DEATH, ARISING IN ANY WAY,
DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT
OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE, OR
INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT
FORD AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
CANNOT GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF
WIRELESS TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL
NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY LACK OF
SECURITY RELATING TO THE USE OF THE
SERVICES

VII. China Territory

THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR
COVERAGE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
DOES NOT WARRANT THAT END USERS
CAN OR WILL BE LOCATED USING THE
SERVICE. THE UNDERLYING CARRIER

Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject
to the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only
as necessary for your personal use to (i)
540

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
rigCustomer Remedies

view it, and (ii) save it, provided that you
do not remove any copyright notices that
appear and do not modify the Data in any
way. You agree not to otherwise reproduce,
copy, modify, decompile, disassemble or
reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.

NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2
with a copy of your receipt. This Limited
Warranty is void if failure of the Data has
resulted from accident, abuse, or
misapplication. Any replacement Data will
be warranted for the remainder of the
original warranty period or thirty (30) days,
whichever is longer. Neither these remedies
nor any product support services offered
by NAV2 are available without proof of
purchase from an authorized international
source.

Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch,
real time route guidance, fleet
management or similar applications; or (b)
with or in communication with any
positioning devices or any mobile or
wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation
cellular phones, palmtop and handheld
computers, pagers, and personal digital
assistants or PDAs. You agree to cease
using this Data if you fail to comply with
these terms and conditions.

No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY
SET FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will
perform substantially in accordance with
the accompanying written materials for a
period of ninety (90) days from the date
of receipt, and (b) any support services
provided by NAV2 shall be substantially as
described in applicable written materials
provided to you by NAV2, and NAV2’s
support engineers will make commercially
reasonable efforts to solve any problem
issues.

Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT
BE LIABLE TO YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY
CLAIM, DEMAND OR ACTION,
IRRESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE
CAUSE OF THE CLAIM, DEMAND OR
ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS, INJURY OR
DAMAGES, DIRECT OR INDIRECT, WHICH
MAY RESULT FROM THE USE OR
POSSESSION OF THE INFORMATION; OR
541

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Governing Law.

FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE,
CONTRACTS OR SAVINGS, OR ANY
OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF YOUR USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THIS INFORMATION,
ANY DEFECT IN THE INFROMATION, OR
THE BREACH OF THESE TERMS OR
CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED ON A
WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.

The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to
(i) its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the
United Nations Convention for Contracts
for the International Sale of Goods, which
is explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising
from or in connection with the Data
provided to you hereunder shall be
submitted to the Shanghai International
Economic and Trade Arbitration
Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from
Gracenote, Inc., copyright©
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007
Gracenote. This product and service may
practice one or more of the following U.S.
Patents 5,987,525; 6,061,680; 6,154,773;
6,161,132; 6,230,192; 6,230,207; 6.240,459;
6,330,593 and other patents issued or
pending. Some services supplied under
license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent 6,304,523.

Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any
direct product thereof except in
compliance with, and with all licenses and
approvals required under, applicable
export laws, rules and regulations.
IP Protection

Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.

The Data are owned by NAV2 or its
suppliers and are protected by applicable
copyright and other intellectual property
law and treaties. The Data are provided
solely on the basis of a license to use, not
sale.

Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)

Entire Agreement

This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608
("Gracenote").

These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between
us with respect to such subject matter.

The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers

542

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform
other functions. You may use Gracenote
Data only by means of the intended End
User functions of this device. This device
may contain content belonging to
Gracenote's providers. If so, all of the
restrictions set forth herein with respect to
Gracenote Data shall also apply to such
content and such content providers shall
be entitled to all of the benefits and
protections set forth herein that are
available to Gracenote. You agree that you
will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data,
the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote
Servers for your own personal,
non-commercial use only. You agree not
to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Content, Gracenote Software
or any Gracenote Data (except in a Tag
associated with a music file) to any third
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.

including any copyrighted material or
music file information. You agree that
Gracenote may enforce its respective
rights, collectively or separately, under this
agreement against you, directly in each
company's own name.
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The
purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow Gracenote to count
queries without knowing anything about
who you are. For more information, see the
web page at www.gracenote.com for the
Gracenote Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED
TO YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE
MAKES ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF ANY
GRACENOTE DATA FROM THE
GRACENOTE SERVERS OR GRACENOTE
CONTENT. GRACENOTE COLLECTIVELY
AND SEPARATELY RESERVE THE RIGHT
TO DELETE DATA AND/OR CONTENT
FROM THE COMPANIES' RESPECTIVE
SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA
CATEGORIES FOR ANY CAUSE THAT
GRACENOTE DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO
WARRANTY IS MADE THAT EITHER
GRACENOTE CONTENT OR THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE ERROR-FREE
OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING OF THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE
TO DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES
AT ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote
Software, and the Gracenote Servers and
Gracenote Content, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,

543

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Taiwan Territory

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS
OR LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.

Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave
radiation motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter
the frequency, increase the power or
change the characteristics and functions
of the original design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference
be detected, immediately stop using the
device and only resume usage after
ensuring that there is no longer any
interference. For the legal
telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial,
scientific and radio wave equipment.

Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.

SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS
AND CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept
certain terms and conditions. The following
is a brief summary of the terms and
conditions that apply to you. To view the
full terms and conditions relevant to your
use of the SUNA Products and/or Services,
please consult:

WARNING: Changes or
modifications not expressively approved
by the party responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment. The term "IC:" before the
radio certification number only signifies
that Industry Canada technical
specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in
conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
1. Acceptance

544

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:

5. Service Continuity and Reception of
the SUNA Traffic Channel
We will use reasonable endeavours to
provide the SUNA Traffic Channel 24 hours
a day, 365 days a year. The SUNA Traffic
Channel may occasionally be unavailable
for technical reasons or for planned
maintenance. We will try to perform
maintenance at times when congestion is
light. We reserve the right to withdraw
SUNA Products and/or Services at any
time.

Website

www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandconditions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for
your personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to
provide SUNA Products and/or Services.

Also, we cannot assure the uninterrupted
reception of the SUNA Traffic Channel
RDS-TMC signal at any particular location.
6. Limitation of Liability
Neither Intelematics (nor its suppliers or
the manufacturer of your device (the
“Suppliers”)) shall be liable to you or to
any third party for any damages either
direct, indirect, incidental, consequential
or otherwise arising out of the use of or
inability to use SUNA Products and/or
Services even if Intelematics or a Supplier
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages. You also acknowledge that the
neither Intelematics nor any Supplier
guarantees nor make any warranties that
relate to the availability, accuracy or
completeness of SUNA Products and/or
Services, and to the extent which it is
lawful to do so, both Intelematics and each
Supplier excludes any warranties which
might otherwise be implied by any State
or Federal legislation in relation to SUNA
Products and/or Services.

3. Appropriate Use
SUNA Products and/or Services are
intended as an aid to personal motoring
and travel planning, and do not provide
comprehensive or accurate information on
all occasions. On occasions, you may
experience additional delay as a result of
using SUNA Products and/or Services. You
acknowledge that it is not intended, or
suitable, for use in applications where time
of arrival or driving directions may impact
the safety of the public or yourself.
4. Use of SUNA Products and Services
while driving
You, and other authorised drivers of the
vehicle in which SUNA Products and/or
Services are available or installed and
active, remain at all times responsible for
observing all relevant laws and codes of
safe driving. In particular, you agree to only
actively operate SUNA Products and/or
Services when the Vehicle is at a complete
stop and it is safe to do so.

7. Please Note
Great care has been taken in preparing this
manual. Constant product development
may mean that some information is not
entirely up-to-date. The information in this
document is subject to change without
notice.

545

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
TYPE APPROVALS
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Tire Pressure Monitoring
Sensor(s)

E253824

Ghana

E253823

Jordan

E207816

Argentina

E253822

Malaysia

E253812
E197509

Brazil

E253813

Mexico

E207818

European Union EU

E197811

546

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Moldova

E197844

Serbia

E207821

Morocco

E253820
E253817

Singapore

Oman

E198002

South Africa

E198001

Philippines

E253819
E253816

South Korea

Russia

547

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Mid Range Radar

E203679

Taiwan
E269659

Argentina

E253818

Ukraine

E269662

Ghana

E207817

United Arab Emirates

E269660

Jordan

548

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Passive Anti-Theft
System

E269661

Morocco
E274065

Argentina

E269664

South Africa
E269675

Brazil

E269663

United Arab Emirates
E274068

Djibouti

549

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices

E269674

E269673

Ghana

Malaysia

E274067

E269670

Jamaica

Morocco

E269666

E274066

Jordan

Paraguay

550

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices

E275754

E269667

Pakistan

South Africa

E269672

E269671

Serbia

Ukraine

E269676

E269668

Singapore

United Arab Emirates

551

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices

E269677

E272194

Vietnam

Jordan

Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Radio Transceiver
Module

E269683

Morocco
E272192

Djibouti

E269684

Pakistan
E272193

Jamaica

552

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices

E272195

E269682

Paraguay

Ukraine

E269681

E272196

Serbia

United Arab Emirates

Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Blind Spot Information
System

E269685

South Africa
E269695

Ghana

553

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices

E269697

E269693

Malaysia

Vietnam

Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for Wireless Charging

E269696

South Africa
E272903

United Arab Emirates

E269694

United Arab Emirates
E273475

South Korea

554

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Appendices
Radio Frequency Certification
Logos for SYNC 3

E252722

Brazil

555

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

556

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index

Air Filter

180 Degree Camera.....................................218

Alarm

See: Changing the Engine Air Filter............308
See: Anti-Theft Alarm.........................................75

Camera Views......................................................219
Using the System................................................219

Ambient Lighting...........................................89
Adjusting the Intensity.......................................90
Changing the Color.............................................89
Switching Ambient Lighting Off....................90
Switching Ambient Lighting On.....................89

4
4WD

Anti-Theft Alarm............................................75

See: Four-Wheel Drive.......................................191

Arming the Alarm.................................................75
Disarming the Alarm...........................................75

Appendices.....................................................518
Apps.................................................................464

A/C

..................................................................................464
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................466

See: Climate Control.........................................133

About This Manual...........................................7
ABS

At a Glance........................................................16
Audible Warnings and Indicators...........103

See: Brakes...........................................................196

Automatic Transmission Warning
Chime.................................................................104
Engine On Warning Chime..............................103
Headlamps On Warning Chime....................103
Key in Ignition Warning Chime.......................103
Keyless Warning Alert ......................................103
Parking Brake On Warning Chime................103

ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.................................................................197

Accessories....................................................495
Exterior Style.......................................................495
Interior Style........................................................495
Lifestyle.................................................................495
Peace of Mind.....................................................495

Audio Control...................................................78
Seek and Media....................................................78

Accessories

Audio System................................................364

See: Replacement Parts
Recommendation............................................12

General Information.........................................364

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: AM/FM/CD/
SYNC.............................................................368

ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control.............221

Menu Structure...................................................370

Active Park Assist........................................209

Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Premium
AM/FM/CD..................................................365
Audio Unit - Vehicles With: Sony AM/
FM/CD...........................................................367
Autolamps........................................................84

Using Active Park Assist...................................210

Adjusting the Headlamps.........................301
Vertical Aim Adjustment.................................301

Adjusting the Pedals....................................80
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................76
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column............................................................76

Windshield Wiper Activated
Headlamps........................................................84

End of Travel Position..........................................77
Memory Feature....................................................77

Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Premium AM/FM/CD...................134
Automatic Climate Control - Vehicles
With: Sony AM/FM/CD............................136
Automatic High Beam Control.................86

Airbag Disposal................................................51
Air Conditioning

Automatic High Beam Indicator.....................87
Switching the System On and Off................86

See: Climate Control.........................................133

Automatic Transmission............................187
Brake-Shift Interlock Override......................189

557

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Capacities and Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................350

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................190
SelectShift Automatic™
Transmission...................................................188
Understanding the Positions of Your
Automatic Transmission.............................187

Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................353
Specifications......................................................351

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................354

Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................295
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™............295

Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................358
Specifications.....................................................355

Capacities and Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................358

Adding Transmission Fluid ............................296
Checking the Transmission Fluid
Level..................................................................295

Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates...........................................................362
Specifications.....................................................360

Autowipers........................................................81
Autowipers Settings............................................82

Capacities and Specifications................343
Cargo Nets.......................................................241
Car Wash

Auxiliary Power Points................................165
110 Volt AC Power Point...................................165
12 Volt DC Power Point.....................................165
Locations...............................................................165

See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................309

Catalytic Converter......................................184

On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)...................185
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing...................................................185

Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery.....................298

Center Console..............................................167

Blind Spot Information System..............232

Rear Seat Armrest..............................................167
Second Row Center Console..........................167

...................................................................................232
Switching the System On and Off..............234
System Errors......................................................234
Using the Blind Spot Information
System..............................................................233

Changing a Bulb..........................................303

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........284

Front Direction Indicator.................................303
Headlamp............................................................303
Headlamp High Beam.....................................304
LED Lamps...........................................................305
License Plate Lamp..........................................305
Rear Direction Indicator and Reversing
Lamp.................................................................304

Booster Seats..................................................29

Changing a Fuse..........................................282

BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..........232

Bonnet Lock
Types of Booster Seats......................................30

Fuses......................................................................282

Brake Fluid Check........................................297
Brakes...............................................................196

Changing a Road Wheel............................337
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information......................................................337
Tire Change Procedure....................................338

General Information..........................................196

Breaking-In.....................................................257
Bulb Specification Chart..........................306

Changing the 12V Battery.........................298
Changing the Engine Air Filter................308
Changing the Wiper Blades....................300

Front Wiper Blades..........................................300
Rear Window Wiper Blade..............................301

Cabin Air Filter................................................142

Checking MyKey System Status................61
MyKey Distance.....................................................61
Number of Admin Keys......................................62

558

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Cruise Control..................................................79

Number of MyKeys..............................................62

Checking the Wiper Blades.....................300
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance.................................................42
Child Restraint Positioning..........................31
Child Safety.......................................................18

Principle of Operation......................................220

Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control...............................220

Customer Assistance.................................266

General Information.............................................18

Child Safety Locks..........................................33

Data Recording..................................................9

Left-Hand Side......................................................34
Right-Hand Side...................................................34

Event Data Recording..........................................10
Service Data Recording........................................9

Child Seats.........................................................19
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................313
Cleaning Products......................................309

Daytime Running Lamps............................85
Type One - Conventional
(Non-Configurable).......................................85
Type Two - Configurable...................................85

Materials...............................................................309

Cleaning the Engine......................................311
Cleaning the Exterior.................................309

Digital Radio...................................................372

Cleaning the Headlamps.................................310
Exterior Chrome Parts......................................310
Exterior Plastic Parts.........................................310
Stripes or Graphics............................................310
Underbody............................................................310
Under Hood..........................................................310

HD Radio Reception and Station
Troubleshooting.............................................373

Direction Indicators........................................87
Doors and Locks.............................................64
Driver Alert......................................................227
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION...........................227
USING DRIVER ALERT.....................................228

Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens..........................312
Cleaning the Interior....................................312
Cleaning the Wheels...................................314
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades.............................................................311
Clearing All MyKeys........................................61
Climate............................................................448
Climate Control.............................................133
Climate Controlled Seats..........................159

Driver and Passenger Airbags...................45
Children and Airbags..........................................46
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment........................................................45

Driving Aids.....................................................227
Driving Hints...................................................257
Driving Through Water...............................258
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps.........................85

Cooled Seats........................................................160
Heated Seats........................................................159

Coolant Check

Economical Driving......................................257
Electromagnetic Compatibility...............518
Emission Law.................................................183

See: Engine Coolant Check.............................291

Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator.......50
Creating a MyKey...........................................60
Programming or Changing Configurable
Settings................................................................61

Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance.........184
Tampering With a Noise Control
System...............................................................183

Cross Traffic Alert........................................234
Blocked Sensors................................................236
Switching the System Off and On..............236
System Errors......................................................236
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................236
System Limitations...........................................236
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System..........234

End User License Agreement.................520
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .................................520

Engine Block Heater.....................................173
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................174

559

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Engine Coolant Check................................291

When Towing a Trailer.....................................253

Event Data Recording

Adding Coolant....................................................291
Coolant Change.................................................293
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management..................................................294
Fail-Safe Cooling...............................................293
Recycled Coolant...............................................293
Severe Climates.................................................293

See: Data Recording..............................................9

Export Unique Options.................................14
Exterior Mirrors................................................92
Auto-dimming Feature......................................94
Auto-Folding Mirrors...........................................93
Blind Spot Information System......................94
Direction Indicator Mirrors ...............................94
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors...............................93
Heated Exterior Mirrors .....................................94
Integrated Blind Spot Mirror............................94
Memory Mirrors ....................................................94
Power Exterior Mirrors........................................92

Engine Emission Control............................183
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................74

Engine Oil Check..........................................289
Adding Engine Oil..............................................289

Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................288
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.5L Duratec/3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................289
Engine Specifications - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................343

F
Fastening the Seatbelts..............................36
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt....................................38
Seatbelt Locking Modes....................................37
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy................36

Drivebelt Routing...............................................343

Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................343

Flat Tire

Drivebelt Routing...............................................344

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................337

Engine Specifications - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................344

Floor Mats......................................................258
Fog Lamps - Front

Drivebelt Routing...............................................345

See: Front Fog Lamps.........................................87

Entertainment...............................................437

Foot Pedals

AM/FM Radio......................................................439
Apps........................................................................447
Bluetooth Stereo or USB................................446
CD (If equipped)................................................445
HD Radio™ Information (If
Available)........................................................442
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If
Activated).......................................................440
Sources.................................................................438
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information.................................447
USB Ports..............................................................447

See: Adjusting the Pedals................................80

Ford Credit..........................................................11
US Only......................................................................11

Ford Protect...................................................497
Ford Protect Extended Service Plan
(CANADA ONLY)..........................................498
Ford Protect Extended Service Plans (U.S.
Only)..................................................................497

Four-Wheel Drive..........................................191
Principle of Operation........................................191

Front Fog Lamps............................................87
Front Parking Aid.........................................206

Environment......................................................15
Essential Towing Checks..........................252

Obstacle Distance Indicator..........................207

Front Passenger Sensing System............46
Fuel and Refueling........................................175
Fuel Consumption........................................181

Before Towing a Trailer....................................253
Hitches...................................................................252
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)........................................254
Safety Chains......................................................252
Trailer Brakes.......................................................253
Trailer Lamps.......................................................253

Advertised Capacity...........................................181
Fuel Economy.......................................................181

Fuel Filler Funnel Location.........................177

560

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
HDC

Fuel Quality - E85.........................................176

See: Using Hill Descent Control...................203

Choosing the Right Fuel - Flex Fuel
Vehicles..............................................................176
Switching Between E85 and Gasoline........177

Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps.....................301

Headlamp Exit Delay....................................85
Headlamp Removal

Fuel Quality - Gasoline...............................175
Choosing the Right Fuel...................................175

Fuel Shutoff....................................................261
Fuses.................................................................273
Fuse Specification Chart...........................273

See: Removing a Headlamp..........................303

Headrest
See: Head Restraints.........................................144

Head Restraints............................................144

Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel........278
Power Distribution Box....................................273

Adjusting the Head Restraint.........................145
Tilting Head Restraints ....................................146

Heated Seats.................................................158
Front Seats...........................................................158
Second Row Heated Seats.............................159

Garage Door Opener

Heated Steering Wheel................................79
Heated Windows and Mirrors...................141

See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............161

Gauges................................................................97
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge..........100
Fuel Gauge...........................................................100
Information Display.............................................99
Type 1.........................................................................97
Type 2.......................................................................98
Type 3.......................................................................99

Heated Exterior Mirrors.....................................142
Heated Rear Window........................................142

Heating
See: Climate Control.........................................133

Hill Start Assist..............................................197
Switching the System On and Off...............198
Using Hill Start Assist.......................................198

Gearbox

Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................138

See: Transmission...............................................187

General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................52

Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather............................................................140
General Hints.......................................................138
Quickly Cooling the Interior............................139
Quickly Heating the Interior............................139
Recommended Settings for Cooling..........140
Recommended Settings for Heating..........139

Intelligent Access.................................................52

General Maintenance Information.......499
Multi-Point Inspection......................................501
Owner Checks and Services.........................500
Protecting Your Investment..........................499
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?.........................499
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?....................................................499

Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes.............................................................197
Home Screen................................................429
Hood Lock

Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................269
Getting the Services You Need..............266

See: Opening and Closing the Hood..........284

Away From Home.............................................266

Global Opening...............................................92
Moonroof.................................................................92
Remote Control Front Windows.....................92

Ignition Switch...............................................169
In California (U.S. Only).............................267
Information Display Control.......................79
Information Displays...................................105

H
Handbrake

General Information..........................................105

See: Parking Brake..............................................197

Information Messages.................................119

Hazard Flashers............................................261

4WD..........................................................................119

561

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index

Adaptive Cruise Control...................................120
AdvanceTrac™....................................................120
Alarm.......................................................................120
Automatic Engine Shutdown..........................121
Automatic High Beam Control.......................121
Battery and Charging System........................122
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic
Alert System.....................................................122
Brake System........................................................123
Doors and Locks..................................................123
Driver Alert.............................................................123
Electronic Stability Control.............................124
Engine......................................................................124
Fuel...........................................................................124
Hill Descent Control...........................................124
Hill Start Assist....................................................125
Keys and Intelligent Access............................125
Lane Keeping System.......................................126
Maintenance.........................................................126
MyKey......................................................................127
Park Aid..................................................................128
Park Brake.............................................................128
Power Steering....................................................128
Pre-Collision Assist............................................129
Remote Start........................................................129
Seats........................................................................129
Starting System..................................................130
Terrain Management System........................130
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.................130
Traction Control....................................................131
Trailer........................................................................131
Transmission.........................................................131

Jump Starting the Vehicle........................262
Connecting the Jumper Cables....................262
Jump Starting......................................................263
Preparing Your Vehicle.....................................262
Removing the Jumper Cables.......................263

K
Keyless Entry....................................................67
SECURICODE™ Keyless Entry
Keypad.................................................................67

Keyless Starting............................................169
Ignition Modes.....................................................170

Keys and Remote Controls.........................52
Principle of Operation.........................................52

L
Lane Keeping System................................228
Switching the System On and Off..............229

Liftgate...............................................................69
Lighting Control..............................................83
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam..............84
Headlamp High Beam........................................83

Lighting..............................................................83
General Information............................................83

Load Carriers
See: Roof Racks and Load Carriers.............242

Load Carrying.................................................241
Load Limit.......................................................243

Installing Child Restraints...........................20

Special Loading Instructions for Owners of
Pick-up Trucks and Utility-type
Vehicles............................................................248
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer.................................................................243

Using Lap and Shoulder Belts.........................20
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)............................................25
Using Tether Straps.............................................27

Instrument Cluster.........................................97
Instrument Lighting Dimmer.....................84
Instrument Panel Overview........................16
Interior Lamps.................................................87

Locking and Unlocking................................64
Activating Intelligent Access............................65
Autolock..................................................................66
Battery Saver..........................................................67
Illuminated Entry..................................................66
Illuminated Exit.....................................................67
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with the
Key Blade...........................................................64
Power Door Locks................................................64
Remote Control....................................................64

Battery Saver.........................................................89
Dome Lamp...........................................................88
Map Lamps............................................................88

Interior Mirror...................................................95
Automatic Dimming Mirror...............................95
Manual Dimming Mirror.....................................95

Introduction.........................................................7

562

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index

Smart Unlocks for Integrated Keyhead
Transmitter........................................................65
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys......................................................................66

Navigation......................................................456

Maintenance.................................................284

cityseeker.............................................................463
Destination Mode..............................................458
Map Mode.............................................................457
Navigation Map Updates...............................464
Navigation Menu.................................................461
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link..................464
SYNC AppLink....................................................463
Waypoints............................................................462

General Information.........................................284

Normal Scheduled Maintenance..........502

Luggage Covers............................................242
Lug Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................337

M
Manual Climate Control.............................133
Manual Liftgate..............................................69

Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™........................502
Normal Maintenance Intervals....................503

Closing the Liftgate.............................................69
Opening the Liftgate...........................................69

Manual Seats..................................................147
Lumbar Adjustment..........................................148
Moving the Seat Backward and
Forward..............................................................147
Recline Adjustment............................................147

Oil Change Indicator Reset......................290
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................289

Opening and Closing the Hood..............284

Memory Function.........................................150

Closing the Hood...............................................285
Opening the Hood.............................................284

Easy Entry and Exit Feature.............................151
Linking a PreSet Position to your Remote
Control or Intelligent Access Key
Fob......................................................................150
Saving a PreSet Position.................................150

Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature.......................................................271
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual...........271

Overhead Console.......................................168

Message Center

See: Information Displays...............................105

Mirrors
See: Heated Windows and Mirrors...............141
See: Windows and Mirrors.................................91

Parking Aids...................................................205

Mobile Communications Equipment.......13
Moonroof..........................................................95

Parking Brake..................................................197
Passenger Knee Airbag................................49
Passive Anti-Theft System.........................74

Principle of Operation......................................205

Bounce-Back.........................................................96
Opening and Closing the Moonroof.............96
Opening and Closing the Sunscreen............96
Venting the Moonroof........................................96

SecuriLock®...........................................................74

PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.....................74

Motorcraft Parts - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................345
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L Duratec.............346
Motorcraft Parts - 3.5L
Ecoboost™..................................................347
MyKey Troubleshooting...............................62
MyKey™.............................................................59

Pedals................................................................80
Perchlorate.........................................................11
Personal Safety System™..........................43
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?..................................................................43

Phone................................................................451
During a Phone Call..........................................454
Making Calls........................................................453
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time....................................................................451

Principle of Operation........................................59

563

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Rear View Camera

Phone Menu.........................................................452
Receiving Calls...................................................454
Smartphone Connectivity..............................455
Text Messaging...................................................455

See: Rear View Camera....................................215

Rear Window Wiper and Washers...........82
Rear Camera Washer..........................................82
Rear Window Washer.........................................82
Rear Window Wiper Blade...............................82

Post-Crash Alert System..........................264
Power Door Locks

Recommended Towing Weights...........250
Refueling..........................................................179

See: Locking and Unlocking.............................64

Power Liftgate.................................................70
Hands-Free Feature.............................................72
Obstacle Detection..............................................72
Opening and Closing the Liftgate..................70
Setting the Liftgate Open Height....................71
Stopping the Liftgate Movement....................71

Refueling System Overview............................179
Refueling System Warning..............................181
Refueling Your Vehicle......................................179

Remote Control..............................................53
Car Finder................................................................57
Integrated Keyhead Transmitter.....................53
Intelligent Access Key.........................................53
Memory Feature...................................................56
Remote Start..........................................................57
Replacing the Battery.........................................54
Sounding the Panic Alarm................................57

Power Seats...................................................148
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.....................149
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats
With Active Motion ......................................149

Power Steering Fluid Check....................298
Power Windows...............................................91

Remote Start..................................................142

Accessory Delay....................................................92
Bounce-Back..........................................................91
One-Touch Down..................................................91
One-Touch Up........................................................91
Window Lock.........................................................92

Automatic Settings............................................142

Removing a Headlamp.............................303
Repairing Minor Paint Damage...............314
Replacement Parts
Recommendation........................................12

Pre-Collision Assist.....................................238
Using the Pre-Collision Assist
System..............................................................238

Collision Repairs....................................................12
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs..................................................................12
Warranty on Replacement Parts.....................12

Protecting the Environment........................15
Puncture

Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control............................................................58
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)...............................................................271
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.
Only)...............................................................271
Roadside Assistance.................................260

See: Changing a Road Wheel........................337

R
Rear Parking Aid...........................................205
Obstacle Distance Indicator.........................206

Rear Passenger Climate Controls..........140
Rear Seats........................................................151

Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance........................................................261
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage..................261
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance........................................................261
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance...................................260
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance...................................260

Adjusting the Rear Seats..................................151

Rear Under Floor Storage..........................241
Adjustable Load Floor.......................................241
Cargo Management System...........................241

Rear View Camera........................................215
Camera Guidelines.............................................216
Manual Zoom.......................................................218
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................217
Rear Camera Delay............................................218
Using the Rear View Camera System.........216

Roadside Emergencies.............................260

564

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Roof Racks and Load Carriers.................242

Voice Control......................................................480
Wi-Fi & Hotspot..................................................477

Adjusting the Crossbar....................................243
Thumbwheel Kit.................................................242

Side Airbags.....................................................48
Side Sensing System..................................207

Running-In
See: Breaking-In..................................................257

Obstacle Distance Indicator.........................208

Running Out of Fuel......................................177

Sitting in the Correct Position..................144
Snow Chains

Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container...........................................................178
Filling a Portable Fuel Container...................178

See: Using Snow Chains.................................332

Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................337

Special Notices................................................12
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.........................12
Notice to Owners of Pickup Trucks and
Utility Type Vehicles........................................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................13
Special Instructions..............................................12
Using Your Vehicle as an Ambulance............13
Using Your Vehicle With a Snowplow............13

Safety Canopy™............................................49
Safety Precautions.......................................175
Satellite Radio...............................................375
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN).................................................................376
Satellite Radio Reception Factors...............375
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service..................375
Troubleshooting.................................................376

Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance..............................................505

Scheduled Maintenance Record...........507
Scheduled Maintenance..........................499
Seatbelt Extension........................................42
Seatbelt Height Adjustment......................39
Seatbelt Reminder........................................40

Exceptions...........................................................506

Speed Control
See: Cruise Control...........................................220

Stability Control..........................................200

Belt-Minder™.......................................................40

Principle of Operation.....................................200

Seatbelts...........................................................35

Starter Switch

Principle of Operation.........................................35

See: Ignition Switch...........................................169

Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................40

Starting a Gasoline Engine........................170
Automatic Engine Shutdown.........................172
Failure to Start.......................................................171
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes................173
Important Ventilating Information...............173
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving................................................................172
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................172
Vehicles with an Ignition Key..........................170
Vehicles with Keyless Start.............................170

Conditions of operation....................................40

Seats.................................................................144
Security...............................................................74
Settings...........................................................467
911 Assist................................................................472
Ambient Lighting...............................................479
Bluetooth.............................................................469
Clock......................................................................469
Display..................................................................480
General...................................................................477
Media Player.......................................................468
Mobile Apps.........................................................475
Navigation.............................................................473
Phone....................................................................469
Radio.......................................................................472
Sound.....................................................................467
Valet Mode............................................................481
Vehicle....................................................................479

Starting and Stopping the Engine.........169
General Information..........................................169

Steering............................................................237
Electric Power Steering....................................237

Steering Wheel................................................76
Storage Compartments.............................167
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.......................................................95

565

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Sun Visors.........................................................95

Recreational Towing.........................................255

Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................95

Towing.............................................................249
Traction Control............................................199

Supplementary Restraints System.........44
Principle of Operation........................................44

Principle of Operation......................................199

Symbols Glossary.............................................7
SYNC™ 3.........................................................416

Trailer Sway Control...................................250
Transmission Code Designation............349
Transmission..................................................187
Transporting the Vehicle..........................264
Type Approvals............................................546

General Information..........................................416

SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting......................481
SYNC™ Applications and
Services........................................................394

Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Blind Spot Information System...............553
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Mid
Range Radar..................................................548
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Passive Anti-Theft System.......................549
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Radio Transceiver Module.........................552
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
SYNC 3..............................................................555
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s)...............546
Radio Frequency Certification Logos for
Wireless Charging.........................................554

911 Assist...............................................................394
SYNC Mobile Apps...........................................396

SYNC™............................................................378
General Information.........................................378

SYNC™ Troubleshooting.........................408

T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications............343

Terrain Control..............................................202
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)......................268
Tire Care...........................................................319

Glossary of Tire Terminology........................320
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading..............................................................319
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall.............................................................321
Temperature A B C............................................320
Traction AA A B C...............................................319
Treadwear.............................................................319

Under Hood Overview - 2.3L
EcoBoost™.................................................285
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Duratec.........................................................286
Under Hood Overview - 3.5L
Ecoboost™.................................................287
Universal Garage Door Opener................161

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...........333

HomeLink Wireless Control System.............161

Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.......................................334
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System ......................................335

USB Port..........................................................377
Using Adaptive Cruise Control.................221
Automatic Cancellation..................................224
Blocked Sensor...................................................225
Canceling the Set Speed................................224
Changing the Set Speed.................................224
Detection Issues.................................................224
Following a Vehicle............................................222
Hilly Condition Usage.......................................224
Overriding the Set Speed................................223
Resuming the Set Speed................................224
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed.............222
Setting the Gap Distance................................223

Tires
See: Wheels and Tires.......................................317

Towing a Trailer............................................249
Load Placement.................................................249

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 2.3L EcoBoost™.......................................254
Emergency Towing............................................254
Recreational Towing.........................................254

Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels 3.5L Duratec/3.5L Ecoboost™............255
Emergency Towing............................................255

566

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Using Traction Control...............................199

Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
Off.......................................................................224
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control
On.........................................................................221
Switching to Normal Cruise Control...........226
System Not Available.......................................225

Switching the System Off...............................199
System Indicator Lights and
Messages..........................................................199
Using a Switch.....................................................199
Using the Information Display
Controls.............................................................199

Using Cruise Control...................................220

Using Voice Recognition...........................380

Switching Cruise Control Off.........................220
Switching Cruise Control On.........................220

Audio Voice Commands..................................431
Climate Voice Commands.............................432
Initiating a Voice Session...............................380
Mobile App Voice Commands......................435
Navigation Voice Commands.......................434
Phone Voice Commands................................433
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.....................................................436
System Interaction and Feedback...............381
Voice Settings Commands............................436

Using Four-Wheel Drive..............................191
Driving In Special Conditions With
Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)...........................192
How Your Vehicle Differs From Other
Vehicles.............................................................192

Using Hill Descent Control.......................203
Principle of operation.......................................203
Using hill descent control...............................203

Using MyKey With Remote Start
Systems..........................................................62
Using Snow Chains.....................................332
Using Stability Control...............................201
Using Summer Tires...................................332
Using SYNC™ With Your Media
Player............................................................399

Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration
Program (Canada Only)........................269

V
Vehicle Care..................................................309

Accessing Your USB Song Library...............403
Bluetooth Devices and System
Settings............................................................405
Connecting Your Digital Media Player to the
USB Port..........................................................399
Media Menu Features......................................402
Media Voice Commands................................400
USB 2.....................................................................405
Voice Commands for Audio Sources........406

General Information.........................................309

Vehicle Certification Label.......................349
Vehicle Identification Number...............348
Vehicle Storage.............................................314
Battery....................................................................315
Body.........................................................................314
Brakes......................................................................315
Cooling system....................................................315
Engine.....................................................................315
Fuel system...........................................................315
General...................................................................314
Miscellaneous......................................................315
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................315
Tires.........................................................................315

Using SYNC™ With Your Phone............382
Accessing Features through the Phone
Menu..................................................................387
Accessing Your Phone Settings...................390
Bluetooth Devices..............................................391
Making Calls........................................................386
Pairing a Phone for the First Time...............383
Pairing Subsequent Phones..........................384
Phone Options during an Active Call.........386
Phone Voice Commands................................384
Receiving Calls...................................................386
System Settings.................................................392
Text Messaging..................................................388

Ventilation
See: Climate Control.........................................133

VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number............348

Voice Control....................................................78

W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..............100

Using Terrain Control.................................202

Adaptive Cruise Control..................................100

567

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Index
Anti-Lock Braking System..............................100
Automatic High Beam Control.......................101
Battery.....................................................................101
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................101
Brake System........................................................101
Cruise Control.......................................................101
Direction Indicator...............................................101
Door Ajar.................................................................101
Engine Coolant Temperature..........................101
Engine Oil...............................................................101
Fasten Safety Belt..............................................102
Front Airbag..........................................................102
Front Fog Lamps................................................102
Heads Up Display...............................................102
High Beam.............................................................102
Hood Ajar...............................................................102
Lane Keeping Aid................................................102
Liftgate Ajar..........................................................102
Low Fuel Level.....................................................102
Low Tire Pressure Warning.............................102
Low Washer Fluid...............................................102
Parking Lamps.....................................................102
Powertrain Fault.................................................102
Service Engine Soon..........................................103
Stability Control..................................................103
Stability Control Off..........................................103
Transmission Tow/Haul...................................103

Washer Fluid Check....................................298
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior..............................309

Waxing...............................................................311
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel........................337

Wheels and Tires...........................................317
General Information...........................................317
Technical Specifications..................................341

Windows and Mirrors.....................................91
Windshield Washers.....................................82
Front Camera Washer........................................82

Windshield Wipers.........................................81
Speed Dependent Wipers.................................81

Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades.................300

Wipers and Washers......................................81

568

Explorer (TUB) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201711, Fourth-Printing

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : Unknown
Create Date                     : 2018:04:25 08:31:36Z
Modify Date                     : 2018:06:07 09:59:22-05:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.4-c005 78.147326, 2012/08/23-13:03:03
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : Untitled
Creator                         : Unknown
Producer                        : XEP 4.16 build 20090723
Trapped                         : False
Creator Tool                    : Unknown
Metadata Date                   : 2018:06:07 09:59:22-05:00
Document ID                     : uuid:afdfb8ed-64fb-461b-b068-4af324b35f8b
Instance ID                     : uuid:fad4dc84-8425-485e-9d80-1c9d98d2b4e1
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 571

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools